Thông số kỹ thuật cẩu Liebherr

SEC. NO.
S H IP D E S IG N O F F IC E S H IP T Y P E
C3B2 S H IP O U T F I T T I N G D E S I G N D E P T 1 4 ,5 0 0 T E U C L A S S C O N T A I N E R C A R R I E R
TEL. NO. S H IP NO. S H IP NAME

23762 2358 M A E R S K C A R D IF F (I M O 9 5 2 9 2 5 5 )
APPROVED B. H. BAEK NAME O F D R A W IN G
G. S. BANG O P E R A T I N G M A N U A L F O R C A R G O H A N D L IN G
CHECKED
CRANE
DRAW N
DATE 2012. 1 2 .10 SCALE D R A W IN G NO.

6 J -5 1 3 2 -0 0 1
/
HYUNDAI HEAVY IN D U S T R IE S C O ,, L T D C O N S O L ID A T E D NO.
IO - 2 - A
L o w V o lta g e M o to rs
M a o ya i fo r L o w V o lta g e i¥iotors
□ Installation, operation,
maintenance and safety
m a n u a l....... .................... }.................EN 3
□ Montage-, Betriebs-,
Wartungs- und
Sicherheitsanleitung .......................DE 21
□ Manuel d ’installation,
d’exploitation, de maintenance
et de s é c u rité ................................ FR 39
□ Manual de instalaciön,
funcionamiento, mantenimiento
y seguridad ................................... ES 57
□ Manuale d ’installazione,
funzionamento e
manutenzione.............. .................. IT 75
□ Installations-, drifftS“,
underhålls- och säkerhets-
manual ..................... . SV 93
□ Asennus-, käyttö-, kunnossa-

pito- ja turvallisuusohje...... Fl 111
More languages - see web site

www.äbb.com/mötors&generators >
Motors > Document library
ABB
il » II
E C D e c la r a tio n o f C o n fo r m ity
The Manufacturer: (Name and address of the manufacturer)
hereby declares that
The Products: (Product identification)
are in conformity with the corresponding essential requirements of following EC directive:
D ir e c tiv e 2 0 0 6 /9 5 /E C ( o f 12 D e c e m b e r 2 0 0 6 ).
The motors are in compliance with the following harmonized standard:
EN 60 034-1(2004)
which thus comply with Principal Elements of the Safety Objectives for Electrical Equipement stated in
Annex I of said directive.
When installing motors for converter supply applications, additional requirements must be
N o te :
respected regarding the motor as well as the installation, as described in installation manual delivered
with converters.
Year of CE mari<ing :
Signed by
Title
Date
ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

L o w V o lt a g e M o t o r s
In s t a lla tio n , o p e r a t io n , m a in te n a n c e a n d s a fe ty m a n u a l u
L is t o f C o n te n ts Page
1. Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................5
1.1 Declaration of Conform ity...................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 V aiidity.....................................................................................................................................................5
2. H a n d lin g ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
2.1 Reception che ck..................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Transportation and storage ...................................................................................................................6
2.3 Lifting ......................................................................................................................................................6
2.4 Machine w e ig h t...................................................................................................................................... 6
3. Installation and com m issioning ................................................................................................................... 7

3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.2 Insulation resistance c h e c k ................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Foundation ............................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4 Balancing and fitting coupling halves and p u lle ys....................................................................... 8
3.5 Mounting and alignment of the motor .................................................................................................. 8
3.6 Slide rails and belt drives .............................................................................................................. 8
3.7 Machines with drain plugs for condensation ................................................................................8
3.8 Cabling and electrical connections....................................................................................................... 8
3.8.1 Connections for different starting methods ...............................................................................9
3.8.2 Connections of a u xiliaries.......................................................................................................... 9
3.9 Terminals and direction of rotation ....................................................................................................... 9
4. Operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.1 U s e ........................................................................................................................................................ 10
4.2. C oo lin g ..................................................................................................................................................10
4.3. Safety considerations.......................................................................................................................... 10
5. Low voltage m otors in variable speed o p e ra tio n ................................................................................. 1

5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
5.2 Winding insulation............................................................................................................................... 1
5.2.1 Phase to phase voltages......................................................................................................... 1
5.2.1 Phase to ground voltages ....................................................................................................... 1
5.2.3 Selection of winding insulation for ACS550- andACSBOO-converters...................................1
5.2.4 Selection of winding insulation withall otherconverters.........................................................1
ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009 EN-3

LIJ
5.3 Thermal protection of w in d in g s.......................................................................................................... 11

5.4 Bearing currents................................................................................................................................... 11
5.4.1 Elimination of bearing currents with ABB ACS550 and ACS800 converters ..................... 12
5.4.2 Elimination of bearing currents with all other converters ..................................................... 12
5.5 Cabling, grounding and E M C ..............................................................................................................12
5.6 Operating s p e e d ................................................................................................................................... 12
5.7 Dimensioning the motor for variable speed application.....................................................................12
5.7.1 General ......................................................................................................................................12
5.7.2 Dimensioning with ABB ACS800 converters with DTC control ........................................... 12
5.7.3 Dimensioning with ABB ACS550 converters......................................................................... 13
5.7.4 Dimensioning with other voltage source PWM-type converters.......................................... 13
5.7.5 Short time overloads.................................................................................................................13
5.8 Rating plates .........................................................................................................................................13
5.9 Commissioning the variable speed application ................................................................................. 13
6. M a in te n a n c e ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1 4
6.1. General inspection ............................................................................................................................... 14

6.2 Lubrication ............................................................................................................................................14
6.2.1 Machines with permanently greased bearings....................................................................... 14
6.2.2 Motors with regreasable b e arings........................................................................................... 15
6.2.3 Lubrication intervals and amounts .......................................................................................... 15
6.2.4 Lubricants ..................................................................................................................................17
7. A fte r S a le s S u p p o r t .................................................................................................................................................................. 18
7.1. Spare parts ...........................................................................................................................................18

7.2 Rewinding .............................................................................................................................................18
7.3 B e a rin gs................................................................................................................................................ 18
8. E n v i r o n m e n t a l r e q u i r e m e n t s ...............................................................................................................................................18
8.1 Noise le v e ls ...........................................................................................................................................18
9. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1 9
E N -4 ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

1 . In tr o d u c tio n
z
NOTE! 1 .2 V a lid ity UJ
These instructions must be followed to ensure safe The instructions are valid for the following ABB electrical
and proper installation, operation and maintenance machine types. In both motor and generator operation.
of the machine. They should be brought to the
attention of anyone who installs, operates or series MT*, MXMA,
maintains the machine or associated equipment. series M2A*/M3A*, M2B7M3B*, M4B*, M2CVM3C*,
The machine is Intended for installation and use by M2FVM3F*, M2LVM3L*, M2MVM3M*, M2Q*,
qualified personnel, familiar with health and safety M2RVM3R*, M2VVM3V*
requirements and national legislation. Ignoring in frame sizes 56 - 450.
these instructions may invalidate all applicable
There is a separate manual for e.g. Ex motors ‘Low
warranties.
voltage motors for hazardous areas: Installation,
operation and maintenance Manual’ (Low Voltage Motors/
Manual for Ex-motors).
1 .1 D e c la r a tio n o f C o n fo r m ity Additional information Is required for some machine types

due to special application and/or design considerations.
Declarations of Conformity with respect to the Low
voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68 Additional information Is available for the following motors:
lEEC are Issued separately with individual machines. - roller table motors
- water cooled motors
The Declaration of Conformity also satisfies the - open drip proof motors
requirements of a Declaration of Incorporation with - smoke venting motors
respect to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC, Art 4.2 - brake motors
Annex II, sub B - motors for high ambient temperatures

center of gravity because of different output, mounting
2 . H a n d lin g
arrangements and auxiliary equipment.
2 .1 R e c e p tio n ch e c k Damaged lifting lugs must not be used. Check that

UJ eyebolts or integrated lifting lugs are undamaged before
Immediately upon receipt check the motor for external lifting.
damage (e.g. shaft-ends and flanges and painted
surfaces) and if found, inform the fonwarding agent Lifting eyebolts must be tightened before lifting. If needed,
without delay. the position of the eyebolt can be adjusted using suitable
washers as spacers.
Checl< all rating plate data, especially voltage and winding
connection (star or delta). The type of bearing is specified Ensure that proper lifting equipment is used and that the
on the rating plate of all motors except the smallest frame sizes of the hooks are suitable for the lifting lugs.
sizes. Care must be taken not to damage auxiliary equipment
and cables connected to the motor.
2 .2 T r a n s p o r t a t io n a n d s to ra g e
The motor should always be stored indoors (above 2 .4 l\/la c h in e w e ig h t

-20°C), in dry, vibration free and dust free conditions. The total machine weight can vary within the same
During transportation, shocks, falls and humidity should frame size (center height) depending on different output,
be avoided. In other conditions, please contact ABB. mounting arrangement and auxiliaries.
Unprotected machined surfaces (shaft-ends and flanges) The following table shows estimated maximum weights
should be treated against corrosion. for machines in their basic versions as a function of frame
It is recommended that shafts are rotated periodically by material.
hand to prevent grease migration. The actual weight of all ABB’s motors, except the smallest
Anti-condensation heaters, if fitted, are recommended to frame sizes (56 and 63) is shown on the rating plate.
be used to avoid water condensing in the motor.
Frame Aluminum C ast iron Steel
size Add.
The motor must not be subject to any external vibrations Weight Weiglit Weight for brake
at standstill so as to avoid causing damage to the kg kg kg
bearings. 56 4.5 - -
63 6 - -
Motors fitted with cylindrical-roller and/or angular contact
71 8 13 5
bearings must be fitted with locking devices during 12 20 8
80
transport. 90 17 30 10
100 25 40 16
112 36 50 20
2 .3 L iftin g
132 63 90 30
All ABB motors above 25 kg are equipped with lifting lugs 160 95 130 30
or eyebolts. 180 135 190 45
200 200 275 55
Only the main lifting lugs or eyebolts of the motor should 225 265 360 75
be used for lifting the motor. They must not be used to lift 250 305 405 75
the motor when it is attached to other equipment. 280 390 800 600 -
315 - 1700 1000 -
Lifting lugs for auxiliaries (e.g. brakes, separate cooling 355 - 2700 2200 -
fans) or terminal boxes must not be used for lifting the 400 - 3500 3000 -
motor. 450 - 4500 - -
Motors with the same frame may have a different
EN-6 ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

3 . In s t a lla tio n a n d c o m m is s io n in g
Insulation resistance, corrected to 25°C, must exceed the

Z
lU
WARNING reference value, i.e. 100 MQ (measured with 500 or 1000
Disconnect and lock out before working on the V DC). The insulation resistance value is halved for each
motor or the driven equipment. ; 20°C rise in ambient temperature.
WARNING
3 .1 G e n e ra l
The motor frame must be grounded and the
All rating plate values must be carefully checked to windings should be discharged against the frame
ensure that the motor protection and connection will be immediately after each measurement to avoid risk
properly done. of electrical shock.
WARNING If the reference resistance value is not attained, the

In case of motors mounted with the shaft upwards winding is too damp and must be oven dried. The oven
and water or liquids are expected to go down along temperature should be 90°C for 12-16 hours followed by
the shaft, the user must take in account to mount 105°C for 6-8 hours.
some means capable of preventing it.
Drain hole plugs, if fitted, must be removed and closing
valves, if fitted, must be opened during heating. After
heating, make sure the plugs are refitted. Even if the
Remove transport locking if employed. Turn shaft by hand drain plugs are fitted, it is recommended to disassemble
to check free rotation if possible. the end shields and terminal box covers for the drying
process.
M o to rs e q u ip p e d w ith ro lle r b e a rin g s ;
Windings drenched in seawater normally need to be
Running the motor with no radial force applied to the shaft rewound.
may damage the roller bearing.
3 .3 F o u n d a tio n
M o to rs e q u ip p e d w ith a n g u la r c o n ta c t b e a rin g :
Running the motor with no axial force applied in the right The end user has full responsibility for preparation of the
direction in relation to the shaft may damage the angular foundation.
contact bearing.
Metal foundations should be painted to avoid corrosion.
WARNING Foundations must be even, see figure below, and

For machines with angular contact bearings sufficiently rigid to withstand possible short circuit forces.
the axial force must not by any means change They must be designed and dimensioned to avoid the
direction. transfer of vibration to the motor and vibration caused by
resonance.
The type of bearing is specified on the rating plate. Ruler
M o to rs e q u ip p e d w ith re g re a s in g n ip p le s :
When starting the motor for the first time, or after long
Note! Height difference shall
storage, apply the specified quantity of grease. not exceed ± 0,1m m referred
to any other motor foot
For details, see section “6.2.2 Motors with regreasable
bearings”.
3 .2 In s u la tio n r e s is ta n c e c h e c k
Measure insulation resistance before commissioning and

Foot location
when winding dampness is suspected.
WARNING
Disconnect and lock out before working on the'
rtiotor or the driven equipment.

Belts must be tensioned according to the instructions
3 .4 B a la n c in g a n d fittin g c o u p lin g
of the supplier of the driven equipment. However, do
h a lv e s a n d p u lle y s not exceed the maximum belt forces (i.e. radial bearing
loading) stated in the relevant product catalogues.
LU As standard, balancing of the motor has been carried out
using half key
WARNING
When balancing with full key, the shaft is marked with Excessive belt tension will damage bearings and
YELLOW tape, with the text “Balanced with full key”. can cause shaft damage.
In case of balancing without key, the shaft is marked with
BLUE tape, with the text “Balanced without key”.
Coupling halves or pulleys must be balanced after 3 .7 M a c h in e s w it h d r a in p lu g s

machining the keyways. Balancing must be done in
accordance with the balancing method specified for the f o r c o n d e n s a tio n
motor.
Check that drain holes and plugs face downwards.
Coupling halves and pulleys must be fitted on the shaft by
using suitable equipment and tools which do not damage Machines with sealable plastic drain plugs are delivered
the bearings and seals. in open position. In very dusty environments, all drain
holes should be closed.
Never fit a coupling half or pulley by hammering or by
removing it using a lever pressed against the body of the
motor. 3 .8 C a b lin g a n d e le c tr ic a l
c o n n e c tio n s
3 .5 M o u n tin g a n d a lig n m e n t The terminal box on standard single speed motors
o f th e m o to r normally contains six winding terminals and at least one
earth terminal.
Ensure that there is enough space for free airflow around
the motor. Minimum requirements for free space behind In addition to the main winding and earthing terminals,
the motor fan cover can be found from the product the terminal box can also contain connections for
catalog or from the dimension drawings available from the thermistors, heating elements or other auxiliary devices.
web: see www.abb.com/motors&generators.
Suitable cable lugs must be used for the connection of all
Correct alignment is essential to avoid bearing, vibration main cables. Cables for auxiliaries can be connected into
and possible shaft failures. their terminal blocks as such.
Mount the motor on the foundation using the appropriate Machines are intended for fixed installation only. If not
bolts or studs and place shim plates between the otherwise specified, cable entry threads are metric. The
foundation and the feet. IP-class of the cable gland must be at least the same as
those of the terminal boxes.
Align the motor using appropriate methods.
Unused cable entries must be closed with blanking
If applicable, drill locating holes and fix the locating pins elements according to the IP class of the terminal box.
into position.
The degree of protection and diameter are specified in
Mounting accuracy of coupling half: check that clearance the documents relating to the cable gland.
b is less than 0.05 mm and that the difference a1 to a2 is
also less than 0.05 mm. See Figure 3.
WARNING
Re-check the alignment after final tightening of the bolts Use appropriate cable glands and seals in the
or studs. cable entries according to the type and diameter of
the cable.
Do not exceed permissible loading values for bearings as
stated in the product catalogues.
Additional information on cables and glands suitable for

3 .6 S lid e r a ils a n d b e lt d r iv e s variable speed applications can be found from chapter
5.5.
Fasten the motor to the slide rails as shown in Figure 2.
Earthing must be carried out according to local
Place the slide rails horizontally on the same level.
regulations before the machine is connected to the supply
Check that the motor shaft is parallel with the drive shaft. voltage.

Ensure that the motor protection corresponds to the 3.8.2 C o n n e c tio n s o f a u x ilia rie s
environment and weather conditions; for example, make
If a motor is equipped with thermistors or other RTDs
sure that water cannot enter the motor or the terminal (Pt100, thermal relays, etc.) and auxiliary devices,
boxes. Z
it is recommended they be used and connected by LU
The seals of terminal boxes must be placed correctly in appropriate means. Connection diagrams for auxiliary
the slots provided, to ensure the correct IP class. elements and connection parts can be found inside the
terminal box.
3.8.1 C o n n e c tio n s fo r d iffe re n t s ta rtin g
Maximum measuring voltage for the thermistors is 2.5 V.
m e th o d s Maximum measuring current for Pt100 is 5 mA. Using a
The terminal box on standard single speed motors higher measuring voltage or current may cause errors in
normally contains six winding terminals and at least readings or damage the system.
one earth terminal. This enables the use of DOL- orY/D
-starting. See Figure 1. The insulations of the winding thermal sensors is of basic
type. While connecting the sensors to control systems
For two-speed and special motors, the supply connection etc, ensure adequate insulation or isolation, see lEC
must follow the instructions inside the terminal box or in 60664.
the motor manual.
The voltage and connection are stamped on the rating NOTE!

plate. Ensure the insulation level or isolation of thermistor
circuit, see IEC 60664.
Direct-on-line starting (DOL):
*Y or D winding connections may be used.
For example, 690 VY, 400 VD indicates Y-connection for 3 .9 T e r m in a ls a n d d ir e c t io n

690 V and D-connection for 400 V. o f r o ta tio n
Star/Delta starting (Y/D):
The shaft rotates clockwise when viewing the shaft face
The supply voltage must be equal to the rated voltage of at the motor drive end, and the line phase sequence - L1,
the motor when using a D-connection. L2, L3 - is connected to the terminals as shown in
Figure 1.
Remove all connection links from the terminal block.
To alter the direction of rotation, interchange any two
Other starting methods and severe starting
connections on the supply cables.
conditions:
In case other starting methods are used, such as a soft If the motor has a unidirectional fan, ensure that it rotates
starter, or if starting conditions are particularly difficult, in the same direction as the arrow marked on the motor.
please consult ABB first.

4 . O p e r a tio n
U l 4 .1 U s e 4 .2 . C o o lin g
The motors are designed for the following conditions Check that the motor has sufficient airflow. Ensure that no
unless otherwise stated on the rating plate. nearby objects or direct sunshine radiate additional heat
to the motor.
- Normal ambient temperature limits are -20°C to +40°C.
- Maximum altitude 1000 m above sea level. For flange mounted motors (e.g. B5, B35, V I), make sure
- Tolerance for supply voltage is ±5% and for frequency that the construction allows sufficient air flow on the outer
±2% according to EN / lEC 60034-1 (2004). surface of the flange.
The motor can only be used in applications it is intended

for. The rated nominal values and operational conditions 4 .3 . S a fe ty c o n s id e r a t io n s
are shown on the motor rating plates. In addition, all
The machine is intended for installation and use by
requirements of this manual and other related instructions
qualified personnel, familiar with health and safety
and standards must be followed. requirements and national legislation.
If these limits are exceeded, motor data and construction
Safety equipment necessary for the prevention of
data must be checked. Please contact ABB for further
accidents at the installation and operating site must be
information.
provided in accordance with local regulations.
WARNING
W A R N IN G
Ignoring any of given instructions or maintenance Do not carry out work on motor, connection cables
of the apparatus may jeopardize the safety and or accessories such as frequency converters,
thus prevents the use of the machine. starters, brakes, thermistor cables or heating
elements when voltage is applied.
P o in t s t o o b s e r v e
1. Do not step on the motor.
2. The temperature of the outer casing of the motor

may be too hot to touch during normal operation and
especially after shut-down.
3. Some special motor applications require special

instructions (e.g. using frequency converter supplies).
4. Be aware of rotating parts of the motor.
5. Do not open terminal boxes while energized.

5 . L o w v o lta g e m o to rs in v a r ia b le s p e e d o p e r a tio n
z
5 .1 In tr o d u c tio n 5 .2.3 S e le c tio n o f w in d in g in s u la tio n fo r UJ
A C S 800- a n d A C S 5 5 0 -co n ve rte rs
This part of the manual provides additional instructions
in the case of ABB ACSSOO-series and ACS550-series
for motors used in frequency converter supply.
single drives with a diode supply unit (uncontrolled DC
Instructions provided in this and respective manuals of
voltage), the selection of winding insulation and filters can
selected frequency converter must be followed to ensure
be made according to table below:
safety and availability of the motor.
Additional information may be required by ABB to decide N o m in a l s u p p ly W in d in g in s u la t io n a n d
on the suitability for some machine types used in special v o lt a g e o f th e filt e r s r e q u ir e d
applications or with special design modifications. c o n v e rte r

U„ < 500 V ABB Standard insulation
< 600 V ABB Standard insulation
5 .2 W in d in g in s u la tio n
+ dU/dt filters
Variable speed drives cause higher voltage stresses than OR
the sinusoidal supply on the winding of the motor and ABB Special insulation
therefore the winding insulation of the motor as well as (variant code 405)
the filter at the converter output must be dimensioned < 690 V ABB Special insulation
|3ccording following instructions. (variant code 405)
AND
dU/dt-filters at converter
5 .2 .1 P h ase to p h a s e v o lta g e s output
The maximum allowed phase to phase voltage peaks at < 690 V ABB Special insulation
the motor terminal as a function of the rise time of the AND (variant code 405)
pulse can be seen in Figure 1. cable length > 150 m
The highest curve “ABB Special Insulation” applies to For more information on resistor braking and converters
motors with a special winding insulation for frequency with controlled supply units, please contact ABB.
converter supply, variant code 405.
The “ABB Standard Insulation” applies to all other motors 5 .2 .4 S e le c tio n o f w in d in g

covered by this manual. in s u la tio n w ith a ll o t h e r
c o n v e rte rs
5 .2.2 P h ase to g ro u n d v o lta g e s
The allowed phase to ground voltage peaks at motor The voltage stresses must be limited below accepted
terminals are: limits. Please contact the system supplier to ensure the
safety of the application. The influence of possible filters
Standard Insulation 1300 V peak must be taken into account while dimensioning the motor.
Special Insulation 1800 V peak
5 .3 T h e r m a l p r o te c tio n
Most of the motors covered by this manual are

equipped with PTC thermistors in the stator windings.
It is recommended to connect those to the frequency
converter by appropriate means. See also chapter 3.8.2.
5 .4 B e a r in g c u rre n ts
Insulated bearings or bearing constructions, common

mode filters and suitable cabling and grounding methods
must be used according to the following instructions:

5.4.1 E lim in a tio n o f b e a rin g c u rre n ts w ith For motors of frame size I EC 280 and upward, additional
A B B AC S800 a n d A C S 550 c o n v e rte rs potential equalization between the motor frame and the
driven equipment is needed, unless both are mounted
In the case of the ABB ACS800 and ACS550-series
on a common steel base. In this case, the high frequency
lÜ frequency converter with a diode supply unit, the following
conductivity of the connection provided by the steel
methods must be used to avoid harmful bearing currents
base should be checked by, for example, measuring the
in the motors:
potential difference between the components.
Nominal Power (Pn) Preventive measures More information about grounding and cabling of variable
and / or Frame size (lEC) speed drives can be found in the manual “Grounding and
P n<100 kW No actions needed cabling of the drive system” (Code: 3AFY 61201998).
Pn> 100 kW Insulated non-drive end
OR bearing 5 .6 O p e r a tin g sp e e d
lEC 315 < Frame size
< IEC 355 For speeds higher than the nominal speed stated on
Pn > 350 kW Insulated non-drive end the motor’s rating plate or in the respective product
OR bearing catalogue, ensure that either the highest permissible
IEC 400 < Frame size AND rotational speed of the motor or the critical speed of the
< IEC 450 Common mode filter at whole application is not exceeded.
the converter
5 .7 D im e n s io n in g th e m o to r fo r
Insulated bearings which have aluminum oxide coated
inner and/or outer bores or ceramic rolling elements, v a r ia b le sp e e d a p p lic a tio n
are recommended. Aluminum oxide coatings shall also
be treated with a sealant to prevent dirt and humidity 5.7.1 G e n e ra l
penetrating into the porous coating. For the exact type of In case of ABB’s frequency converters, the motors can
bearing insulation, see the motor’s rating plate. Changing be dimensioned by using ABB’s DriveSize dimensioning
the bearing type or insulation method without ABB’s program. The tool is downloadable from the ABB website
permission is prohibited. (www.abb.com/motors&generators).
For application supplied by other converters, the motors

5 .4 .2 E lim in a tio n o f b e a rin g c u rre n ts w ith a ll
must be dimensioned manually. For more information,
o th e r c o n v e rte rs please contact ABB.
The user is responsible for protecting the motor and
driven equipment from harmful bearing currents. The loadability curves (or load capacity curves) are based
Instructions described in Chapter 5.4.1 can be used as on nominal supply voltage. Operation in under or over
guideline, but their effectiveness cannot be guaranteed in voltage conditions may influence on the performance of
all cases. the application.
5 .5 C a b lin g , g r o u n d in g and EM C 5.7.2 D im e n s io n in g w ith A B B A C S 800

c o n v e rte rs w ith D TC c o n tro l
To provide proper grounding and to ensure compliance
The loadability curves presented in Figures 4a - 4d
with any applicable EMC requirements, motors above 30
are valid for ABB ACS800 converters with uncontrolled
kW shall be cabled by shielded symmetrical cables and
DC-voltage and DTC-control.The figures show the
EMC glands, i.e. cable glands providing 360° bonding.
approximate maximum continuous output torque of the
Also for smaller motors symmetrical and shielded cables
motors as a function of supply frequency. The output
are highly recommended. Make the 360° grounding
torque is given as a percentage of the nominal torque of
arrangement at all the cable entries as described in the
the motor. The values are indicative and exact values are
instructions for the glands. Twist the cable shields into
available on request.
bundles and connect to the nearest ground terminal/bus
bar inside the terminal box, converter cabinet, etc.
NOTE!
The maximum speed of the motor must not be
NOTE!
exceeded!
Proper cable glands providing 360° bonding must
be used at all termination points, e.g. at motor,
converter, possible safety switch, etc.

5 .7.3 D im e n s io n in g w ith A B B A C S 550 special applications the motors can be equipped with
c o n v e rte rs additional rating plates for variable speed applications
and those include following information:
The loadability curves presented in Figures 5a - 5d are z
valid for ABB ACS550 series converters. The figures - speed range LU
show the approxinnate maximum continuous output - power range
torque of the motors as a function of supply frequency. - voltage and current range
The output torque is given as a percentage of the nominal - type of torque (constant or quadratic)
torque of the motor. The values are indicative and exact - converter type and required minimum switching
values are available on request. frequency
NOTE! 5 .9 C o m m is s io n in g t lie v a r ia b le
The maximum speed of the motor must not be
sp e e d a p p lic a tio n
exceeded!
The commissioning of the variable speed application
must be done according to the instructions of the
5.7.4 D im e n s io n in g w ith o th e r vo lta g e frequency converter and local laws and regulations. The
requirements and limitations set by the application must
s o u rc e PW lVI-type c o n v e rte rs
also be taken into account.
For other converters, which have uncontrolled DC
voltage and minimum switching frequency of 3 kHz, All parameters needed for setting the converter must
.the dimensioning instructions of ACS550 can be used be taken from the motor rating plates. The most often
*as guidelines, but it shall be noted, that the actual needed parameters are:
thermal loadability can also be lower. Please contact the
manufacturer of the converter or the system supplier. - Motor nominal voltage
- Motor nominal current
- Motor nominal frequency
NOTE! - Motor nominal speed
The actual thermal loadability of a motor may be - Motor nominal power
lower than shown by guideline curves.
Note: In case of missing or inaccurate information, do not
operate the motor before ensuring correct settings!
5 .7.5 S h o rt tim e o v e rlo a d s ABB recommends using all the suitable protective
features provided by the converter to improve the safety
ABB motors can usually be temporarily overloaded as
of the application. Converters usually provide features
well as used In Intermittent duties. The most convenient
such as (names and availability of features depend on
method to dimension such applications is to use the
manufacturer and model of the converter):
DriveSize tool.
- Minimum speed
5 .8 R a tin g p la te s - Maximum speed
- Acceleration and deceleration times
kThe usage of ABB’s motors in variable speed applications - Maximum current
*do not usually require additional rating plates and the - Maximum Torque
parameters required for commissioning the converter can - Stall protection
be found from the main rating plate. However, in some

6 . M a in te n a n c e
z
LU 6 .2 L u b r ic a tio n
WARNING
Voltage may be connected at standstill inside the
terminal box for heating elements or direct winding
heating.
WARNING
Beware of all rotating parts!
WARNING
The capacitor in single-phase motors can retain a
WARNING
Grease can cause skin irritation and eye
charge that appears across the motor terminals,
inflammation. Follow all safety precautions
even when the motor has reached standstill.
specified by the manufacturer.
WARNING Bearing types are specified in the respective product

A motor with frequency converter supply may catalogs and on the rating plate of all motors except
energize even if the motor is at standstill. smaller frame sizes.
Reliability is a vital issue for bearing lubrication intervals.

ABB uses mainly the L,-principle (i.e. that 99% of the
6 .1 . G e n e ra l in s p e c tio n motors are certain to make the life time) for lubrication.
1. Inspect the motor at regular intervals, at least once 6.2.1 M a ch in e s w ith p e rm a n e n tly g re a s e d
a year. The frequency of checks depends on, for
b e a rin g s
example, the humidity level of the ambient air and
on the local weather conditions. This can initially be Bearings are usually permanently greased bearings of
determined experimentally and must then be strictly 1Z, 2Z, 2RS or equivalent types.
adhered to. As a guide, adequate lubrication for sizes up to 250 can
2. Keep the motor clean and ensure free ventilation be achieved for the following duration, according to L,^.
airflow. If the motor is used in a dusty environment,
Duty hours for permanently greased bearings at ambient
the ventilation system must be regularly checked and
temperatures of 25 and 40° C are:
cleaned.
3. Check the condition of shaft seals (e.g. V-ring or radial Lubrication intervals according to L principle
seal) and replace if necessary
D u ty h o u rs D u ty h o u rs
4. Check the condition of connections and mounting and Fram e
assembly bolts. s iz e P o le s at 25° C at 40° C
5 6 -6 3 2-8 40 000 40 000
5. Check the bearing condition by listening for any
71 2 40 000 40 000
unusual noise, vibration measurement, bearing
71 4 -8 40 000 40 000
temperature, inspection of spent grease or SPM
8 0 -9 0 2 40 000 40 000
bearing monitoring. Pay special attention to bearings
8 0 -9 0 4 -8 40 000 40 000
when their calculated rated life time is coming to an
1 0 0 -1 1 2 2 40 000 32 000
end.
1 0 0 -1 1 2 4 -8 40 000 40 000
When signs of wear are noticed, dismantle the motor, 13 2 2 40 000 27 000
check the parts and replace if necessary. When bearings 13 2 4 -8 40 000 40 000
are changed, replacement bearings must be of the 160 2 40 000 36 000
same type as those originally fitted. The shaft seals 160 4 -8 40 000 40 000
have to be replaced with seals of the same quality and 180 2 38 000 38 000
characteristics as the originals when changing bearings. 4 -8 40 000 40 000
18 0
In the case of the IP 55 motor and when the motor has 200 2 27 000 27 000
been delivered with a plug closed, it is advisable to 200 4 -8 40 000 40 000
periodically open the drain plugs in order to ensure that 225 2 23 000 18 00 0
the way out for condensation is not blocked and allows 225 4 -8 40 000 40 000
condensation to escape from the motor. This operation 250 2 16 000 13 0 0 0
must be done when the motor is at a standstill and has 250 4 -8 40 000 39 000
been made safe to work on.
Data valid at 50 Hz, for 60 Hz reduce values for 20 %.

These values are valid for permitted load values given in B. Automatic lubrication
the product catalog. Depending on application and load The grease outlet plug must be removed permanently
conditions, see the applicable product catalog or contact with automatic lubrication or open closing valve if fitted.
ABB.
ABB recommends only the use of electromechanical LU
Operation hours for vertical motors are half of the above systems.
values.
The amount of grease per lubrication interval stated in
6 .2.2 M o to rs w ith re g re a s a b le b e a rin g s the table should be multiplied by four if an automatic
regreasing system is used.
Lubrication information plate and general lubrication
advice When 2-pole motors are automatically regreased, the
If the machine is equipped with a lubrication information note concerning lubricant recommendations for 2-pole
plate, follow the given values. motors in the Lubricants chapter should be followed.
On the lubrication information plate, greasing intervals 6 .2.3 L u b ric a tio n in te rv a ls a n d a m o u n ts

regarding mounting, ambient temperature and rotational As a guide, adequate lubrication for motors with
speed are defined. regreasable bearings can be achieved for the following
duration, according to L,. For duties with higher ambient
During the first start or after a bearing lubrication a
temperatures please contact ABB. The formula to change
temporary temperature rise may appear, approximately
the L, values roughly to L^g values: L,^ = 2.7 x L,.
10 to 20 hours.
Lubrication intervals for vertical machines are half of the
I Some motors may be equipped with a collector for old
values shown in the table below.
grease. Follow the special instructions given for the
equipment. The lubrication intervals are based on an ambient
temperature +25°C. An increase in the ambient
A. Manual lubrication
temperature raises the temperature of the bearings
Regreasing while the motor is running correspondingly. The values should be halved for a 15°C
increase and may be doubled for a 15°C decrease.
- Remove grease outlet plug or open closing valve if
fitted. In variable speed operation (i.e. frequency converter
- Be sure that the lubrication channel is open supply) it is necessary to measure the bearing
- Inject the specified amount of grease into the bearing. temperature for the whole duty range and if exceeds
- Let the motor run for 1-2 hours to ensure that all excess 80°C, the lubrication intervals should be halved for a 15°C
grease is forced out of the bearing. Close the grease increase in bearing temperature. If the motor is operated
outlet plug or closing valve if fitted. at high speeds, it is also possible to utilize so called high
Regreasing while the motor is at a standstill speed greases, see chapter 6.2.4.
If it is not possible to regrease the bearings while the

motors are running, lubrication can be carried out while WARNING
the machine is at a standstill. ' The maximuhn operating temperature of the grease
- In this case use only half the quantity of grease and and bearings, -i-l 10°C, must not be exceeded.
then run the motor for a few minutes at full speed. The designed nnaximum speed of the motor must '
- When the motor has stopped, apply the rest of the not be exceeded.
specified amount of grease to the tjearing.
- After 1-2 running hours close the grease outlet plug or
closing valve if fitted.

L u b ric a tio n in te rv a ls a c c o rd in g to L, p rin c ip le
Am ount
Frame 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
of grease kW kW kW kW
size r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
gAjearing
Ball bearings
Lubrication intervals in duty hours

112 10 all 10000 13000 all 18000 21000 all 25000 all 28000
132 15 all 9000 11000 all 17000 19000 all 23000 all 26500
160 25 <18,5 9000 12000 <15 18000 21500 <11 24000 all 24000
160 25 >18,5 7500 10000 >15 15000 18000 >11 22500 all 24000
180 30 <22 7000 9000 <22 15500 18500 ^15 24000 all 24000
180 30 >22 6000 8500 >22 14000 17000 >15 21000 all 24000
200 40 <37 5500 8000 <30 14500 17500 <22 23000 all 24000
200 40 >37 3000 5500 >30 10000 12000 >22 16000 all 20000
225 50 <45 4000 6500 <45 13000 16500 <30 22000 all 24000
225 50 >45 1500 2500 >45 5000 6000 >30 8000 all 10000
250 60 <55 2500 4000 <55 9000 11500 <37 15000 all 18000
250 60 >55 1000 1500 >55 3500 4500 >37 6000 all 7000
280" 60 all 2000 3500 - - - - - -
280" 60 - - all 8000 10500 all 14000 all 17000
280 35 all 1900 3200 - - -
280 40 - - all 7800 9600 all 13900 all 15000
315 35 all 1900 3200 - - -
315 55 . - all 5900 7600 all 11800 all 12900
355 35 all 1900 3200 - - - -
355 70 - all 4000 5600 all 9600 all 10700
400 40 all 1500 2700 - - - -
400 85 - - all 3200 4700 all 8600 ail 9700
450 40 all 1500 2700 - - - -
450 95 - all 2500 3900 all 7700 all 8700
Roller bearings
Lubrication intervals in duty hours

160 25 <18,5 4500 6000 <15 9000 10500 <11 12000 all 12000
160 25 >18,5 3500 5000 >15 7500 9000 >11 11000 all 12000
180 30 <22 3500 4500 <22 7500 9000 <15 12000 all 12000
180 30 >22 3000 4000 >22 7000 8500 >15 10500 all 12000
200 40 <37 2750 4000 <30 7000 8500 <22 11500 all 12000
200 40 >37 1500 2500 >30 5000 6000 >22 8000 all 10000
225 50 <45 2000 3000 <45 6500 8000 <30 11000 all 12000
225 50 >45 750 1250 >45 2500 3000 >30 4000 all 5000
250 60 <55 1000 2000 <55 4500 5500 <37 7500 all 9000
250 60 >55 500 750 >55 1500 2000 >37 3000 all 3500
280" 60 all 1000 1750 - - - - - -
280" 70 - - - all 4000 5250 all 7000 all 8500

280 35 all 900 1600 - - - -
280 40 - - all 4000 5300 all 7000 all 8500

315 35 all 900 1600 - - - -
315 55 all 2900 3800 all 5900 all 6500

355 35 all 900 1600 - - -
355 70 all 2000 2800 all 4800 all 5400

400 40 all - 1300 - - - -
400 85 - - all 1600 2400 all 4300 all 4800

450 40 all - 1300 - - - -
450 95 - - all 1300 2000 all 3800 all 4400
1) M3AA
For motors M4BP 160 to 250 the interval may be increased by 30 %, up to a maximum of three calendar years.
The values in table above are valid also for sizes M4BP 280 to 355.

6.2.4 L u b ric a n ts The following high performance greases can be used:
- Esso Unirex N2 or N3 (lithium complex base)

WARNING - Mobil Mobilith SHC 100 (lithium complex base) Z
Do not mix different types of grease. - Shell Albida EMS 2 (lithium complex base) UJ
Incompatible lubricants may cause bearing - Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41-132 (special lithium base)
damage. - FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (lithium complex base)
- Lubcon Turmogrease L 802 EP PLUS
(special lithium base)
When regreasing, use only special ball bearing grease - Total Multiplex S 2 A (lithium complex base)
with the following properties:
- good quality grease with lithium complex soap and with
NOTE!
mineral- or PAO-oil
Always use high speed grease for high speed
- base oil viscosity 100-160 cST at 40°C
2-pole machines where the speed factor is higher
- consistency NLGI grade 1.5 - 3 *) than 480,000 (calculated as Dm x n where Dm
- temperature range -30°C - +120°C, continuously
= average bearing diameter, mm; n = rotational
*) For vertical mounted motors or in hot conditions a speed, r/min).The high speed grease is also used
Stifter end of scale is recommended. in motor types M2CA, M2FA, M2CG and M2FG,
frame sizes 355 to 400 2-pole machines.
The above mentioned grease specification is valid if the
ambient temperature is above -30°C or below +55°C,
kand the bearing temperature is below 110°C; othenwise The following greases can be used for high speed cast
'consult ABB regarding suitable grease.
iron motors but not mixed with lithium complex greases:
Grease with the correct properties is available from all the - Klüber Klüber Quiet BQH 72-102 (polyurea base)
major lubricant manufacturers.
- Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (polyurea base)
Admixtures are recommended, but a written guarantee If other lubricants are used;
must be obtained from the lubricant manufacturer,
especially concerning EP admixtures, that admixtures do Check with the manufacturer that the qualities
not damage bearings or the properties of lubricants at the correspond to those of the above mentioned lubricants.
operating temperature range. The lubrication interval are based on the listed high
performance greases above. Using other greases can
reduce the interval.
WARNING
Lubricants containing EP admixtures are not If the compatibility of the lubricant is uncertain, contact
recommended in high bearing temperatures in ABB.
frame sizes 280 to 450.

7 . A fte r S a le s S u p p o rt
z
ÜJ 7 . 1 . S p a r e p a r t s
When ordering spare parts, the motor serial number,
full type designation and product code, as stated on the
rating plate, must be specified.
For more information, please visit our web site

www.abb.com/partsonline.
7 .2 R e w in d in g
Rewinding should always be carried out by qualified

repair shops.
Smoke venting and other special motors should not be

rewound without first contacting ABB.
7 .3 B e a r in g s
Special care should be taken with the bearings. These

must be removed using pullers and fitted by heating or
using special tools for the purpose.
Bearing replacement is described in detail in a separate

instruction leaflet available from the ABB Sales Office.
8 . E n v ir o n m e n ta l r e q u ir e m e n ts
8 .1 N o is e le v e l s
Most of ABB’s motors have a sound pressure level not

exceeding 82 dB(A) at 50 Hz .
Values for specific machines can be found in the relevant

product catalogues. At 60 Hz sinusoidal supply the values
are approximately 4 dB(A) higher compared to 50 Hz
values in product catalogues.
For sound pressure levels at frequency converter supply,

please contact ABB.
Sound pressure levels for all machines having separate

cooling systems and for series M2FVM3F*, M2LVM3L*,
M2RVM3R*, M2BJ/M3BJ and M2LJ/M3LJ are indicated
in separate additional manuals.

9 . T r o u b le s h o o tin g
These instructions do not cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every possible condition to be met
LU
in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should additional information required, please contact the
nearest ABB Sales Office.
M o to r tro u b le s h o o tin g c h a rt
Your motor service and any troubleshooting must be handled by qualified persons who have proper tools and
equipment.
TRO U BLE CAUSE W H A T TO DO
M oto r fails to start Blow n fu s e s R e p la c e fu s e s with p ro p e r ty p e and rating.
O v e rlo a d trips C h e c k an d re s e t o v e rlo a d in starter.
Im p rop er p o w e r supply C h e c k to s e e that p o w e r sup plied a g r e e s with m otor rating plate and
lo ad factor.
Im p rop er line c o n n e ctio n s C h e c k c o n n e ctio n s a g a in st diagram sup plied with m otor.
O p e n circuit in w in din g o r control In d icated by hum m ing sou n d w h en sw itch is c lo s e d . C h e c k for loose
switch w iring con n ection s.
A ls o e n s u re that all control c on ta cts a re closin g.
M ech an ica l failure C h e c k to s e e if m otor an d d rive turn f r e e ly C h e c k b e a rin g s and

lubrication.
S h ort circuited stator In dicated by blow n fu s e s . M oto r must b e rew ound. R e m o v e end
P o o r stator coil con n ection shield s, lo c a te fault.
R o to r d e fe c tiv e L o o k for broken b ars o r e n d rings.
M otor m ay b e o v e rlo a d e d R e d u c e load.
M oto r stalls O n e p h a se m ay b e o p e n C h e c k lin es for o p e n p h a se.
W ro n g application C h a n g e ty p e o r size . C on su lt equ ip m en t supplier.
O v erlo a d R e d u c e load.
L o w v o lta g e E nsu re th e rating p late v o lta g e is m aintained. C h e c k con n ection .
O p e n circuit F u s e s blow n, c h eck o v e rlo a d relay, stator an d push buttons.
M oto r runs and P o w e r failure C h e c k for lo o s e c o n n e ctio n s to line, to fu s e s an d to con trol.

then d ie s dow n
M otor d o e s N o t ap p lied p rop erly C on su lt e qu ip m en t su p plier for p roper type.

not c o m e up to
V o lta g e to o low at m otor term in als U s e h igh er v o lta g e o r tran sform er term in als o r re d u c e lo ad . Ch eck
nom inal s p e e d
b e c a u s e o f line drop c o n n e ctio n s . C h e ck con d u cto rs for p ro p e r size.
Starting load to o high C h e c k th e start load o f th e motor.
B roken rotor bars o r lo o s e rotor L o o k for c rack s n ea r th e rings. A n ew rotor m a y b e requ ired , as
repairs a r e usually te m p o ra ry
O p e n prim ary circuit L o c a te fault with testin g d e v ic e and repair.

TRO U BLE CAUSE W H AT TO DO
m M otor takes too lo n g to E x c e s s iv e load R e d u c e load.
a c c e le ra te and/or d raw s C h e ck for high resista n ce. M a k e sure that a d e q u a te c a b le
L o w v o lta g e during start
high current s iz e is u sed.
D e fe c tiv e squirrel c a g e rotor R e p la c e with n ew rotor.
A p p lied v o lta g e to o low C o rre c t p o w e r supply.
W ro n g rotation direction W ro n g s e q u e n c e o f p h a s e s R e v e r s e c o n n e c tio n s at m o to r o r at sw itch board.
M otor overh eats w h ile O v e rlo a d R e d u c e load.

running O p e n ven t h o le s and c h e c k for a con tinu ous s tream o f air
Fram e o r ventilation o p e n in g s m ay
b e full o f dirt an d p reven t p ro p er from th e motor.
ventilation o f m otor
M otor m ay h a v e o n e p h a s e o p e n C h e c k to m a ke su re that all le a d s a re w ell c o n n e c te d .
G ro u n d ed coil M otor m ust b e rew ound
U n b a la n c e d term inal v o lta g e C h e c k for faulty lead s, c o n n e c tio n s an d transform ers.
M otor vibrates M oto r m isalign ed R ea lign .
W e a k support S tren gth en b a s e.
C ou p lin g out o f b a la n ce B a la n ce cou plin g.
D riven e qu ip m en t u n b ala n ced R e b a la n c e driven equ ip m en t.
D e fe c tiv e b ea rin gs R e p la c e b ea rin gs.
B e a rin g s not in line R e p a ir motor.
B a lan cin g w e igh ts shifted R e b a la n c e motor.
Con tradiction b e tw e e n b alan cin g of R e b a la n c e cou plin g o r motor.

rotor an d cou plin g (h alf k ey - full key)
P o ly p h a s e m otor running s in g le p h a se C h e ck for o p e n circuit.
E x c e s s iv e en d play A djust b ea rin g o r a d d shim .
S cra p in g noise Fan rubbing e n d shield o r fan c o v e r C o rre c t fan mounting.
L o o s e on b ed p la te T igh ten holdin g bolts.
N o is y operation Air g a p not uniform C h e c k an d c o rrec t e n d sh ield fits o r b ea rin g fits.
R o to r u n b ala n ce R e b a la n c e rotor.
H o t bearings B en t or spru n g shaft S traigh ten o r re p la c e shaft.
E x c e s s iv e b elt pull D e c r e a s e belt ten sion .
P u lle ys to o far a w a y from shaft sh ou lder M o v e pulley c lo s e r to m o to r bearin g.
Pu lley d ia m e te r to o sm all U s e la rger pulleys.
M isa lign m en t C o rre c t by realign m en t o f th e drive.
Insufficient g r e a s e Maintain p ro p e r quality an d am ou n t o f g r e a s e in bearin g.
D eterioration o f g r e a s e o r lubricant R e m o v e old g re a s e , w a sh b ea rin g s th orou gh ly in k e ro s e n e

con tam in ated an d re p la c e with n ew g r e a s e .
E x c e s s lubricant R e d u c e quantity o f g r e a s e , b ea rin g should not b e m o re

than half full.
O v e rlo a d e d b ea rin g C h e ck alignm en t, s id e an d e n d thrust.
Broken ball o r rough ra c e s R e p la c e b ea rin g, c lea n h ou sin g th orou gh ly first.

S p a re p a rts lis t - E r s a tz te illis te -
L is te d e p ie c e s d e re c h a n g e -
L is ta d e p ie z a s d e r e c a m b io -
C a ta lo g o p a r ti d i r ic a m b io -
R e s e r v d e ls k a ta lo g - V a r a o s a lu e tte lo
M 3 B P /G P /H P 2 8 0 - 400
Cast iron m otors - Drehstrom m otoren m it G rauguß Gehäuse

M oteur fonte - M otores de fundicion - Motor! in ghisa -
G jutjärnsm otorer - Valurautam oottorit
åk I I »
^ M P IP
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
ABB / LV Motors
Spare Parts M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400, 12-2002
M 3 B P /G P /H P 2 8 0 - 4 0 0
11 stator, c o m p le te Anillo
Ständ er, kom plett A n e llo
S tator c o m p le t M ellanring
V ä lire n g a s
E stator c o m p le to
S tatore, c o m p le to
26 V a lv e d is c fo r N
Stator, kom plett
N -s e itig e V e n tils c h e ib e
Staattori, tä y d ellis en ä
D isq u e d 'é v a c u a tio n d e g r a is s e C O C
D is co d e e v a c u a c iö n d e g r a s a la d o ven tila d o r
12 E nd shleld fo r D with s c re w s D is co p a ra g ra s s o lato N S
17 D -s eitig es L a g ers c h ild mit S ch ra u b en N -ä n d a n s ven tilsk iva
F la sq u e C C , a v e c vis Im u re n g a s N
E sc u d o la d o a c o p le , con tornillos
28 L ock in g ring fo r D
S c u d o c u s cin e tto lato A S , c o n viti
D -s e tig e S ich eru n gsrin g
D -än d an s la g ers k öld , m e d skru var
Circlips C C
Laakerikilpi D, ru u vein een
An illo d e segu rid a d la d o a c o p le
A n e llo di b lo c c a g g io lato A S
12 F la n g e sh ield with s c re w s D -än d an s låsring
17 F la n sch la gersch ild mit S ch ra u b en T erä sp id ätin la atta D
F la sq u e bride, a v e c vis
E scu d o brida, c o n tornillos
30 P re -lo a d in g spring for b e a rin g s
S c u d o flan giato , con viti
V o rs p a n n fe d e r für la g er
F lä n s la g ers k öld , m ed skruvar
R e s s o rt d e p re -c h a rg e d e s p a llers
Laippalaakerikilpi, ru u vein een
M u elle d e p re c a rg a d e c o jin e te s
M olla di p re-c a rico cuscinetti
13 E ndshield fo r N with s c re w s Fö rs p ä n n in gs p d e r fö r la g e r
19 N -s e itig e s L a g ers c h ild mit S ch ra u b en L aakeroin n in esikuorm itusjousi
F la sq u e C O C , a v e c vis
E scu d o la d o ven tilador, c o n tornillos 31 P re -lo a d in g spring for b e a rin g s
S c u d o cu s cin e tto lato N S , c on viti V o rs p a n n fe d e r für la g er
N -ä n d an s la g ers k öld , m ed skruvar R e s s o rt d e p re -c h a rg e d e s p a liers
Laakerikilpi N, ru u vein een M u elle d e p re c a rg a d e c o jin e te s
M olla di p re-c a rico cuscinetti
Fö rs p ä n n in gs fjä d e r fö r la g e r
18 B earin g fo r D
Laakeroin n in esikuorm itusjousi
D -s eitig es L a g e r
R o u lem en t C C
C o jin ete la d o a c o p le 34 Inner b ea rin g c o v e r fo r D with s c re w s
C u scin etto lato A S 49 D -s e itig e r in n erer L a g e r d e c k e l mit S ch ra u b en
D -än d an s la g e r C o u v e rc le intérieur du ro u le m e n t C C a v e c vis
K uulalaakeri D T a p a interior d el c o jin e te la d o a c o p le , c o n tornillos

C o p e rc h io cu scin etto interno lato A S , c o n viti
D -än d an s inre la g erlo c k , m e d skru var
20 V a lv e d is c fo r D La a k erip o h ja D, ru u vein een
D -s eitige V e n tils c h e ib e
D isqu e d 'é va cu a tio n d e g r a is s e C C
D is co d e e v a c u a c iö n d e g ra s a la d o a c o p le 35 V a lv e d is c fo r D
D is co p a ra g ra s s o lato A S D -s e itig e V e n tilsc h eib e
D -än d an s ven tilsk iva D isq u e d 'é va cu a tio n d e g r a is s e C C
Im u ren gas D D is co d e e v a c u a c iö n d e g r a s a la d o a c o p le
D is co p a ra g ra s s o lato A S
D -än d an s ven tilskiva
24 B earin g fo r N Im u re n g a s D
N -s e itig e s L a g e r
R o u lem en t C O C
C o jin ete la d o ven tila dor 36 Inner b ea rin g c o v e r fo r N with s c r e w s
C u scin etto lato N S 50 N -s e itig e r in n erer L a g e rd e c k e l mit S ch ra u b en
N -ä n d an s la g e r C o u v e r c le intérieur du ro u le m e n t C O C a v e c vis
K uulalaakeri N T a p a interior d el c o jin e te la d o v en tila d o r, con tornillos

C o p e rc h io cu scin etto interno lato N S , c o n viti
N -ä n d a n s inre lag erlo ck , m e d skru var
25 R ing
L aa k erip o h ja N, ru u vein een
R ing
B ague
ABB / LV Motors
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
38, Outer b ea rin g c o v e r with s c re w s , D -end 47 V -rin g fo r N

49 D -seitiger ä u s s e r e r L a g e r d e c k e l mit S ch ra u b en N -s e itig e r V -rin g
C o u v e rcle e x térieu r du ro u lem en t C G a v e c vis Joint V-ring C O C
Tapa e x te rio r d e l c o jin e te la d o a c o p le , c o n tornillos V -rin g e s c u d o la d o ven tila d o r
C op erch io c u s c in e tto e s te rn o lato A S c o n viti G u a rn izio n e a V lato N S
D-ändans yttre la g e rlo c k m e d skruvar
N -ä n d a n s V -rin g
D-pään laak erik an si ru u vein een
N -p ää n V -r e n g a s
40 G re a s e ou tlet v a lv e fo r D -end
S ch m ierfetta u slassven til für D -S eite 51 G r e a s e n ipp le fo r b ea rin g, D- an d N
53 S ch m ie rn ip p e l für D- und N -s e itig e s L a g e r
V a lve d 'e v a c u a tio n d e g r a is s e C C
G ra iss eu r C C e t C O C
Valvula d e e v a c u a c io n d e g ra sa , la d o a c o p le
T e tin a s d e e n g r a s e para c o jin e te s la d o a c o p le y lad o
V alvola di s c a ric o g r a s s o L a to a c c o p p ia m e n to
v en tila d o r
Fettutloppsventil fö r D -än d a
In g ra ss a to re p e r c u scin etto lato A S e lato N S
R asva n p oistoven ttiili D -p ääh än
S m örjn ip p el fö r D- o ch N -ä n d a n s la g e r
V o itelu n ip p a D, N
41 Handle fo r g r e a s e ou tlet v a lv e , D -end
Griff für S c h m ie rfetta u s la s sv en til für D -S e ite 55 N ip p le e x ten s io n
P o ig n é e d e la v a lv e d 'e va cu a tio n d e g r a is s e C C N ip p e lv e rlä n g e ru n g
M aneta d e v älvu la d e e v a c u a c io n d e d e g r a s a lad o E xten sion du con d u it d e g ra iss e u r
acople P ro lo n g a c iö n d e la tetin a d e e n g r a s e
A sta apertura/chiusura v a lv o la s c a ric o g r a s s o D-Iato P ro lu n g a in g ra ss a to re
Handtag fö r fettu tlo p p sven tilen , D -än d a N ip p e lförlä n gn in g
R asva n p oistoven ttillin kahva, D -p ää V oitelu n ip an ja tk e
42 V-ring fo r D 57, S P M -n ip p le s, D an d N
58 D- an d N -s e itig e r S P M -M e ß n ip p e l
D -seitiger V -rin g
P ris e s pou r c a p te u rs S P M C C e t C O C
Joint V -rin g C C
T a p ö n m e d id o r d e v ib ra c io n e s S P M , la d o a c o p le y
V-ring e s c u d o la d o a c o p le
la d o v en tila d o r
G uarn izion e a V lato A S
A tta c c o S P M lato a lb e ro e lato v en to la
D-ändans V -rin g
S P M -m ä tn ip p lar, D- o ch N -ä n d a
D-pään V - r e n g a s
S P M -n ip p a , D - ja N
43 G re a s e ou tlet v a lv e fo r N -en d
59, Plu g
S ch m ierfetta u slassven til für N -S e ite
60 S to p fe n
V alve d 'e v a c u a tio n d e g r a is s e C O C
B ou ch on
Välvula d e e v a c u a c io n d e g ra s a , la d o v en tila d o r Tapon
V alvola di s c a ric o g r a s s o lato N S Tappo
Fettutloppsventil fö r N -ä n d a P ro p p
R asvan p oistoven ttiili N -p ä ä h ä n Tu lp p a
44 Handle fo r g r e a s e o u tlet v a lv e . N -en d 61 Fan

Griff für S c h m ie rfetta u s la s sv en til für N -S e ite Lüfter
P o ig n é e d e la v a lv e d 'e v a c u a tio n d e g r a is s e C O C V en tilateu r
M aneta d e v ä lv u la d e e v a c u a c io n d e g r a s a lad o V e n tila d o r
V e n to la
ventilador
Fläkt
A sta apertura/chiusura v a lv o la s c a ric o g r a s s o N-Iato
Tuuletin
Handtag fö r fettu tlo p p s ven tilen
R asvanp oistoven ttillin kah va, N -p ää
63 K ey
P a ß fe d e r
45, Outer b ea rin g c o v e r with s c re w s , N -en d
C la v e tte
50 N -seitiger ä u s s e r e r L a g e r d e c k e l mit S ch ra u b en
C h a v e ta
C ou vercle e x térieu r du ro u lem en t C O C a v e c vis
C h ia v e tta
T apa e xterior d el c o jin e te la d o ven tilador, con
Kil
tornillos
Kiila
C op erch io c u s c in e tto e s te r n o lato N S c o n viti
N-ändans yttre la g e rlo c k m e d skruvar
N-pään laakerik an si ru u vein een
ABB / LV Motors
Spare Parts M3BP/GP/HP 280-400, 12-2002
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
64 L ock in g ring
S ich eru n gsrin g
Circlips
A n illo d e seg u rid a d
A n e llo di b lo c c a g g io
Låsrin g
T erä sp id ätin la atta
65 L ock in g ring
S ich eru n gsrin g
C irclips
A n illo d e b lo q u e o
A n e llo di b lo c c a g g io
Låsrin g
L ukitu sren gas
67 Fan c o v e r with s c re w s an d clanaps

69 Lüfterh au be mit B e fe s tig u n g s e le m e n te n
70 C a p o t d e ven tila teu r a v e c vis e t p ié c e s d e fixation
71 P ro te c to r v en tila d o r con tornlllos y a b ra za d e ra
72 C o p rive n to la c o n viti e d attacchi
Fläktkåpa m e d skru var o ch k läm stycken
Tuulettim en su o ju s ru u vein een ja pitim ineen
73 K ey
P a ß fe d e r
C la ve tte
C h a v e ta
C h iavetta
Kil
Kiila
75 R atin g plate
L eistu n gssch ild
P la q u e s ig n a lé tiq u e
P la c a d e c a ra cteris tic a s
T a rg h e tta dati
M ärkskylt
Arvokilpi
80 R e -g r e a s in g p late
S ch m iersch ild
P la q u e d e g r a is s a g e
P la c a d e e n g r a s e
T a rg a di lu b rifica zion e
Sm örjskylt
Volteluoh jekilpi
478 L ead -th rou gh ru bber

Gum m idurchführung
T ra v e r s é en c ou tc h ou c
G o m m a d e o rificlo
G o m a p a s a c a b le s
G e n o m fö rin gs gu m m i
Läpivientlkum i
ABB / LV Motors
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
T e r m in a l - A n s c h lü s s e - B o r n e s - T e r m in a le s -
M o r s e ttie r a - U tta g - L Iitä n tä
M 3BP/GP/HP 280-400
ABB / LV Motors
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
T e r m in a l - A n s c h lü s s e - B o r n e s - T e r m in a le s -
M o r s e ttie r a - U tta g - L iitä n tä
301 T erm in al b o x with s c re w s

K lem m en k a s te n mit D e ck els c h ra u b e n
B oite å b o rn e s a v e c v is du c o u v e r d e
C a ja d e b o rn e s c o n tornillos
M orsettiera c o n viti
U tta gslå d a m e d skruvar
Liitän täkotelo ru u vein een
302 T erm in als, c o m p le te

K lem m en b rett, kom plett
P la q u e å b o r n e s c o m p lé te
P la c a b o rn e s c o m p le ta
T erm inali c om p le ti
Uttagsplint, k om plett
Liitinalusta, tä y d e llis e n ä
314 C o n n ectio n parts

308 A n sch lu ß teile
309 P ié c e s d e ra c c o rd e m e n t
P ie z a s d e c o n e x io n
B a setta di c o n n e s s io n e
K o p p lin g sd eta lje r
Liitinosat
332 Earthing s c r e w
333 E rd u n gssch ra u b e
334 B orn e d e m is e ä la terre
Tornillo d e to m a d e tierra
V ite di terra
Jord nin gsskru v
M aadoitusruuvi
401 Control d e v ic e m o d u le (T h e rm is to rs )
40 5 Ü b e rw a ch u n gs m o d u l (T h e rm is to r)
413 B o rn es p ou r au xiliaires (T h e rm is ta n c e s )
415 M odulo d e d is p o s itiv o d e con trol (T e rm is to r e s )
416 B a setta ausiliari c o m p le tta (T erm isto ri)
417 Ö v erv a k n in gsm o d u l (T e rm is to re r)
439 V alvo n tala item o d u li (T erm istorit)
ABB / LV Motors
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
Spare parts, specification
Ersatzteile, Spezifikation
Piéces de rechange, spécifications
Especificaciön de piezas de recambio
Specifica parti di ricambio esplosione
Reservdelar, specifikation
Varaosat, erittely _________________
When ordering parts, and in all correspondence, Vid beställning av reservdelar och vid reklamationer
please quote the type designation and serial bör motornummer och fullständig typbeteckning
number of the motor. If the rating plate is missing, anges. Om motorns märkplåt fallit bort anges det
state the number stamped on the free end of the nummer som stämplats på axeländan.
shaft. Vi förbehåller oss rätt till ändring i kodbeteckning
We reserve the right to alter designations and och lagerhållning utan föregående meddelande.
storage without prior notice.
Varaosia tilattaessa tai muistutuksia tehtäessä on
Bei Bestellung von Ersatzteilen bzw. in allem moottorin numero ja lajimerkki ehdottomasti
Schriftverkehr sind die Nummer und ilmoitettava. Jos moottorin arvokilpi on irronnut,
Typenbezeichnung des Motors anzugeben. Falls iimoitetaan akselin päähän leimattu numero.
der Leistungsschild verloren gegangen ist, ist die Pidätämme itsellemme oikeuden muuttaa tunnuksia
am Wellenende angegebene Nummer mitzuteilen. ja varastointia ilman ennakkoilmoitusta.
Änderungen der Bezeichnungs- und
Lagerungsangaben bleiben Vorbehalten. Quando vengono ordinate parti di ricambio e in tutta
la corrispondenza, vogliate indicare il tipo del
Pour toute commande de piéces, et dans toute motore ed il relativo numero di targa. Se la targa del
correspondance, vous devez préciser la référence motore é andata smarrita, vogliare indicare il
et le numéro de série du moteur. Si la plaque numero stampigliato suH'estremitå libera dell'albero.
signalétique a été retirée, précisez le numéro Ci riserviamo II diritto di modificare la designazione
estampillé sur le bout d’arbre.
e la messa a magazzino delle parti senza preawiso
Tous droits de modification des références et du
stockage sans préavis.
Al pedir piezas de recambio, y en toda la
correspondencia, por favor indicar el tipo de motor y
S U correspondiente nCimero de serie. Si por alguna
causa la placa de caracteristicas faltase, mencionar

el nümero grabado sobre la salida de eje.
Nos reservamos el derecho de cambiar las
designaciones y almacenamiento sin previo aviso.
ABB / LV Motors
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
Part No. Motor size No. of Type designation Qty per motor Weight
Teil No. Motor Baugröße poles Typenbezeichnung Stück per Motor Gewicht
Del nr Motor storlek Polzahl Typbeteckning Antal per motor Vikt
Osa no Moottorin koko Poltal Lajimerkki Kpl per moottori Paino kg
_Na£aluku____^^
12 280 2 ... 3GZF213728-1 1 27

IM1001 315 2 3GZF213731-3 1 32
315 4... 3GZF213731-1 1 32
355 2 3GZF213735-1 1 53
355 4... 3GZF213735-2 1 55
400 2 3GZF213740-3 1 68
400 4... 3GZF213740-4 1 75
12 280 2 ... 3GZF223028-1 1 43

IM3001 315 2 3GZF223031-4 1 58
315 4... 3GZF223031-3 1 58
355 2 3GZF223035-2 1 100
355 4... 3GZF223035-1 1 101
400 2 3GZF223040-1 1
400 4... 3GZF223040-3 1
13 280 2 ... 3GZF203728-1 1 27

315 2 ... 3GZF203731-1 1 32
355 2 ... 3GZF203735-1 1 53
400 2 3GZF203740-4 1 69
400 4... 3GZF203740-3 1 67
17 280 2... 3GZF334033-450 4 0,76

IM1001 315 2 ... 3GZF334033-450 4 0,76
355 2 ... 3GZF334030-684 4 1,08
400 2 ... 3GZF334030-684 8 2,16
17 280 2 ... 3GZF334033-450 4 0,76

IM3001 315 2 ... 3GZF334033-451 4 0,88
355 2 ... 3GZF334030-684 4 1,08
400 2 ... 3GZF334030-684 8 2,16
19 280 2 ... 3GZF334033-450 4 0,76

315 2 ... 3GZF334033-450 4 0,76
355 2 ... 3GZF334030-684 4 1,08
400 2... 3GZF334030-684 8 2,16
18 280 2 3GZF234097-316 1 3,6

280 4... 3GZF234096-316 1 3,6
315 2 3GZF234097-316 1 3,6
315 4... 3GZF234102-319 1 5,7
355 2 3GZF234028-316 1 3,6
355 4... 3GZF234109-322 1 9,6
400 2 3GZF234030-318 1 4,3
400 4... 3GZF234111-324 1 14,5
20 280 4... 3GZF243228-2 1 0,9

315SM, 315ML 4... 3GZF243231-2 1 1,3
24 280, 315 2 3GZF234097-316 1 3,6

(Standard) 280, 315 4... 3GZF234096-316 1 3,6
355 2 3GZF234028-316 1 3,6
355 4... 3GZF234096-316 1 3,6
400 2 3GZF234030-318 1 4,3
400 4... 3GZF234102-319 1 5,7
24 280, 315 2 3GZF234030-315 1 3,6

(Insulated) 280, 315 4... 3GZF234030-314 1 3,6
355 2 3GZF234030-314 1 3,6
355 4... 3GZF234030-314 1 3,6
400 2 3GZF234030-317 1 4,3
400 4... 3GZF234106-319 1 5,7
25 280 4... 3GZF243728-7 1 0,1

315 4... 3GZF243731-1 1 0,12
355 4... 3GZF243735-2 1 0,18
400 4... 3GZF243740-1 1 0,19
26 280,315 2 ... 3GZF243228-2 1 0,9

355 2 ... 3GZF243228-2 1 0,9
400 2 3GZF243240-5 1 3,2
9 ABB /LV Motors
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
Napaluku
400 4... 3GZF243231-2 1 1,3
30 280,315 2... 3GZF334430-2 1

355 2... 3GZF244730-19 6
400 2 3GZF244730-1 5
400 4... 3GZF244730-1 6
31 355 2 ... 3GZF244730-19 6

400 2 ... 3GZF244730-1 6
34 280 2 ... 3GZF243028-2 1 3,4

315 2 3GZF243028-2 1 3,4
315 4... 3GZF243031-2 1 5,3
355 2 3GZF243028-2 1 3,4
355 4... 3GZF243035-1 1 7,0
400 2 3GZF243040-7 1 7,7
400 4... 3GZF243040-9 1 12,2
35 280-355 2 3GZF243228-3 1 1,8

315LK 4... 3GZF243231-3 1 2,9
355 4... 3GZF243235-2 1 4,4
400 2 3GZF243240-4 1 3,1
400 4... 3GZF243240-1 1 4,9
36 280,315 2... 3GZF243028-2 1 3,4

355 2... 3GZF243035-2 1 3,3
400 2 3GZF243040-8 1 7,5
400 4... 3GZF243040-6 1 5,2
38 280 2 3GZF243128-5 1 3,7

280 4... 3GZF243128-4 1 2,8
315 2 3GZF243128-5 1 3,7
315SM, 315ML 4... 3GZF243131-5 1 3,7
315LK 4... 3GZF243131-6 1 4,9
355 2 3GZF243128-5 1 3,7
355 4... 3GZF243135-2 1 7,2
400 2 3GZF243140-4 1 4,8
400 4... 3GZF243140-3 1 9,2
40 280-400 2... 3GZF224728-3 1 0,04
41 280 2... 3GZF243728-8, 1

3GZF334030-668,
3GZF334030-402
315 2... 3GZF243731-20, 1
3GZF334030-668,
3GZF334030-402
355 2... 3GZF243735-1, 1
3GZF334030-668,
3GZF334030-402
400 2... 3GZF243740-2, 1
3GZF334030-668,
3GZF334030-402
42 280 4... 3GZF264730-91 1

315 4... 3GZF264730-92 1
43 280-400 2... 3GZF224728-3 1 0,04
44 280 2... 3GZF243728-9, 1

3GZF334030-668,
3GZF334030-402
315 3GZF243731-21,
3GZF334030-668,
3GZF334030-402
355 3GZF243735-3,
3GZF334030-668,
3GZF334030-402
10 ABB / LV Motors
M 3 B P /G P /H P 2 8 0 - 4 0 0
Napaluku
400 2... 3GZF243740-3, 1

3GZF334030-668,
3GZF334030-402
45 280,315,355 2... 3GZF243128-4 1 2,8
400 2 3GZF243140-4 1 4,8
400 A... 3GZF243131-5 1 3,7
47 280,315,355 2... 3GZF264730-91 1
400 4... 3GZF264730-92 1
49 280 2 ... 3GZF334033-434 4

315 2 3GZF334033-434 4
315 4... 3GZF334033-435 4
355 2 3GZF334033-434 4
355 4... 3GZF334033-436 4
400 2 3GZF334033-435 4
400 4... 3GZF334033-436 4
50 280,315,355 2 ... 3GZF334033-434 4
400 2 ... 3GZF334030-683 4
51 280-400 2 ... 3GZF334230-219 1

53 280-400 2 ... 3GZF334230-219 1
55 280-400 2 ... 3GZF243716-2 1
57 280-400 2 ... 3GZF414030-1 1
58 280-400 2 ... 3GZF414030-7 1
59,60 280^00 2 ... 3GZF334230-209 1
61 280SM, 315SM, 315ML02OO plasticfan 3GZF304128-1 1

280SM, 315SM, 315ML 0200 metal fan 3GZF303028-3 1
280SM, 315SM, 315ML 0270 plasticfan 3GZF304128-2 1
315LK-400LK 0250 plasticfan 3GZF303135-1 1
315LK-400LK 0250 metal fan 3GZF303035-1 1
315LK^00LK 0350 plasticfan 3GZF303135-2 1
63 280-315 2 ... 3GZF443330-156 1 0,1

355-400 2 ... 3GZF443230-101 1 0,15
64 280-315 2 ... 9ABA135-34 0,06
355-400 2 ... 9ABA135-34 1 0,03
65 280-355 2 ... 9ABA135-34 1

400 2 3GZF334530-32 1
400 4... 3GZF334530-34 1
87 280 2 ... 3GZF314728-1 1 9,7

315SM, 315ML 2 ... 3GZF314731-1 1 12
315LK 2 ... 3GZF314731-5 1 14,2
355IM1001 2 ... 3GZF314735-1 1 16,5
355 IM3001 2 ... 3GZF314735-2 1 16,5
400IM1001 2 ... 3GZF314740-3 1 21
400 IM3001 2 ... 3GZF314740-5 1 21
69 280-400 2 ... 3GZF334033-426 1

70 2 ... 3GZF334030-217 1
71 2 ... 3GZF334130-1 1
72 2 ... 3GZF334120-4 1
11 ABB / LV Motors
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
Tell No. Motor Baugröße poles Typenbezeichnung Stück per Motor Gewicht
Osa no Moottorin koko Poltal Lajlmerkki Kpl per moottori Palno kg
Napaluku
73 280SM 2 3GZF443330-137 1
280SM 4... 3GZF443330-150 1
315SM, 315ML, 315LK 2 3GZF443330-137 1
315SM 4... 3GZF443330-163 1
315ML, 315LK 4... 3GZF443330-174 1
355SM, 315ML, 315LK 2 3GZF443330-150 1
355SM, 315ML, 315LK 4... 3GZF443330-197
400L, 400LK 2 3GZF443330-161 1
400L, 400LK 4... 3GZF443330-197 1
75 280-400 3GZF194730-3 1
80 280 2... 3GZF193730-1 1

315 2 3GZF193730-1 1
315 4... 3GZF193730-3 1
355 2 3GZF193730-1 1
355 4... 3GZF193730-11 1
400 2 3GZF193730-14 1
400 4... 3GZF193730-15 1
478 280-400 2 ... 3GZF334130-15 2
301 280 terminal type 210 3GZF101015-8 1

315 terminal type 370 3GZF101015-6 1
355 terminal type 370 3GZF101015-26 1
315,355,400 terminal type 750 3GZF101015-25 1
336 280-400 3GZF334030-610 4
302 Terminal type 210 *) 3GZF102728-G 1

Terminal type 370 *) 3GZF102731-G 1
Terminal type 750 *) 3GZF102735-H 1
*)Please see tables forterminal boxes on page 13.

Siehe Tabellen über Klemmenkasten auf Seite 13.
Se tabellerför uttagslådor på sidan 13.
Katso llltäntäkotelotaulukot sivulla 13.
12 ABB / LV Motors
M3BP/GP/HP 280 - 400
Spare parts, specification
Ersatzteile, Spezifikation
Piéces de rechange, spécifications
Especificaciön de piezas de recambio
Specifica parti di ricambio esplosione
Reservdelar, specifikation
Varaosat, erittely
M 3BP 300 0 r/min 1500 r/min 100 0 r/min 7 50 r/min V o lt a g e c o d e *)

2 80 S M 210 210 210 210
3 15 S M , M L 370 370 370 370

3 1 5 L K A .B 370 370 370 370
315LKC 750 750 370 370
355SM A 750 750 370 370 D
370 370 370 3 70 E
355SM B 750 750 370 370 D,E
355SM C 750 750 750 370 D
750 750 370 370 E
3 5 5 M L A .B 750 750 750 750 D
750 750 750 370 E
3 5 5 L K A ,B 750 750 750 750 D
750 750 750 750 E
400LA 750 750 750 750 D
750 750 750 750 E
400LB 750 750 750 750 D,E
400LC 750 750 750 750 D
750 750 750 750 E
4 00 L D 750 D,E
*) D - 380-420 VA/50 Hz, 660-690 VY/50HZ, 440-480 VA/60 Hz

E - 500 VA/50 Hz, 575 VA/60 Hz
13 ABB / LV Motors
8
O
CM
2
Q.
iO o
Q)
i O 0)
CO o
SS«
as<
0) £ lij
2.ÖO
« to Z
Z][\ 3DDD
□DDD
D is tr ib u t o r :
A B B L o g i s t i c s C e n t e r , F in la n d 2 4 h S e r v i c e s - A B B C a ll C e n t e r
Spare parts, Helsinki Spare parts, Vaasa • Emergency spare part service
P.O. Box 116 P.O. Box 612 • Outside regular office hours
FIN-00381 HELSINKI FIN-65101 VAASA
FINLAND FINLAND Phone +358 10 222 7100
Phone +358 (0) 10 222 000 Phone +358 (0) 10 224 000 Fax +358 10 222 6798
Fax +358 (0) 10 222 6800 Fax +358 (0) 10 224 1055
e-mail for Spare part enquiries and requests:
p a r t .s u p p o r t lin e @ fi.a b b .c o m
O p e r a t in g m a n u a l en
Type:
C B W 50(40V29.2<31.5) ST
Serial no.:
166514-517
001 -12.07.2012
P r o d u c t ID
Product type: Ship's crane

Product designation: SKCBW
Version: N V001
D o c u m e n t ID
ORIGINAL OPERATING MANUAL

Author: LWN / Technical Publication Department
Issued: 2011-10-11
M a n u fa c tu re r:
Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH

P.O. Box 10
6710 Nenzing
Austria
copyright by
L IE B H E R R SKCBW/N V001
DECK CRANE
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC RAM LUFFING TYPE
CBW 50(40)/29.2(31.5) STANDARD

M A IN H O IS T 4 -fa ll o p e r a tio n
S W H [m ] 0.0
A n g le [ ”] R a d iu s [m ] S W L [t]
83.1 4.0 50.0
79.4 6.0 50.0
75.8 8.0 50.0
72.1 10.0 50.0
68.3 12.0 50.0
64.4 14.0 50.0
60.4 16.0 50.0
56.2 18.0 50.0
51.8 20.0 50.0
47.2 22.0 50.0
42.2 24.0 50.0
36.7 26.0 50.0
33.7 27.0 50.0
30.4 28.0 50.0
26.1 29.2 50.0
22.8 30.0 40.0
15.0 31.5 40.0
55.0
50.0
45.0
40.0
35.0
S 30.0
_i
5 25.0
20.0
15.0
10.0
5.0 ^
0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 24.0 26.0 28.0 30.0 32.0
RADIUS [m]
-SWH 0.0 m
0 = Harbour Operation, SWH 0.0 m
Operational conditions for Personnel Lift:

No personnel liftoperation available
Serial No.: 166446-Serie Manufacturer LSW -Great Britain Item Code : 10502129
Installation : Cargo Vessel Revision : 01
Item code 10502113
U E B H iR R - u tility R e q u ire m e n ts Edition 00
Crane: CBW 50(40)/29.2(31.5) ST

Order: 166446
Unit Req./Unit No. of Unit Total Type
1. Winch(es):
- IVIain Hoist W inch 71 1 71 Gear Oil
- Whip (Auxiliary) Hoist Winch N /A 0 N /A Gear Oil
2. Slewing Gear(s): 11,2 1 3 33,61 Gear Oil
3. Grease:
- All sheaves, bearings 1,4 kg 1 1,4 kg Grease
- All other grease lines 1.8 kg 1 1,8 kg Grease
- slewing ring 8,3 kg 1 8,3 kg Grease
4. Cabin:
#
- Windscreen washer 2,51 1 2,5 1 Anti Freeze Mixture
5. Gearbox: N /A 0 N /A Grease
6. Hydraulic System:
- Hydraulic tank 1050 1 1 10501 Hydraulic Oil
- Hydraulic line system 140 1 1 140 1 Hydraulic Oil
7. Electric Power Consumption:

- according to valid N /A 1 N /A N /A
- Electric - Power Supply Survey N /A 1 N /A N /A
8. E-Motor:
- according to valid N /A 1 N /A N /A 9
- Electric - Power Supply Survey N /A 1 N /A N /A
24.11.2008 LWN STO TZ/ BU according LIKV w o rkflow

Date W ork Prepared Checked Approved
No copying or duplication of this document without the permission of Liebherr.

This document has been issued electronically and isvalid without signature.
F o re w o rd
The name Liebherr doesn't just stand for products and services. It has become a
byword for ideas and innovations. For progress which has proved its worth in the
marketplace.
We constantly strive to extend and improve our diverse range o f products and
services. This requires ongoing cooperation and sharing of experience with our
customers and business partners throughout the world. We are therefore grateful
for any ideas and suggestions for improvements.
Please contact Liebherr After Sales Service if the machine:
- is resold
- is purchased from a previous owner
Please contact:
Postfach 10
Dr. Hans Liebherr Strasse 1
6710 Nenzing
Austria / Europe
Tel: +43 50809 41-0
Fax: +43 50809 41-500
E-mail: info.lwn@liebherr.com
6
o
S
copyright by
SKCBW/NV001 L IE B H E R R
166516
Foreword
copyright by
L IE B H E R R SK CBW/N V001
166516
N o te s r e g a r d in g th e d o c u m e n ta t io n
H andling the do cu m en tation

The provided documentation enables you to:
- safely operate the machine,
- use it for all admissible application situations,
- service it at regular intervals.
The prerequisite for this is that you know how to use this multi-part documentation.
The documentation consists of:
O pe ra ting m anual
(R)
This includes information about commissioning, operating and servicing.
Ö
T e ch nica l in fo rm a tio n
Contains information about the electric and hydraulic installations of the machine.
Spare parts catalogue

Contains information about purchasing spare parts.
The complete documentation is saved on the CD-ROMs. The displayed symbols

provide information about the content of the CD-ROM.
M inim um requirem ents fo r using the C D -R O M s

H ardw are:
- Intel® Pentium II® 500 MHz
- 128 MB RAM working memory
- CD-ROM drive
- Resolution 800 x 600 pixels, high-colour depth
S oftw are:
- Windows 2000, XP
- Internet Explorer 5.5
- Acrobat Reader 7.0
ö Pop-up blockers may not be activated when working with Liebherr parts. Please
o note that the pop-up blocker function may be contained in certain web browsers as
well as in personal firewalls (software firewalls). The pup-up blocker function can
usually be turned off via the options in the respective programme.
Latest version o f the docum entation
copyright by
SKCBW/N V001 L IE B H E R R
166516
N o t e s r e g a r d in g t h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n
The provided documentation was compiled exclusively for the stated serial number
and c a n n o t be applied to other machines of the same series.
To ensure the documentation is always complete and up to date:
- Do not remove individual documents.
- Replace any missing or unreadable pages by reprinting them from the CD-ROM
or request them from Liebherr after sales service.
- Insert immediately new documents supplied as a result of modifications.
- Replace amended documents and destroy the old version (particularly in the
case of load charts).
- Always replace the CD-ROM by a new version, e.g. from revision documents.
- Update all la nguages to the latest version in the case of multilingual
documentation.
Storage o f do cu m en tation
Always keep the o p e ra tio n m anual at hand in the cabin.
Always keep the currently required load-bearing ca p a city ta b le s at hand in the
cabin. This can be printed out from the CD-ROM.
The spare parts ca ta lo g u e and the te c h n ica l in fo rm a tio n must be available to
maintenance personnel when required.
Layout of th e operating m anual

The operating manual consists of individual, consecutively numbered chapters.
The table of contents provides information about the content and structure of the
individual chapters.
The documentation is supplied in paper form in a ring binder and on CD-ROM in
the shape of electronic data.
Illustration convention s
Sym bols
S ym bol M eaning ''

* Optional equipment (retrofitting kit)
□ Prerequisite must be fulfilled
► Perform activity
0 Consequence of an activity
Sym bols in illustrations
copyright by
L IE B H E R R SK CBW / N V001
166516
S ym bol ■'■'--’•7 '-' J Meaning
Actions
Mandatory sequence of several

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 actions in an illustration
Arbitrary sequence of several

O O G 0 O actions in an illustration
Consequences of actions
Consequences of actions with

0 (2 )(3 )(4 )(5 )(6 )(7 )(8 )(9 )@
mandatory sequence
Consequences o f actions with

® (§ )(g )(D )(D
arbitrary sequence
Exact enlargement of an area

o X 3
\ Enlargement of an area or part in the

same perspective as in the
illustration
Enlargement of an area or part in

another perspective as in the
illustration
M arking o f w arning notices

All warning notices in the operating manual comply with standards in acc. with
ANSI Z535.6.
copyright by
SK CBW / N V001 U E B H E R R
166516
DANGER
A Machine must not be ra iie d when A-frame 1 is laid down!
Risk o f machine toppling over.
fl*’ Erect A-frame 1 before raising the machine.
Name Description
1 Warning signs Warns against possible risks of injuries
2 Signal word For further information see: Signal words
3 Source and Explanation of the danger (contexts,

consequences of the consequences in case of non-observance and
danger possibly further details for comprehension)
4 Measures Measures to avoid danger
Signal w ords
DANGER
A Marks an imminently dangerous situation which will result in death or severe bodily
harm if not prevented.
► Refers to the current action to be taken to reduce or prevent the danger(s).
WARNING
A Marks a dangerous situation which may result in death or severe bodily harm if not
prevented.
A CAUTION
Marks a dangerous situation which may result in slight or somewhat serious bodily
harm if not prevented.
NOTICE
Marks a dangerous situation that may result in damage to assets if not prevented.
► Refers to the current action to be taken to reduce or prevent the danger(s). 6
o
Fu rth er m arkings/indications
copyright by
8 L IE B H E R R SKCBW/N V001
166516
Note
(D Indicates useful pointers and tips.
► Refers to the current action and shows an easier way to perform activities.
P ublisher's im print
Version
The EU standards that are used are listed in the Declaration of Conformity and on
the load chart cover sheets.
In the interest of our customers, we reserve the right to make changes in line with
technical developments. This documentation therefore corresponds to the technical
situation at the time of delivery of the machine, and not to the current state of
development at the manufacturer.
Copyright notice
Litronic is a registered trademark of Liebherr.
The documentation is protected by copyright. The copying and duplication of load
charts in connection with the operational planning and use of the machine is
expressly permitted. Otherwise, the documentation may not be duplicated,
reproduced, microfilmed, translated or converted for storage and processing in
computer systems, either wholly or partially, without the written consent of
Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH.
© Copyright by
6710 Nenzing / Austria
All rights reserved.
copyright by
SKCBW/N V001 L IE B H E R R
166516
Notes regarding the documentation
copyrightby
10 L I E B H E R R S K C B W / N V001
166516
C o n te n ts
P r o d u c t d e s c r ip t io n 21
1.1 Type plate 21
1.2 Appropriate use 23
1.3 Inappropriate use 24
1.3.1 Danger 24
1.3.2 Definition 24
1.4 Whole machine 25
1.4.1 Whole machine overview 25
1.4.2 Technical data 25
1.4.3 Safety devices 26
1.5 Slewing column 28
1.5.1 Slewing column overview 28
1.5.2 Machinery room 30
1.5.3 Aggregate 31
1.5.4 Cabin 32
1.6 Boom 33
1.7 Hand pump without tank* 34
1.8 Hand pump with tank* 35
1.9 Central lubrication system* 36
S a fe ty in s t r u c t io n s 39
2.1 Technical condition of the machine 39
2.2 Areas of responsibility 39
2.2.1 Manufacturer 39
2.2.2 Owner 39
2.2.3 Machine operator 40
2.2.4 Rigger 40
2.2.5 Banksman 40
2.2.6 Maintenance personnel 40
copyrightby
S K C B W / N V001 L I E B H E R R 11
166516
Contents
2.3 Requirements to personnel 41
2.3.1 Machine operator 41
2.3.2 Rigger 41
2.3.3 Banksman 41
2.3.4 Maintenance personnel 42
2.4 Personal protective equipment 42
2.5 Work area 43
2.6 Danger zone 43
2.7 Meaning of the safety signs 44
2.7.1 Prohibition signs 44
2.7.2 Warning signs 45
2.7.3 Fire protection signs 47
2.7.4 Mandatory signs 47
2.8 Hazards 48
2.8.1 Mechanical action 48
2.8.2 Electrical energy 49
2.8.3 Hydraulic energy 50
2.8.4 Burns 51
2.8.5 Chemical burns 52
2.8.6 Fire and explosion 52
2.8.7 Poisoning and suffocation 53
2.8.8 Electromagnetic influence 54
2.8.9 Exposure to wind 54
2.8.10 Snow and ice loads 56
2.8.11 Lightning strike 57
2.8.12 Environment 58
2.9 What to do in dangerous situations 58
2.9.1 How to respond in the event of a current transfer 58
2.9.2 How to respond in the event of a fire 59
2.9.3 Firefighting 59
2.10 Hand signals 61
2.10.1 General hand signals in accordance with BGV A8 62
2.10.2 Special hand signals for attachment operations 64
2.10.3 Hand signals for lifting operations in accordance with ASME/ANSI

B30.5 67
copyrightby
166516
Contents
3 C o n tr o l a n d o p e r a tin g e le m e n ts 75
3.1 Control stand 76

3.2 Left control lever 77
3.2.1 Function assignment of left control lever buttons 77
3.2,2 Function assignment of left control lever movement directions 78
3.3 Right control lever 79
3.3.1 Function assignment of right control lever buttons 79
3.3.2 Function assignment of right control lever movement directions 80
3.4 Explanation of symbols used 82
3.5 Control panel X20 83
3.6 Control panel swing lock* 87
3.7 Control panel grab operation* 88
3.8 Control panel hook fixing point* 89
3.9 Control panel man riding* 90
3.10 Control panel spreader operation* 91
3.11 Air conditioning* 94
3.12 Load indication T300* 96
3.13 PÅ amplifier* 97
3.14 Switch cabinet XI 99
3.15 Central lubrication system* 101
O p e r a tio n 105
4.1 Steps 106
4.1.1 Stepping on the machine 106
4.2 Checks before start up 107
4.2.1 Walk round 107
4.2.2 Checking the hydraulic oil tank gate valve 107
4.3 Start-up 109
4.3.1 Switching on the main feed 109
4.3.2 Switching on the ignition 109
4.3.3 Starting engine 109
4.3.4 Moving the hook out of vertical hook fixing point* 110
4.3.5 Moving the hook out of horizontal hook fixing point* 110
4.3.6 Unlocking the swing lock* 111
4.4 Lighting 112
copyrightby
SK C B W / N V001 L I E B H E R R 13
166516
Contents
4.4.1 Switching on the searchlight* 112

4.4.2 Turning on the cabin lighting 113
4.4.3 Switching access lighting on 113
4.4.4 Switching on helicopter warning light* 113
4.5.1 Operating the air conditioning 114
4.6 Central lubrication system 115
4.6.1 Setting the lubrication time 115
4.6.2 Setting the pause time 115
4.6.3 Interim lubrication 115
4.7 Additional cab equipment 116
4.7.1 Operating the signal horn 116
4.8 Selecting the operation mode 117
4.8.1 Selecting crane operation 117
4.9 Swing 118
4.9.1 Operating the swing 118
4.10 Hoisting gear 120
4.10.1 Operating hoisting gear 120
4.11 Luffing gear 122
4.11.1 Luffing gear operation 123
4.12 Emergency descent rescue equipment 125
4.12.1 Using the emergency descent rescue equipment 125
4.13 Emergency stop 129
4.13.1 Operation emergency stop 129
4.14 Decommissioning 130
4.14.1 Brief work interruption 130
4.14.2 Long interruption of work 130
4.15 Emergency operation 134
4.15.1 Lowering the load 135
4.15.2 Turning the slewing column 135
4.15.3 Lowering the boom 135
4.15.4 Locking and unlocking slewing gear lock 135
O p e r a t io n a l fa u lt s , d ia g n o s is 139
5.1 Litronic® testing system 139
copyrightby
166516
Contents
5.1.1 Overview 139

5.1.2 Screen pages 140
M a in te n a n c e 151
6.1 Maintenance and inspection schedule 151
6.2 Lubricants and consumables 158
6.2.1 Lubrication diagram 159
6.2.2 Oil filling schedule 160
6.2.3 Filling capacities table 161
6.2.4 Lubrication chart 161
6.2.5 Diesel engine lubricating oil 164
6.2.6 Fuel 166
6.2.7 Diesel engine coolant 167
6.2.8 Hydraulic oil 169
6.2.9 Preservation medium (anti-corrosion coating) 170
6.2.10 Liebherr oil diagnosis system 172
6.3 Maintenance ladder* 176
6.3.1 Installing the maintenance ladder 176
6.3.2 Attaching the maintenance ladder 177
6.4 Electric motor 179
6.4.1 Greasing the ball bearings 180
6.5 Distributor gearbox 181
6.5.1 Checking the gearbox oil level 182
6.5.2 Topping up the gearbox oil 183
6.5.3 Draining the gearbox oil 183
6.6 Swing 185
6.6.2 Topping up the gear oil 186
6.7 Swing connection 187
6.7.1 Greasing the toothing 187
6.7.2 Checking the bearing lubrication 187
6.7.3 Checking the slewing bearing pitch play 188
6.8 Hoist winch 191
6.8.2 Topping up the gearbox oil 192
copyrightby
166516
Contents
6.8.3 Draining the gearbox oil 193
6.8.4 Checking the rope kicker 194
6.9 Hydraulic system 195
6.9.1 Check the hydraulic system for leaks 195
6.10 Hydraulic oil tank 196
6.10,1 Checking the hydraulic oil level 196
6.10.2 Carrying out a hydraulic oil analysis 197
6.10.3 Topping up with hydraulic oil 197
6.10.4 Draining the hydraulic oil 199
6.10.5 Cleaning the magnetic rod in the return filter 200
6.11 Tank filling system 203
6.11.1 Tanking hydraulic oil 204
6.12 Hydraulic filter 205
6.12.1 Changing the pressure filter 205
6.13 Accumulator 207
6.13.1 Checking the accumulator 208
6.13.2 Changing the accumulator 208
6.14 Hydraulic cylinders 209
6.14.1 Check that the hydraulic cylinder fits properly and does not leak 209
6.14.2 Preserving the piston rods of all exposed cylinders 209
6.15 Hydraulic hoses 210
6.15.1 Checking hydraulic hoses and hose lines 210
6.16 Electrical system 211
6.16.1 Replacing fuses and lamps 211
6.16.2 Cleaning the slip ring unit 211
6.16.3 Replacing filter mats 211
6.16.4 Checking screvi? and terminal connections 212
6.17 Limit switch 213
6.17.1 Checking hoist and luffing gear limit switch for function 213
6.18 Emergency stop 214
6.18.1 Checking the emergency stop 214
6.19 Fire extinguishers 215
6.19.1 Checking the proper seals and inspection dates on the fire
extinguishers 215
6.20 Personal protective equipment 216
copyrightby
166516
Contents
6.20.1 Checking personal protective gear 216

6.21 Emergency descent rescue equipment 217
6.21.1 Checking emergency descent rescue equipment 217
6.22 Lubrication system 218
6.22.1 Checking the function of the central lubrication 218
6.22.2 Checking the fill level of the lubrication pumps 218
6.22.3 Checking the time intervals of the lubrication pumps 219
6.22.4 Checking the lubrication points 219
6.23 Ropes 220
6.23.1 Check the rope for diameter shrinkage 220
6.23.2 Checking the ropes for deformations 221
6.23.3 Check ropes for corrosion 223
6.23.4 Check ropes for abrasion 224
6.23.5 Check ropes for the effects of heat 225
6.23.6 Check the rope for number of permitted wire breaks 226
6.23.7 Storing ropes 228
6.23.8 Transporting ropes 228
6.23.9 Winding ropes 230
6.23.10 Luffing ropes 231
6.23.11 Retract ropes 233
6.23.12 Lubricate ropes 233
6.24 rope drive 234
6.24.1 Checking the rope drive 234
6.25 Rope pulleys 236
6.25.1 Check pulleys for ease of movement 236
6.25.2 Checking steel pulleys for wear 236
6.25.3 Checking plastic pulleys for wear 237
6.25.4 Checking pulleys for damage 238
6.25.5 Lubricating the pulley bearings 238
6.25.6 Checking the bearing for proper seating and position 238
6.25.7 Cleaning plastic pulleys 239
6.26 Cab 240
6.26.1 Check the windows of the cab for damage 240
6.26.2 Checking that the cab door and the door lock work properly 240
6.26.3 Changing the windscreen wipers 240
copyrightby
166516
Contents
6.26.4 Filling the windscreen cleaning system 241
6.27 Operator's seat 243
6.27.1 Checking that the driver's seat works properly 243
6.28.1 Checking air conditioning 244
6.29 Machine care 245
6.29.1 Cleaning the machine 245
6.29.2 Cleaning the hydraulic, water and air coolers 246
6.29.3 Preserving the machine 246
copyrightby
166516
P r o d u c t d e s c r ip tio n 1
166516
1 P r o d u c t d e s c r ip tio n
166516
1 P r o d u c t d e s c r ip tio n
The product description:

- provides information about the possible uses of the machine and warns against
incorrect or improper use.
- describes the components of the machine.
- lists important technical data.
The diagrams in this operation manual are for general information purposes. They
are shown as schematics and do not necessarily show the current machine equip
ment.
1.1 Type plate
The type plate is attached on the right of the cabin.
Fig. 1: Type plate
1 Ex label CE label
copyrightby
S K C B W / N V001 i l E B H E R R 21
166516
Product description
T ype plate
If the machine corresponds to EX design, the type plate bears the EX label 1.
If the machine corresponds to guideline 2006/42/EU, the type plate bears the CE
label 2.
Enter the relevant data in the table below.
Type
Serial number
Model year
Date of commissioning (day/month/year)
Tab. 1: M achine data
This information is required e.g. when ordering spare parts.
6
o
copyrightby
22 L I E B H E R R S K G B W / N V001
166516
Product description
Appropriate use
1.2 Appropriate use
The supplied equipment determines the possible applications of the machine.

Use the machine exclusively to carry out the operations listed and described in this
operation manual.
Appropriate use of the machine:
- Observe the national and international safety requirements.
- Observe all the safety regulations in this operation manual.
- Ensure that all safety devices are in place and in good working order.
- Ensure that the values in the technical information and the load charts are
adhered to.
- Ensure that all maintenance and inspection work is carried out in good time by
authorized service personnel.
Special operations must be discussed with the manufacturer before they are
carried out and documented by both parties.
The operator is responsible for any injury to people, animals or any damage to the
machine arising from inappropriate use!
6
o
copyrightby
SKCBW/NV001 L I E B H E R R 23
166516
Product description
Inappropriate use
1.3 Inappropriate use
Inappropriate use of the machine includes any reasonably foreseeable misuse.
1.3.1 Danger
Dangers associated with inappropriate use of the machine:
- Life-threatening or fatal injuries
- Serious damage to the machine and other objects as well as the environment
- Loss of warranty entitlement
1.3.2 Definition
Examples of inappropriate use of the machine:
- Any structural modification of the machine and equipment that affects opera
tional safety and that has been carried out without the approval of the manufac
turer.
Incorrect startup:
• without a legally required national approval test
• by persons who are not authorized by the operating company
• by persons without the requisite education or training and knowledge of the
operation manual
• Without prescribed safety equipment
• Without valid load chart
• if the operation manual is incomplete (pages missing or illegible)
• Not having an operation manual in the local language of the operator
• If the language knowledge of the machine operator prevents him from under
standing the operation manual
• by working in any way that endangers operational safety
• when the maximum permitted wind speed is exceeded
• If others ride without proper authorization in the cabor on themachine
• Failure to observe applicable local safety regulations (e.g. oil and gas
industry)
- Handling of lifeboats without specially permitted operation mode.
- Man riding without specially permitted operation mode.
- Tearing loose of fastened loads.
- Lifting a load lying on the ground with luffing gear.
- Lifting of loads with several cranes without specially permitted operation mode.
- Dragging a load.
- Lifting of a load with diagonal pull.
- Installation of spare parts and use of media not approved and authorised by the
manufacturer.
- The load curve or the factory-fitted safety device are bypassed or modified.
- The prescribed maintenance and inspection operations are not adhered to.
copyrightby
166516
Product description
W hole machine
1.4 Whole machine
1.4.1 Whole machine overview

The diagram below provides an overview of the machine components.
Fig. 2: W hole m achine overview
1 Boom Base column Cabin

2 Slewing column 4 Luffing cylinders
1.4.2 Technical data
Construction conditions
Name ‘ Value ,:\v;

Classification, certification authority ABS
Laws, regulations -
Tab. 2: Technical data construction conditions
copyright by
SKGBW/N V001 L IE B H E R R 25
166516
Product description
W hole machine
Environmental conditions
N am e'. ''' ‘ Va| ue’ ^ - \ ' K '

Ambient temperature -25“ C to +45° C
Design temperature -10° C
Relative humidity 93%
Maximum roll angle 5°
Maximum incline 2°
Maximum wind speed during operation -
Maximum wind speed in parked position -
Maximum wind speed during storm in parked posi
tion
Tab. 3: Technical data enviro nm ental conditions
Noise emissions
Name Value
Sound power level L„ a 102 dB(A)
Sound power level in cabin Lp^ 76 dB(A)
Tab. 4: Technical data noise em issions
Vibrations
Name Value
Vibrations affecting the operator's upper limbs < 2.5 m/s^
Vibrations affecting the operator's entire body < 0.5 m/s^
Tab. 5: Technical data fo r vibrations
1.4.3 Safety devices

The safety devices include the following components;
- Emergency stop
- Fire extinguisher (if applicable. Provision by customer)
- Acoustic signalling transmitters
copyrightby
166516
Product description
Whole machine
Emergency stop
Fig. 3: E m ergency stop
An emergency stop is located in the following positions:

- on the switching cabinet
- in the cabin
- at the ladder
- in the base column
copyrightby
166516
Product description
Slew ing column
1.5 Slewing column
1.5.1 Slewing column overview
Fig. 4: S lew ing colum n - fron t view
1 Luffing gear limit switch 6 Maintenance platform

2 Hoist winch 7 Windscreen wipers
3 Boom pivot bearing 8 Searchlight
4 Maintenance ladder 9 Signal horn 6
5 Slewing bearing 10 Hatch
o
copyrightby
166516
Product description
Slewing column
Fig. 5: S lew ing colum n - re a r view
1 Hoisting gear limit switch 3 Swing lock

2 Luffing cylinder for pivot bearing 4 Oil cooler cover
copyrightby
166516
Product description
Slewing column
1.5.2 Machinery room
Fig. 6: M achinery room
1 Hydraulic oil tank 3 Slewing gear (3x)

2 Switch cabinet X1 4Electric motor with hydraulic
power pack
copyrightby
166516
Product description
Slewing column
1.5.3 Aggregate
Fig. 7; A ggregate
1 Ventilation 6 Set of hydraulic pumps

2 Oil level sensor 7 Coupling
3 Return filter 8 Terminal box for electric motor
4 Inspection hatch 9 Electric motor
5 Suction with shut-off valve 10 Sight glass for checking oil level
copyrightby
166516
Product description
Slew ing column
1.5.4 Cabin
Fig. 8: Cabin
1 Right control lever 5 Air conditioning

2 Operator's seat 6 Left control lever
3 Control panel X20 7 Monitor load indication
4 Emergency descent rescue 8 Foot switch
equipment
copyrightby
166516
Product description
Boom
1.6 Boom
1 10 9 «
6
1 Fig- 9: Boom
—1
1 Searchlight 5 Boom pivot bearing 9 Horizontal hook fixing point
2 Railing 6 Luffing cylinder for pivot 10 Rigging material
bearing
3 Rope guard 7 Vertical hook fixing point 11 Rope fixing point
4 Hoist rope 8 Hoist rope pulleys
copyrightby
166516
Product description
Hand pum p without tank*
1.7 Hand pump without tank'
Fig. 10: H a nd pum p w ithout tank
1 Restrictor valve 4 Intake port

2 Lever 5 Pump cylinder
3 Pressure connection
copyrightby
34 L I E B H E R R SK C B W /N V001
166516
Product description
Hand pump with tank*
1.8 Hand pump with tank'
Fig. 11: H and pum p with tank
1 Tank 4 Lever
2 Oil dipstick and oil inlet 5 Pressure gauge
3 Ventilation 6 Pressure connection
copyrightby
S K G B W / N V001 L I E B H E R R 35
166516
Product description
C entral lubrication system*
1.9 Central lubrication system'
Fig. 12: Central lubrication system
1 Supply container 4 Filling nipple

2 Positive pressure relief valve 5Interim lubrication button
3 Pump outlet 6 Control unit
6
o
copyrightby
166516
S a fe ty in s tr u c tio n s
166516
166516
2 S a fe ty in s t r u c tio n s
This section:
- Warns the user about hazards.
- Informs about hazards arising in normal use.
- Informs about how to avoid hazards.
2.1 Technical condition of the machine
For the machine to be operated safely, the following requirements in terms of its
technical condition must be met:
- The machine must be in perfect condition
- Unauthorised conversion or modification is not permitted
- Maintenance must be performed regularly
- Safety devices must be in good working order
2.2 Areas of responsibility
2.2.1 Manufacturer
The manufacturer:
- is responsible for the technically safe condition of the machine supplied,
together with accessories and documentation.
- is aware of its duty to monitor product performance and document all mainte
nance and repair work carried out by authorized service personnel.
- ensures that the machine is kept in an operational state by a worldwide mainte
nance and repair service.
- runs a training center and provides training for the owner's operating and main
tenance personnel as a service.
2.2.2 Owner
The owner:
I - ensures that the machine is operated and maintained by qualified personnel
5 only.
- checks that all individuals who come into contact with the machine are fully
qualified, and authorises them to work.
- specifies the skills and responsibilities of all those working with or near the
machine.
- provides all necessary protective equipment to individuals working with or near
the machine.
copyrightby
SK C B W /N V001 U K B H É R R 39
166516
Safety instructions
A reas o f responsibility
- regularly checks that personnel carry out their work in a safety-conscious

manner,
- is responsible for ensuring the safe condition of the machine.
- completely removes the machine from use upon the discovery of any faults that
may affect safety.
- performs inspections on the machine based on national regulations in addition
to the inspections stipulated by Liebherr.
- informs the manufacturer of any accident involving the machine leading to
serious injury or major damage to property.
- allow/s authorized service personnel unlimited access to the machine in order
that they may fulfill their duty to monitor the product.
- carefully and conscientiously carries out work planning for the machine.
- will not carry out any alterations on the machine without first consulting the
manufacturer.
- must only use original Liebherr spare parts.
2.2.3 Machine operator

The machine operator:
- have read and understood the operation manual.
- operates the machine for the purposes intended, within the limit values speci
fied in the load chart and in accordance with the setup and the operation
manual.
- wear personal protective equipment.
- reports to the owner any alteration to the machine that affects safety.
- halts operation immediately if safe operation is no longer possible.
manufacturer.
2.2.4 Rigger
The rigger:
- is responsible for the correct selection and fitting/removal of the lifting device on
the load or rigging material.
- gives the machine operator signals relating to the movement of the machine
and loads.
- is responsible for ensuring that only one person gives signals to the machine
operator and that the machine operator knows who this person is.
2.2.5 Banksman
The banksman:
- forwards signals from the rigger to the machine operator if the rigger has no
visual contact with the machine operator.
2.2.6 Maintenance personnel

Maintenance personnel:
- maintain the machine to ensure that it remains in a safe and reliable condition.
- have read and understood the operation manual.
- perform all specified maintenance work.
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
R equirem ents to personnel
manufacturer.
2.3 Requirements to personnel
2.3.1 Machine operator

The machine operator:
- are of the statutory minimum age.
- must be physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions) of
safely operating the machine.
- is authorised to operate the machine.
- is capable of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances,
is trained:
• to operate this type of machine
• in attaching and signalling
• to operate fire extinguishing equipment
- is aware of the escape routes in the event of an emergency.
- do not suffer from any physical or psychological ailments that lower any of the
specified requirements.
- are not under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
2.3.2 Rigger
The rigger:
- is physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions) of safely
using/moving lifting devices.
- is authorised to rig loads,
is capable:
• of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances
• of accurately estimating mass and load distribution
• of operating walkie-talkies and using them to give clear instructions
• of guiding the load and ensuring the safe movement of the load and the
machine
is trained:
• in attaching lifting devices
• in signalling and knows the signal signs
• in selecting the correct lifting device
• in securing against unexpected detachment
• in preventing damage to lifting devices
6
9 2.3.3 Banksman
The banksman:
- are physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions).
- is authorised to give signal signs.
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
P ersonal protective equipm ent
is capable:
• of accurately estimating distances, heights and clearances
• of operating walkie-talkies and using them to give clear instructions
• of guiding the load and ensuring the safe movement of the load and the
machine
- is trained in signalling and knows the signal signs.
- are not under the influence of alcohol or drugs,
2.3.4 Maintenance personnel

Maintenance personnel:
- are physically capable (adequate eyesight and hearing, quick reactions).
- are familiar with the machine and the hazards.
- are familiar with all maintenance procedures and measures.
- are trained to perform maintenance duties, including on specialist equipment.
2.4 Personal protective equipment
The machine operator and maintenance personnel must take personal responsi
bility for:
- Wearing the required personal protective gear.
- Regular cleaning and care of the protective gear.
- Replacing any defective items of protective gear promptly.
The personal protective gear comprises:
Safe ty helmet, if head injuries are possible due to:
• collision,
• swinging, falling, toppling or flying objects
Safe ty g o g g le s , if eye injuries are possible due to:
• corrosive or pressurised liquids
• loose flying parts
- E a r protection, if the sound level is likely to be excessive
- B re ath in g m ask, where there is danger from health-threatening gases,vapour,
smoke or dust in the working environment
Protective glo v e s, if hand injuries are possible due to:
• Burns
• pointed or sharp objects
- Reflective, b old ly-colou re d c loth in g if prompt recognition by other personnel
is necessary.
Safe ty sh o e s, if foot injuries are possible due to: |
• collision or trapping 5
• pointed or sharp objects g
• swaying or falling objects |
- S p e c ia l protective clothing, where there is a risk of burns,hypothermia, I
chemical burns, stabbing or cutting injuries to the body
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
Danger zone
2.5 Work area
In accordance with the ED Machinery Directive, the following guidelines have been
laid down for operation of the machine by one machine operator.
R equired ope ratin g pe rsonnel: one machine operator
W orkp lace : Cabin
B a n k sm a n : one additional person
Ensure that the following conditions are satisfied:

- No one other than the machine operator is on the machine or within the danger
zone around the machine.
- The machine operator must remain in the cab all the time.
Use operating elements exclusively from the operator's seat. Using any operating
elements through the open cabin door is prohibited.
Requirements for a safe working environment:
- Keep cab clean.
- Do not place any articles on the control panels.
- Do not keep tools in the cab.
- Hang any clothing on the hook provided for this purpose.
- Keep the entrance to the cabin clean and free of snow and ice; do not obstruct
the entrance or block the escape routes.
- Keep the screens and mirrors (internal and external) clean and free of conden
sation and ice.
2.6 Danger zone
The danger zone is the area surrounding the machine, in which people may be
injured by:
- working movements of the machine.
- a swinging or falling load.
- optional equipment on the machine.
DANGER
A Machine in use!
► Make sure that no-one is standing in the danger area.
► Leave the danger area.
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
M e an in g of the safety sig n s
/ \
/ \
/ \
\ '
\ /
\
/ /
\
\
\ /
/
\
" •
\
X
Fig. 13: D a nger zone
1 Working area at maximum radius x Travel of swinging load

2 Danger zone
2.7 Meaning of the safety signs
Safety signs are divided into different groups that differ v\/ith respect to shape and
colour.
2.7.1 Prohibition signs

Prohibition signs are round with a red border and a red horizontal line. The picto-
gram is black. Prohibition signs are attached wherever hazardous behaviour is
prohibited.
No fire, naked flames or smoking
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
M eaning o f the safety signs
No access for unauthorised personnel
No access for persons with a cardiac pacemaker
Stepping on surface prohibited
Pedestrians forbidden
Do not switch
Do not lift load
No climbing for unauthorised personnel
2.7.2 Warning signs

Warning signs are triangular with a yellow surface and a black edge. The picto-
gram is black. Warning signs are attached to warn against risks or hazards.
A
Danger area
A
Danger through electrical voltage
A
Danger of getting drawn in
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
M e a n in g o f th e s a fe ty s ig n s
A
Danger of getting drawn in
Danger from hot surfaces
A
Slip hazard
A
Fall hazard
A
Stumble hazard
Crushing hazard
Crushing hazard
A
Crushing hazard
A
Crushing hazard
Danger through electromagnetic waves
copyright by
46 L I E B H E R R SK C B W / N V001
166516
Safety instructions
M eaning o f the safety signs
A
Danger from pressure reservoirs
Danger through batteries
Danger through hydraulic oil
2.7.3 Fire protection signs

Fire protection signs are square and show a white pictogram on a red background.
Fire signs are installed to mark locations like fire alarm boxes or fire extinguishing
equipment.
Fire extinguishers
Fire extinguishers
Fire detector
2.7.4 IVIandatory signs

Mandatory signs are round and show a white pictogram on a blue background.
Mandatory sings are installed wherever a certain behaviour is prescribed.
O
General mandatory signs
Wear safety helmet
Wear hearing protection
6
o
Wear safety gloves
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
Wear facial protection
Wear foot protection
Use safety belts
Use harnesses
2.8 Hazards
2.8.1 Mechanical action
W A R N IN G
A Mechanical actions due to moving machinery!
When operating the machine, numerous hazards and situations can arise that can
cause life-threatening injuries.
► Observe handling and situation-specific safety notes.
Note
(C Observe the following safety notes:
► Wear suitable personal protective equipment.
► Only work on non-moving parts.
E x a m p le s o f m e ch an ica l action s:
Standing under a suspended load.
Danger of being drawn in by moving drive units or machine parts.
Danger of falling when working without safety gear.
V
copyright by
48 U E B H E R R SKCBW/NV001
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
Danger of crushing due to unsecured components such as doors or sliding

elements.
First aid
1. Protection/personal safety
• Identify - what is the nature of the emergency?
• Think - what are the dangers for the injured party or the helper?
• Act - make the situation safe.
2. Emergency call
3. Emergency life-saving measures
• Recovery position
• Cardiac massage, artificial respiration and defibrillation
• Staunch bleeding, shock prevention
Additional first aid
2.8.2 Electrical energy
W A R N IN G
A Electricity in conductive machine parts!
Note
(D Observe the following safety notes:
► Only carry out work with the electrical supply switched off.
► Secure the machine to prevent unauthorised startup.
E x a m p le s o f electrical energy:
- External power supply
W A R N IN G
A Live machine parts!
risk of electric shock.
► Before recovering an injured party ensure that there is no further risk of electro
cution.
First aid
2. Emergency call
6 3. Emergency life-saving measures
o
4. Additional first aid
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
Note
(D ► Seek medical attention after electrical accidents. The person affected may
experience symptoms of an irregular heartbeat some time after the accident.
2.8.3 Hydraulic energy
W A R N IN G
A Escaping hydraulic oil under high pressure!
Leakages in hydraulic lines can cause injuries to skin, destroy tissue and can
cause blood poisoning due to the high pressures involved.
Note
(D Observe the following safety notes;
► Repairs to hydraulic systems may only be carried out by qualified technicians
with specialised knowledge and experience of hydraulics.
► Before starting work ensure that the whole system has been depressurised.
► Never attempt to locate the leakage point with your hand or other part of the
body
► Damaged hydraulic components must be replaced immediately with original
Liebherr spare parts.
E x a m p le s of h yd rau lic energy:
Tissue damage from leaks.
Sepsis from hydraulic oil entering bloodstream.
F irst aid
2. Emergency call
• Gently cover injured area(s) with a sterile anti-bacterial bandage.
• Rinse eyes with pure drinking water.
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
2.8.4 Burns
C A U T IO N
A Contact with hot surfaces and consumables!
High surface and equipment temperatures can lead to burns or scalding.
Note
► Always wear suitable protective gloves when working on hot components.
► Only carry out work on the machine after it has cooled down and is stopped.
E x a m p le s o f b u rn s and sc a ld in g :
Burns from contact with the entire drive system.
Scalding from steam exiting from the cooling system or hydraulic oil from the drive
system.
+
First aid
• Think - what are the dangers for the injured partyor the helper?
2. Emergency call
With first-degree burns (redness of the skin):
• Cool the affected body part by rinsing with cold fresh water.
• Gently cover injured area(s) with a sterile anti-bacterial bandage.
With second-degree burns (blisters on the skin):
• Cool the affected body part by rinsing with cold fresh water.
• Gently cover the area using a sterile anti-bacterial bandage. Do not apply
pressure.
With third-degree burns (charring of the skin and tissue):
• Gently cover the area using a sterile anti-bacterial bandage. Do not apply
pressure.
I
6
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
2.8.5 Chemical burns
CAUTION
A Contact with corrosive consumables!
Acids and bases cause chemical burns to skin and tissue, and blindness if they
come in contact with the eye.
Acids and bases will damage clothing.
Note
► When working with acids always wear suitable safety goggles or face protec
tion, protective clothing and gloves.
Examples of chemical burns:

Chemical burns from handling acidic consumables.
Chemical burns from leaking battery acid.
+
First aid
2. Emergency call
• Removing clothing from injured body parts.
• Rinse injured areas with drinking water.
• Gently cover the area with a sterile anti-bacterial bandage.
2.8.6 Fire and explosion
WARNING
A No fire, naked flames or electrostatic discharges!
Flammable materials or any gases arising from them can cause a fire and explo
sion hazard.
ODpyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
Note
► Do not store any flamnnable materials or carry them in the machine, only in fire
proof containers.
► Wipe any spilled diesel fuel off the machine and neutralise it on the ground with
bonding agents
► Do not clean the machine with flammable fluids.
► Do not store cleaning cloths in the engine compartment and remove flammable
residues such as oil leakages, ash and waste paper.
► Only refuel the machine in a well ventilated area or provide fresh air.
► Make sure there is good metallic contact between the pump nozzle and the filler
neck during refuelling. If possible, ground the machine at the fuelling station
while it is being refuelled.
► No open fire when handling flammable materials.
E x a m p le s o f fire an d e x p lo sio n hazards:
Escaped fuel is a fire hazard.
- Detonating gas in combination with a spark when charging or discharging

batteries.
- Vapourised fuel in combination with an electrostatic discharge between the
machine and the fuel rig.
First aid
2. Emergency call
• (For more information see: 2.9.3 Firefighting, page 59)
• (For more information see: 2.8.4 Burns, page 51)
2.8.7 Poisoning and suffocation
W A R N IN G
6 A Inadequate ventilation or fresh air!
Poisonous vapours or other atmospheres hazardous to health can lead to
o
poisoning or suffocation.
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
Note
► Ensure adequate ventilation in the cab.
► Use breathing apparatus when working with hazardous materials.
E x a m p le s of p o iso n in g and d a n g e rs o f a sph yxiation:
- Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide and other hazardous gases.
- If the machine is used in areas where hazardous substances are present,
contact with hazardous gases is a possibility.
- The refrigerant from the air conditioning system circuit displaces the oxygen in
the air.
+
First aid
2. Emergency call
2.8.8 Electromagnetic influence
W A R N IN G
A Electromagnetic influence when the machine is deployed near transmitting
stations, radar stations or directional radio systems!
Malfunctions or failure of electronic implants (pacemakers).
Malfunction or failure of the control system.
Note
► The machine must be stopped if there is suspected electromagnetic interfer
ence to the controls.
E x a m p le s o f e le ctrom agn e tic influence:

- Malfunction or failure of control systems if operating the machine near transmit
ters, directional radio systems or radar stations.
- Environmental influence through the use of electromagnetic rigging material or
integrated radio devices.
2.8.9 Exposure to wind
DANGER
A Exposure to wind can have fatal consequences!
Damage to the machine.
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
Note
► Observe the permitted wind speeds in the applicable load chart.
► Find out and take into consideration the wind conditions at the site and the
weather forecasts for the period of operation.
► The machine operator must know the weather report and the current wind
speed at the site where the machine is operating before starting work. If exces
sive wind speeds are expected within the next few hours, work must not start
and precautions must be taken to protect against storm damage.
► Watch out for dangerous gusts of wind.
► Do not lift any large-surface parts.
► Reduce loads and maximum boom angle.
► Hoist the loads slowly and carefully and do not let them become unstable.
DANGER
A Wind speed exceeds the maximum permitted speed (greater than specified in the
applicable load chart)!
► Set down and secure the load.
► Bring machine into parked position 0°.
Wind impact on machine and load:

- acts like an additional load on the hook.
- is particularly dangerous at maximum boom angle without a load.
- causes the load to sway.
- increases the swing radius.
- generates additional diagonal pull.
If no anemometer is mounted on the slewing column, the following table allows
approximation of the wind speed. The wind speed at the boom may be greater than
the wind speed at or near ground level.
W in d force W in d sp e e d
W ave D e scrip tion o f the c o n d itio n s at se a

Beau fort D e sig n a tio n K n o ts
lieight (m)
0 Calm 0 0 Mirror-smooth sea.

1 Light air 2 0,1 Small flaky-looking ripples without white crests.
2 Light breeze 5 0,2 Small, short waves. Glassy, non-breaking crests.
Small, short waves. Crests begin to break. Mostly
3 Gentle breeze 9 0,6 transparent foam. Occasional small, white foam
heads.
5 4 Moderate breeze 13 1 Small, longer waves. Many have white crests.

Moderate longer waves. Widespread white
5 Fresh breeze 19 2
crests. Isolated froth.
Large waves. Crests break and leave large white
6 Strong breeze 24 3
areas of foam. Some froth.
Sea heaps up. White foam begins to streak in
7 Near gale 30 4
wind direction.
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
Moderately high waves with considerably long

crests. Crest edges begin to froth. Foam covers
8 Gale 37 5,5
the surface in pronounced streaks in the wind
direction.
High waves. Thick strips of foam in the wind
9 Severe gale 44 7 direction. Wave crests roll over one another. Sea
begins to “roll”. Froth can affect visibility.
Very high waves with long breaking crests. The
resulting foam lies on the surface in thick white
10 Storm 52 9 streaks in the wind direction. Sea is white from
foam. Strong intermittent “rolling” of the sea. Visi
bility affected by froth.
Exceptionally high waves (small and medium
sized ships are momentarily hidden from view
behind the waves). Sea is completely white from
11 Violent storm 60 11,5
foam, which streaks in the wind direction. Edges
of the wave crests turn to froth. Visibility limited
by froth.
Air filled with foam and froth. Sea completely
12 Hurricane <64 <14
white with froth. Visibility is extremely limited.
Tab. 6: W ind strengths a ccording to the B e aufort scale
2.8.10 Snow and ice loads
DANGER
A Snow or ice on the machine!
Structural breakdown.
WARNING
A Falling chunks of snow and ice!
► Never work with a boom that is iced up or covered in snow.
Note
► Lay down the boom and carefully remove any large accumulations of ice and
snow.
► Remove snow and ice from all sensitive parts such as limit switches, guides,
etc.
► Snow and ice loads increase the boom weight and the area exposed to the
wind.
These factors will lead to a premature shutdown of the Load Moment Limiter (LML)
- it will no longer be possible to work at the maximum permitted lifting capacity.
copyrightby
56 L I E B H E R R SKCBW/NV001
166516
Safety instructions
Hazards
2.8.11 Lightning strike
W A R N IN G
A Electric shock from lightning!
Coming into contact with a direct or indirect current flow caused by a voltage flash-
over or step voltage can be fatal.
Fall hazard when working at heights.
It can also cause a total loss of control, damage to the electronics or to local
welding spots on supports, especially on the swing ring.
Note
► Lay down the boom before a storm breaks.
► During a storm, keep away from large, free-standing metal parts (e.g. the
machine).
► Earth machines where the steel structure does not have a direct contact to
ground.
► Only evacuate the cab in the case of fire.
The closed machine operator's cab acts as a Faraday cage. The charge is chan
neled through the machine and into the ground.
P rom ptly lay d ow n the b o o m if a ny o f the follo w in g criteria apply:
- On sites that experience frequent storms
M e a su re s to take after a ligh tn in g strike on the m ach in e h a s been o b se rve d
or is su sp e c te d :
- Thoroughly inspect the machine paying particular attention to any damaged
cables, hoses and ropes.
- Check the operational capability of the control system.
- Slowly move the slewing gear and listen for any unusual noises.
- Inspect the boom for damage.
- Contact Liebherr after sales service.
+
First aid
2. Emergency call
• (For more information see: 2.9.1 How to respond in the event of a current
5
transfer, page 58)
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
W hat to do in dangerous situations
2.8.12 Environment
N O T IC E
Risk of damage to the environment caused by pollutants!
If their release is not controlled, fuels, oils, cleaning agents, coolant, etc. can enter
the ground or rivers and cause environmental damage.
Note
Observe the following safety notes:
► If the machine leaks, immediately collect the escaping liquid and seal the leak.
► Bind any spilled liquid with binding agent or neutralise it with suitable agents.
► When draining or catching liquids use suitable containers (capacities and
resistant to chemicals).
► Carry out cleaning work on firm well-drained ground.
► Observe the national and international environmental regulations for the
disposal of chemicals or waste.
► Notify the emergency services and authorities if large amounts of substances
that are harmful to the environment escape.
E x a m p le s o f e nvironm ental hazards:

4L - Leakages
- Refilling consumables incorrectly
2.9 What to do in dangerous situations
2.9.1 How to respond in the event of a current transfer
First response to a current transfer

- Remain calm.
Alert the relevant power supply company.
Do not leave the cab.
• The cabin acts as a Faraday cage. Remaining inthe operator's cabin is safer
than staying outside.
• Only evacuate the cab in the case of fire.
If the Litronic control system is still functioning:
• Move the machine out of the danger area.
• Remain in the cab until current is no longerbeing conducted through the
machine.
+
First aid
- Alert the emergency services.

- Personnel are to rescued by experts only.
copyrightby
166516
Safety instructions
W hat to do in dangerous situations
Note
(D ► Seek medical attention after electrical accidents. The person affected may
experience symptoms of an irregular heartbeat some time after the accident.
2.9.2 How to respond in the event of a fire
W A R N IN G
A Incorrect behaviour in event of fire!
- Switch off the engine.

- Alert the emergency services.
- Move people out of the danger zone, administer first aid if required (For more
information see: 2.8.4 Burns, page 51).
- Only start to fight the fire if there is no risk to your personal safety (For more
information see: 2.9.3 Firefighting, page 59).
W A R N IN G
A Danger of backflash!
Even if the fire appears to be extinguished, escaping fuel or oil coming in contact
with hot components may reignite.
Once the risk of backfiashing no longer persists:
► Start assessing the damage.
2.9.3 Firefighting
Fire classes
W A R N IN G
A Appropriate extinguishers must be used!
If unsuitable extinguishers are used, they may be ineffective or even introduce
additional hazards.
► Use an extinguisher that is appropriate for the fire class.
Fires involving solid and chiefly organic materials that normally smoulder
Fires involving liquids or liquefying materials
6
o Fires involving gases
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
W h a t to do In dangerous situations
Fires Involving metals
Use of the fire extinguisher
Note
(D Fire extinguishers are subject to national regulations!
► Arrange for the plant operator to provide fire extinguishers, replace them as
necessary and Inspect them periodically.
- Remove the fire extinguisher from its mount on the machine and prepare It for
use.
- Fight the source of the fire with several short bursts.
- While fighting the fire, ask your colleagues to alert the fire brigade.
Incorrect C orrect
Fight the fire with the vi^lnd behind you
Extinguish the fire from the front to the

back and from the bottom to the top
But: Extinguish dropping and liquid fires I

5
from the top to the bottom
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
Incorrect C orre ct
Do not use extinguishers in succession

but use several extinguishers at the
same time
Make sure that the fire does not reignite

- always extinguish glowing embers with
water
Do not put the fire extinguishers back in

place after use - refill them
Tab. 7: Use o f the fire exting uish er
2.10 Hand signals
The hand signals:

- are used for communication purposes when there is visual contact between
machine operator and signalman or other site personnel
- are clearly defined in national and international standards
Note
5 ► All persons involved must decide among themselves which hand signals are to
be used.
The following overview comprises:

- hand signals in accordance with BGV A8 (Germany)
- hand signals in accordance with ASME/ANSI B30.5 (United States of America)
copyright by
SK C B W / N V001 U E B H E R R 61
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
2.10.1 General hand signals in accordance with BGV A8

W a rn in g, Start, S to p
- Hold the right arm stretched vertically upwards

- Palm facing forwards
Sto p , Interruption
- Stretch out both arms to the side horizontally

- Palms facing forwards
S to p - D a n g e r
- First stretch out both arms horizontally to the sides

- Palms facing forwards
- Now alternately bend in and stretch out the arms
Lift
- Bend the right arm and hold upwards

- The hand makes a small, circular movement
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
Low er
- Stretch out the right arm downwards

- Palm facing inwards
S lo w ly
- Stretch out right arm horizontally

- Palm facing downwards
- Move hand slowly up and down
Depart

- Move the arm back and forth sideways
A p p ro a c h
- Bend both arms

- Palms facing inwards
- Beckon with the forearms
R e m o ve
- Bend both arms

- Palms facing outwards
- Wave away with the forearms
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
Travel right (from the signalman’s viewpoint)
- Bend right arm slightly while holding horizontal

Travel left (from the signalman's viewpoint)
- Bend left arm slightly while holding horizontal

Indicate d ista n ce reduction
- Hold both palms parallel and move them toward each other to indicate the
distance
2.10.2 Special hand signals for attachment operations

Lift load slo w ly

- The outstretched finger points upwards
- The right hand makes small, circular movements
- Stretch out the left hand and hold it over the right hand
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
Low e r load slo w ly
- Hold the right arm downwards

- The outstretched finger points downwards
- The right hand makes small, circular movements
- Hold the left hand under the right hand
R a ise the m ain b o o m

- The outstretched thumb points upwards
- Stretch out the left hand and hold it over the right hand
Low e r the m ain b o o m
- Bend the right arm

- The outstretched thumb points downwards
- Stretch out the left hand and hold it under the right hand
Lift m ain b o o m an d hold load

- Make a fist with the left hand and hold it under the right hand
Low e r m ain b o o m and hold load

- Make a fist with the left hand and hold it under the right hand
6
o
S
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
R a is e m ain b o o m an d low er load

- Stretch out left arm and point index finger down
- Move the left hand in circles and hold it under the right hand
Low e r m ain b o o m an d lift load

- Bend left arm and point index finger up
- Move the left hand in circles and hold it under the right hand
S w in g u ppe rcarriage to the right
- Bend the left arm and hold it up

- The thumb points outwards in the direction of rotation
- Point index finger down and make circles
S w in g u ppe rcarriage to the left
- Bend the right arm and hold it up

- The thumb points outwards in the direction of rotation
- Stretch out the left arm downwards
- Point index finger down and make circles
O p e n gra b

- Open hand downwards
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
C lo s e gra b

- Close the hand into a fist
2.10.3 Hand signals for lifting operations in accordance with

ASME/ANSI B30.5
Lift load

- The outstretched index finger points upwards
Low er load

- The outstretched index finger points downwards
U se m ain w inch
- Tap the safety helmet with the fist

- Then give further hand signals
A
o
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
U se auxiliary w incli

- Tap the underside of the right elbow with the left hand
- Then give further hand signals
R a ise the m ain b o o m

Low er thie m ain b o o m

IVIove slo w ly
- Give the appropriate signal with one hand, (e.g.: Lift load)
- Hold the other hand above or below the other hand
R a is e m ain b o o m an d low er load

- Stretch and bend the remaining fingers alternately for as long the load has to be
lowered
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
Low er m ain b o o m and lift load

- Stretch and bend the remaining fingers alternately for as long the load has to be
raised
S w in g

- The extended fingers point in the direction of rotation
S to p
- Stretch out one arm horizontally

- Swing arm back and forth horizontally
E m e rge n cy sto p
- Stretch out both arms horizontally

- Palms facing downwards
- Swing both arms back and forth horizontally
Drive
- Bend one arm

- Make a movement in the travel direction with the open hand
6
o
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
S h u t dow n and se c u re m ach in e
- Hook your hands in front of your body
Travel with both craw ler c h a in s
- Hold both fists in front of the body

- Indicate travel direction with circular motions
T ravelling with on e craw ler track
- Bend the arm and hold up a fist on the same side as the stationary crawler track
- Bend the other arm in front of the body on the side of the moving track
- Indicate the travel direction by making circular movements with the fist
Extend boom

- Thumbs facing outwards
R etract boom

- The thumbs point towards each other
copyright by
166516
Safety instructions
Hand signals
Retract boom (one-handed signal)

- Hold one fist in front of your chest
- Your thumb points to your chest
Extend boom (one-handed signal)

- Hold one fist in front of your chest
- Thunnb facing outwards
6
o
copyright by
166516
H and s ig n a ls
copyright by
166516
C o n tro l a n d o p e ra tin g e le m e n t s 3
166516
3 C o n tro l a n d o p e ra tin g e le m e n ts
166516
3 C o n tr o l a n d o p e r a tin g e le m e n ts
This section:
- informs about the layout of control and operating elennents.
- describes each element.
copyright by
SKCBW/N V001 L IE B H E R R 75
166516
C o n tro l a n d o p e r a tin g e le m e n ts
Control stand
3 .1 C o n tro l s ta n d
Fig. 133: Control stand
1 Left control lever 4 Operator's seat

2 Monitor load indication 5 Right control lever
3 Foot pedals 6 Control panel X20
6
o
copyright by
166516
Left control lever
3 .2 L e ft c o n tro l le v e r
3.2.1 Function a ss ig n m e n t of left control lever b u tton s
Fig. 134: Function assignment o f left control lever buttons
B utto n O perating m ode S ym bol F u n ctio n

1 Not used
2 Not used
. y
3 All operating modes Signal horn
4 Not used
Tab. 8: Function assignment o f left control lever buttons
copyright by
166516
C o n tr o l a n d o p e r a tin g e le m e n ts
Left control lever
3.2.2 Function a ss ig n m e n t of left control lever m ovem ent

directions
Fig. 136: Function assignment o f left control lever movement directions
M ovem ent
O perating m ode S ym bol F u nction
d ire c tio n
A All operating modes Lift boom
B All operating modes K Lower boom
C All operating modes Swing crane to the right
D All operating modes Swing crane to the left
Tab. 9: Function assignment o f left control lever movement directions
copyright by
166516
R ig h t control lever
3 .3 R ig h t c o n t r o l le v e r
3.3.1 Function a ss ig n m e n t of right control lever b uttons
Fig. 141: Function assignment o f right control lever buttons
B u tto n O perating m ode S ym bol F u n c tio n
Grab operation Open grab
Turn rotator counter-clock

Rotator operation
& wise
copyright by
166516
Righ t control lever
3.3.2 Function a ss ig n m e n t of right control lever m ovem ent

directions
Fig. 147: Function assignment o f right control lever movement directions
copyright by
166516
R igh t control lever
't: J O p e ra tm g m ode V; Symbot. ' ' F u n c tio n '

> d ire c iib h |;'4 '-' ' . '
A
A All operating modes Lift load
B All operating modes Lowering a load

7 (!^
V
c Not used
D Not used
Tab. 11: Function assignment o f right control lever movement directions
6
o
copyright by
166516
Explanation of sym bols u se d
3 .4 E x p la n a tio n o f s y m b o ls u s e d
D isplay
O B u tto n w ith LED

LED lights up: Function active.
LED not on: Function inactive.
S w itch
Key s w itc h
copyright by
166516
Control panel X20
3 .5 C o n tro l p a n e l X 2 0
o o
0 1
A i2
i I
© fl M ® tii^
o o
O )
emergency O
stop
o
o o
Fig. 158: Control panel X20
copyright by
SKCBW/NV001 L IE B H E R R 83
166516
C o n tr o l and o p e r a tin g e le m e n ts
C on trol panel X20
4TGTI P ow er m anagem ent system

Checks whether the ship's power supply is available.
Is lit if power supply is available.
C abin lig h tin g
1 Cabin lighting off
0 I 2 Cabin lighting on
A c ce ss lig h tin g
Switches the access lighting on and off.
S e a rch lig h t
Switches the searchlight on and off.
E ngine fa ilu re
Lights up in case of engine failure.
F ill level h yd ra u lic tank/te m p e ra tu re e rro r

Lights up in case of insufficient oil level or elevated oil temperature.
too O verload
Lights up when the maximally admissible load is exceeded.
L im it s w itc h d isp lay

Lights up when a limit switch is reached.
C rane o n /o ff
1 2
I I 1 Ignition off
0 IE 2 Ignition on
®
^ Crane on
Is lit when ignition is on.
copyright by
166516
Control panel X20
Engine on
Switches the motor on.
Is lit when the motor is on.
Engine o ff
Switches the motor off.
P rese lectio n cable drum

1 2 3
1 Cable drum off
2 Cable drum automatic
3 Cable drum manual
C able d ru m active
Activates the cable drum.
Is lit with activated cable drum.
C able d ru m in a ctive
Deactivates the cable drum.
W in d in g up the cable drum

W inds up the cable drum.
U n w in d in g th e cable drum
Unwinds the cable drum.
B oom o u ts id e o f w o rk range
Lights up after leaving the work area with the boom.
Parked p o s itio n /b y p a s s parked p o s itio n

1 Bypass parked position off
2 Bypass parked position on
copyright by
166516
Control panel X20
P reselection h o is tin g gear
1 Main hoist
2 Auxiliary lioist
P reselection bypass s e c to r
1 Bypass sector off
2 Bypass sector on
E m ergency s to p
Activates the emergency stop.

W indscreen w ip e rs
2 3
1 Windscreen wipers off
2 Windscreen wipers interval
3 Windscreen wipers permanent
W indscreen w ash syste m

Activates the windscreen wash system.
6
o
copyright by
166516
Control panel swing lock*
3 .6 C o n tro l p a n e l s w in g lo c k '
P reselection sw in g locl<
1 Preselection swing lock off

2 Preselection swing lock on
© S w ing parked p o s itio n

Lights up with parked position swing.
U n lockin g the sw in g
Unlocks the swing.
Lights up with unlocked swing.
C±l L o ckin g the sw in g

Locks the swing.
Lights up with locked swing.
copyright by
166516
Control panel grab operation*
3 .7 C o n tro l p a n e l g ra b o p e r a tio n '
Fig. 188: Control panel grab operation
P reselection grab o p e ra tio n

1 Preselection grab operation on
2 Preselection grab operation off
G rab operatio n active
Activates grab operation.
P reselection tu g g e r w in ch *
1 Preselection tugger winch 1
- e - __
2 Preselection tugger winch 2
I
^ 1+ 3 Preselection tugger winch 1+2
I ___ T ug g er w in ch active
Activates the tugger winch.
copyright by
88 L IE B H E R R SK CBW/N V001
166516
Control p anel hook fixing point*
3 .8 C o n tro l p a n e l h o o k fix in g p o in f
B ypass h o is tin g gear

1 Bypass hoisting gear off
ypass h I- 2 Bypass hoisting gear on
0 ______ I
®
h oo k p a rk p o s .
P reselection h ook fix in g p o in t

1 2
1 Preselection hook fixing point off
2 Preselection hook fixing point on
M ®
hoo k p a rk in g
P reselection h ook fix in g p o in t fo r h o o k operating m ode

1 Main hoist
heavy n o rm a l
lift hft
2 Auxiliary hoist
ro p e re e v in g
Ö
o
copyright by
166516
Control panel man riding*
3 .9 C o n tro l p a n e l m a n r id in g '
Fig. 197: Control panel lim it switch
P reselection man rid in g

1 2
1 Preselection man riding on
2 Preselection man riding off
I Man rid in g on
Is lit with activated man riding.
6
o
copyright by
166516
Control panel sp re ad e r operation*
3 .1 0 C o n tro l p a n e l s p r e a d e r o p e r a tio n '
Fig. 200: Control panel spreader operation
A c tiv a tin g s p re a d e r operation

Activates spreader operation.
SPREADER Is lit with activated spreader operation.
ON
copyright by
SKCBW/NV001 UEBHERR 91
166516
Control panel spreader operation*
D eactivating sp re a d e r o p e ration
Deactivates spreader operation.
SPRERDER
OFF
T e le sco p ing th e sp reader

1 2 3
1 Position 40 - 20
2 Initial position
3 Position 20 - 40
TELES C O PIN G
10-20 20-40
L o w e rin g green flip p e r

Lowers the green flipper.
F L IP P E R S DOHN
GREEN
L o w e rin g bla ck flip p e r

Lowers the black flipper.
F L IP P E R DOWN
BLAC K
L o w ering w h ite flip p e r

Lowers the white flipper.
F L IP P E R DOWN
W irH E
L o w e rin g red flip p e r

Lowers the red flipper.
F L IP P E R S DOWN
RED
R aising all flip p e rs

Raises all flippers.
ALL F L IP P E R S
UP
S preader is dow n
Lights up when spreader is down.
L o c k in g tw is tlo c k s
Locks the twistlocks.
Lights up with locked twistlocks.
U n lo c k in g tw is tlo c k s
Unlocks the twistlocks.
Lights up with unlocked twistlocks.
copyright by
166516
Control panel sp re ad er operation*
W e igh t balance sp reader

1 2 3
1 Balance spreader to black flipper
2 Initial position
3 Balance spreader to white flipper
LE V E L
BLACK H H ir E
6
o
copyright by
166516
C o n tr o l a nd o p e r a tin g e le m e n ts
A ir conditioning*
3 .1 1 A ir c o n d itio n in g '
Fig. 213: A ir conditioning
Fig. 214: A ir conditioning main switch
1 Main switch on 2 IVIain switch off
copyright by
166516
Air conditioning*
Fig. 215: A ir conditioning control unit
1 Fan speed 2 Temperature
Fan speed
1 High blower stage
2 Medium blower stage
3 Low blower stage
4 Blower off
Tem perature
1 Cooling
2 Temperature off
3 Heating
copyright by
166516
Load indication T300*
3 .1 2 L o a d in d ic a tio n T 3 0 0 '
o
i n n n n ^
l U . U U U H B
Fig. 218: Load indication T300
For further information see: Volume ‘Technical information”, chapter “Additional

documentation”.
copyright by
166516
P Å amplifier*
3 .1 3 P Å a m p l i f i e r ’'
Fig. 219: PÅ am plifier
1 XLR microphone input 6 ATT switch

2 DIN microphone input 7 Mono switch
3 Volume control for microphone 8 ON / OFF switch
input
4 Volume control for additional 9 AUX input
inputs
5 Sound control
XLR m icro p h o n e in p u t
This input allows the use of dynamic microphones with balanced and unbalanced
output. If this input is used at the same time as the DIN input, both signals are
transmitted.
DIN m ic ro p h o n e in p u t
This input allows the use of dynamic microphones with balanced and unbalanced
output. If this input is used at the same time as the XLR input, both signals are
transmitted. Special connections to the plug allow music to be turned down
manually (see ATT switch). LED lights up when microphone is plugged in.
V olum e c o n tro l fo r m icro p h o n e in p u t
The volume of both microphone inputs (XLR and DIN) is controlled by the volume
control.
V olum e c o n tro l fo r a d d itio n a l in p u ts
The volume of the AUX input is controlled by the volume control for the additional
inputs.
S ound c o n tro l
The high and low frequencies are controlled by the sound control. The middle posi
tion is neutral.
ATT sw itch
The AUX input is turned down by the operation of the ATT switch. This function is
used to give priority to microphone announcements that would otherwise be mixed
with AUX signals.
M ono s w itc h
copyright by
166516
P Å amplifier*
Switching from STEREO to MONO for AUX inputs.
AUX in p u t
The AUX input serves to connect a car radio, CD player, IVIP3 player, etc.
copyright by
166516
Switch cabinet X1
3 .1 4 S w itc h c a b in e t X 1
Fig. 220: Switch cabinet X1
1 Thermostat 5 Emergency stop

2 Helicopter warning light 6 Operating hours counter
3 Ammeter 7 Main power supply
4 Auxiliary supply
H e lico p te r w a rn in g lig h t
1 Helicopter warning light off
2 Helicopter warning light on
copyright by
SKCBW/N V001 UEBHERR 99
166516
Sw itch cabinet X I
A u x ilia ry su pp ly
1 Auxiliary supply off

2 Auxiliary supply on
M ain pow er s u p p ly
1 Main power supply on
2 Main power supply tripped
3 Main power supply reset
4 Main power supply off
6
o
copyright by
100 UEBHERR SK CBW/N V001
166516
Central lubrication system *
3 .1 5 C e n tra l lu b r ic a tio n s y s te m '
S dnnm iendt (miin.) S etting th e lu b ric a tio n tim e
S etting th e pause tim e
LE D
o
71 Interim lu b ric a tio n
6
o
copyright by
166516
Central lubrication system *
copyright by
102 L IE B H E R R SK CBW/N V001
166516
O p e r a tio n 4
16 6516
4 O p e ra tio n
166516
4 O p e r a tio n
The following pages describe the operation of the machine, The basic operating
instructions at the start of the chapter are of vital importance for safe working and
the service life of the machine.
The chapter takes you through the various procedures and describes operational
steps, such as e.g.:
- safe machine startup.
- Operation of the main functions and auxiliary functions
- safe parking of the machine.
å
o
copyright by
SKCBW/N V001 L IE B H E R R 10 5
166516
O p e ra tio n
Steps
4 .1 S te p s
4.1.1 S te p p in g on the m achine
Fig. 229: Steps

6
o
WARNING
A Inadmissible stepping on machine during operation!
Personal injury.
► Only step on machine when it is standing still.
copyright by
106 L IE B H E R R SKCBW/NV001
166516
O p e ra tio n
Checks beforestartup
4 .2 C h e c k s b e fo re s ta r t u p
DANGER
A Unauthorized use of a damaged machine!
► Do not use a machine that is damaged in any way.

► All defects and errors are to be reported to the relevant supervisor and to
Liebherr after sales service.

□ All maintenance and inspection work has been carried out according to specifi
cations.
□ The operating manual has been read and understood.
□ The operating manual is ready to hand in the cabin.
□ The current load chart manual needed to operate the machine is ready at hand
in the cabin.
4.2.1 W alk round
Before each start-up, an inspection of the machine must be carried out as follows:
- Check for any leaks (hydraulic, engine and gearbox oil, coolant, fuel).
- Check for any (deliberate) damage.
- Machine is not heavily soiled.
- All safety devices are in place.
- Check that all pins and screw fastenings are securely tightened.
- Check that ropes and pulleys do not show any sign of wear.
- There are no obstacles in the work range.
- Slewing column can turn without restriction.
- Check that all safety signs are present and legible.
- Free from snow and ice.
- Check that there is good visibility from the cab.
4.2.2 C h e c k in g the hydraulic oil tank gate valve
Fig. 230: Checking the hydraulic oil tanl< gate valve
1 Gate valve closed 2 Gate valve open
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Checks beforestartup
NOTICE
Inadmissible commissioning of machine with closed gate valve.
Damage to the hydraulic system,
► Only operate the machine when the gate valve is open.
► Check the hydraulic oil tank gate valve.
Fig. 231: Opening the gate valve
If the gate valve on the hydraulic oil tank is closed:

► Open the hydraulic oil tank shut-off valve.
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
start-up
4 .3 S ta rt-u p

□ Inspections have been carried out before commissioning.
□ No one other than the machine operator may be on the machine or in the
danger zone of the machine.
□ All emergency stops are unlocked.
4.3.1 S w itch in g on the m ain feed
► Set switch for main feed on switch cabinet X1to position “main feed on”.
If switch for main feed on switch cabinet X1 is set to position “main feed tripped”
► Set switch for main feed on switch cabinet X1to position “main feed reset”.
► Set switch for main feed on switch cabinet X1to position “main feed on”.
4.3.2 S w itch in g on the ignition
[□] ^ ► Set key switch crane on/off on control panel X20 to position “ignition on”
D> Indicator crane on is lit.
Fig. 234: Indicator crane on
4.3.3 Startin g en gine
41[gT1 ► Press button power management system on X20 control panel.

[> Indicator is lit if power supply on ship is available.
► Press button engine on on X20 control panel.

\> Indicator eng/'ne on is lit
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
start-up
4.3.4 M o v in g the h o ok out of vertical h o o k fixing point*
Fig. 237: Moving the hook out a f vertical hook fixing point
► Slowly lower hook out of hook fixing point.

► Lift boom into work range.
4.3.5 IVIoving the h o o k out o f horizontal h o ok fixing point*
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
start-up
► Set key switch Preselection hook fixing point on control panel hook fixing point
to position “Preselection hook fixing point on”.
► Raise boom until it reaches the upper luffing gear limit switch.
► Set key switch for Bypass parl<ed position on control panel X20 to position
“Bypass parked position on”.
> Indicator boom outside working range is lit.
► Lift boom into retract position hook fixing point.

► Slowly lower hook 10 m out of hook fixing point.
► Lower boom into work range.
to position “Preselection hook fixing point o ff’.
— hook p a rk in g
4.3.6 U n lo c k in g the s w in g lock*
► Raise hook until it reaches the upper hoisting gear limit switch.
► Set key switch Preselection swing lock on control panel swing lock to position
“Preselection swing lock on”.
Press and hold down Unlock parked position button on control panel swing lock.
> Indicator Unlock parked positionWghis up
“Swing lock o ff’.
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Lighting
4 .4 L ig h tin g
4.4.1 S w itch in g on the searchlight*
Fig. 245: Searchlight
1 Cab floodlight 2 Boom searchlight 6

o
► Press button searchlight on X20 control panel.
f> Searchlights are lit.
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Lighting
4.4.2 T urn in g on the cabin lighting
► Set switch for cabin lighting on control panel X20 to position “Cabin lighting on”.
0 ^1 ^ I [> Cabin lighting is lit.
4.4.3 Sw itch in g a c c e s s lightin g on
► Press button access lighting on X20 control panel,

or
Press button for access lighting at ladder.
t> Access lighting is lit.
4.4.4 Sw itch in g on helicopter w arn ing light*
► Set switch for helicopter warning light on switch cabinet X1 to position “Heli
copter warning light on”.
[> Helicopter warning light is lit.
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Airconditioning*
4 .5 A ir c o n d itio n in g '
W ARNING
A Leaks in air conditioning coolant circuit in an enclosed space!
Difficulty breathing up to apnoea.
If there is a high refrigerant concentration in the air:
► Immediately leave the closed room (cab).
4.5.1 O perating the air co n d itio n in g
► Set main switch to position “main switch on”

► Set desired temperature.
► Set desired blower stage.
Note
(D Optimum air conditioning effect.
► Close all doors and windows.
► Make sure all air outlets are clean.
6
o
copyright by
166516
_________ O p e ra tio n
Central lubricationsystem
4 .6 C e n tra l lu b r ic a tio n s y s te m
The swing ring bearing is lubricated automatically in accordance with the set lubri
cation and pause times.
The lubrication process is stated by turning on the engine.
NOTICE
Insufficient lubrication!
The swing ring bearings and/or swing ring tooth flanks may be damaged.
► Always remain within the lubrication and pause times set in the factory.
NOTICE
Incorrect adjustment of the positive pressure relief valve!
Damage to the central lubrication system.
► Retain manufacturer's settings on the positive pressure relief valve.
4.6.1 Setting the lubrication time
The range of adjustment for lubrication time is from 1 to 16 minutes. The factory
setting for lubrication time is 13 minutes.
Sdhimiørzøit (m in.) ► Set the Set lubrication time control to the desired lubrication time.
2.
1.
4.6.2 Setting the p a u se time
The range of adjustment for pause time is from 0.5 to 8 hours. The factory setting
for pause time is 4 hours.
pausenzeült (h) ► Set the Set pause time control to the desired pause time.
2
K 4
4.6.3 Interim lubrication
- - -A ► Press the Interim lubrication button
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n _________
Additional cabequipment
4 .7 A d d itio n a l c a b e q u ip m e n t
4.7.1 O perating the s ig n a l horn
Fig. 253: Operating the signal horn
1 Signal horn button
► Press the button signal horn on the left operating lever.

> Warning signal sounds.
copyright by
166516
____________ O p e ra tio n
Selectingtheoperationmode
4 .8 S e le c tin g th e o p e r a tio n m o d e
4.8.1 Se le ctin g crane operation
Crane operation is the standard operation mode of the machine. The machine is
automatically in crane operation if no special mode of operation is selected.
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Swing
4 .9 S w in g
W ARNING
A People or obstacles in the swing range!
Bodily injuries.
► Ensure that there are no people or obstacles in the swing range.
► Leave the danger area.
4.9.1 O perating the sw in g
Turn crane to the left
► Move left control lever to left.

> Crane turns left.
When the end limit switches are reached:
> Slewing gear stops.
> Indicator Lim it switch display on control panel X20 is lit:
i2
Fig. 255: Indicator lim it switch display
copyright by
118 UEBHERR SKCBW/NV001
166516
O p e ra tio n
Swing
T u rn in g the crane to the right
• Move left control lever to right.

> Crane turns right.
[> Slewing gear stops.
D> Indicator Lim it switch display on control panel X20 is lit:
i2
copyright by
SK CBW/NV001 UEBHERR 119
166516
O p e r a tio n
Hoistinggear
4 .1 0 H o is tin g g e a r
4.10.1 O perating h o istin g ge a r
Lift load
► Move right control lever backwards.

O Load lifts.
> Hoisting gear stops.
> Indicator Lim it switch display on control panel X20 is lit:
l2
6
o
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Hoistinggear
Low ering a load
• Move right control lever forwards.

I> Load lowers.
I> Hoisting gear stops.
I> Indicator Lim it switch display on control panel X20 is lit:
l2
å
o
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Luffinggear
4 .1 1 L u ffin g g e a r
Fig. 262: Boom positions
1 Retract position hook fixing point 4 Lower luffing gear limit switch
2 Upper luffing gear limit switch 5 Parked position 0°
3 Working range
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Luffinggear
4.11.1 Luffing ge a r operation
Lift boom
Move left-hand control lever backward.

O Boom starts to rise.
[> Luffing gear stops.
O Indicator Luffing gear lim it switch on control panel X20 is lit:
V
Fig. 264: Display luffing gear lim it switch
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Luffinggear
Low ering the boom
Move left-hand control lever forward.

(> Boom lowers.
> Luffing gear stops.
> Indicator Luffing gear lim it switch on control panel X20 is lit:
Fig. 266: Display luffing gear lim it switch
copyright by
166516
_________________________________________________________________________________ O p e ra tio n
Emergencydescent rescueequipment
4 .1 2 E m e rg e n c y d e s c e n t re s c u e e q u ip m e n t
4.12.1 U sin g the e m ergen cy d e sce n t rescue eq u ip m en t
CAUTION
A Improper handling of the emergency descent rescue equipment!
Risk of falling from the cabin.
► Observe operating manual emergency descent rescue equipment.

► Use emergency descent rescue equipment exclusively after thorough training.
► Regularly check emergency descent rescue equipment and docum ent the
results.
► Arrange for repairs to be carried out exclusively by the manufacturer.
1 2
Fig. 267: Emergency descent eyelet and storage
1 Emergency descent rescue 2 Emergency descent eyelet

equipment
► Take emergency descent rescue equipment from storage in cabin.
copyright by
166516
O p e r a tio n ___________________
Emergencydescentrescueequipment
Fig. 268: Emergency descent rescue equipment
1 Carabiner Emergency descent rescue

harness
2 Rope
► Latch carabiner in emergency descent eyelet.

► Push bottom front window outwards.
► Throw rope through bottom front window.
Fig. 269: Putting on emergency descent rescue equipment
► Stand over the emergency descent rescue equipment with legs apart.
å
o
copyright by
166516
___________________ O p e ra tio n
Emergencydescent rescueequipment
► Grasp the safety harness by the D-rings.

► Lift the safety harness until it is below the shoulders.
► Latch the D-rings into carabiner (of safety harness).
Fig. 271: Slipping the braces on
► Slip the braces on.
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n ___________________
Emergencydescentrescueequipment
Fig. 272: Descending with the emergency descent rescue equipment
► Climb through the bottom window while suspended in the emergency descent
rescue equipment.
► Hold on to the rope entering the emergency descent rescue equipment with left
hand,
► Operate the brake lever with the right hand.
► Release the brake cautiously.
Stopping or braking:
► Hold on to feed rope.
► Let go of brake.
copyright by
166516
Operation
Em ergency stop
4 .1 3 E m e rg e n c y s to p
4.13.1 O peration em ergen cy sto p
A DANGER
Machine under extreme stress under load during an emergency stop!
► T lie emergency stop is to be used as an emergency cut-off of the machine only.
► Press emergency stop.

> Engine cuts off.
D> Multi-disc brakes close. Machine brakes abruptly.
If an emergency stop is triggered while a load is being moved:
► Have multi-disc brakes checked by Liebherr customer service.
► Unlocking the activated emergency stop: Gently depress the emergency stop
and turn to the right.
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Decommissioning
4 .1 4 D e c o m m is s io n in g
W ARNING
A Unauthorised use of machine!
► When leaving the machine, protect against unauthorised use, damage by
vandalism and any possible adverse environmental impact.
When decommissioning differentiation between:

B rie f w o rk in te rru p tio n
• Waiting time or break
• The machine operator remains on site.
Long in te rru p tio n o f w o rk
• Overnight or several days
• The machine operator leaves the site.
4.14.1 Brief w ork interruption
D e c o m m iss io n in g prior to brief interruption of worl<

► Set dovi^n load.
► Set boom to parked position.
► Press button engine o ff on X20 control panel.
C o m m is s io n in g after brief interruption of worl(

► Press button power management system on X20 control panel.
> Indicator is lit if power supply on ship is available.
► Press button engine on on X20 control panel.

I> Indicator engine on is lit.
4.14.2 L o n g interruption o f w ork
L o c k in g the s w in g lock*
► Raise hook until it reaches the upper hoisting gear limit switch.
“Preselection swing lock on”.
Turn machine until lock position is reached.
> Indicator swing position parked position is lit.
copyright by
166516
O p e ra tio n
Decommissioning
Fig. 279: Indicator swing position parked position
[±1 ► Press and hold down Locl< parl<ed position button on control panel swing lock.
> Indicator is lit when swing is locked.
M o v in g the h o o k into vertical hook fixing point’'
Fig. 281: Moving the hoo/c into vertical hook fixing point
NOTICE
Improper lifting of hook into hook fixing point!
► In case of damage to hook fixing point, lash hook on floor.
► Consult authorised personnel for instructing.
► Execute crane movements smoothly and without jerking (avoid swinging the
load).
► Stop movement if the hook misses the lashing angles of the hook fixing point.
► Pull off key after parking.
► Lower boom until it reaches the lower luffing gear limit switch.
copyright by
166516
O p e r a tio n
Decommissioning
► Set key switch for Bypass parked position on control panel X20 to position
[> Indicator boom outside working range is lit.
► Lower boom in parked position 0°.
► Carefully lift hook into hook fixing point.
M o v in g the h o o k into horizontal h o o k fixing point*
Fig. 283: Moving the hook into horizontal hook fixing point
NOTICE
Improper lifting of hook into hook fixing point!
► In case of damage to hook fixing point, lash hook on floor.
► Consult authorised personnel for instructing.
► Execute crane movements smoothly and without jerking (avoid swinging the
load).
► Stop movement if the hook misses the lashing angles o f the hook fixing point.
► Pull off key after parking.
► Slowly lift hook 10 m below hook fixing point.

to position “Preselection hook fixing point on”.
6
o
► Set key switch for Bypass parked position on control panel X20 to position
> Indicator boom outside working range is lit.
copyright by
166516
______________________________________________________________________ O p e ra tio n
Decommissioning
► Lift boom into retract position hool< fixing point.
► Set key switch for Bypass hoisting gear on control panel hook garage to posi
tion “Bypass hoisting gear on”.
hook parkpQS.
► Carefully lift hook into hook fixing point.

► Lower boom until it reaches the lower luffing gear limit switch,
► Set key switch for Bypass parl<ed position on control panel X20 to position
“ Bypass parked position on”.
> Indicator boom outside worthing range is lit.
► Lower boom to parked position 0 °.
Sw itch in g the e n gin e off

► Press button engine o ff on X20 control panel.
Sw itch in g off the ignition

^ ^ ► Set key switch crane on/off on control panel X20 to position “ignition off’.
Sw itch in g off the m ain feed
► Switch off the air conditioning.

► Close all doors and windows.
NOTICE
Longer periods of machine standstill
► Keep standstill heating turned on.
å
o
► Prior to commissioning check lubrication and oil level.
► Operate machine at least once a week for one hour.
► Perform all maintenance work in accordance with maintenance table.
► Preserve machine if standstill period is longer than 3 months.
copyright by
166516
Operation
Emergencyoperation
4 .1 5 E m e rg e n c y o p e r a tio n
W A R N IN G
A U nauthorized or im proper use o f tiie em ergency operation!
► Do not use the em ergency operation unless an em ergency has arisen.
► Cordon off a large area around the danger zone.
► Em ploy a signalm an to direct the m ovem ents.
► Exercise the utm ost care w hen using the e m ergency operation.
Possible m ovem ents:

- Low ering the load
- R eleasing the slew ing gear brake
- Low ering the boom
- Locking and unlocking slew ing gear lock
Fig- 291: O v e r v i e w of e m e r g e n c y operation
1 V alves for slew ing gear D62 and 4 V a lves fo r luffing g ea r E62 and 1
D63 E69 5
2 C ouplings fo r slew ing g ea r locks 5 H and pum p o
3 V alves for hoisting gear H62, §
H63 and H63A
copyright by
134 LIEBHERR SKCBW/NV001

166516
Operation
Emergencyoperation
4 .1 5 .1 L o w e r in g th e lo a d
► C on ne ct hand pum p to connection o f valve H 6 2 and to the tank.
► Set valve H 6 3 to em ergency operation position.
► Set valve H 6 3 A to em ergency operation position.
► Set valve H 6 2 to em ergency operation position.
► Establish pressure with hand pump.

t> M ulti-disc brake H 6 1 U opens.
> Load is lowered as long as the hand pum p is operated.
O nce em ergency operation is com plete:
► S et valve H 6 2 to norm al position.
► S et valve H 6 3 A to norm al position.
► S et valve H 6 3 to norm al position.
4 .1 5 .2 T u r n in g th e s le w in g c o lu m n
► C onnect hand pum p to connection o f valve D 6 2 and to the tank.
► Set valve D 6 3 to em ergency operation position.
► Set valve D 6 2 to em ergency operation position.
► Establish pressure with hand pump.

\> Slew ing gear brake releases.
► Sw ivel crane with additional equipm ent (e.g. chain hoist).
Once em ergency operation is com plete:
► Set valve D 6 2 to norm al position.
► Set valve D 6 3 to norm al position.
4 .1 5 .3 L o w e r in g th e boom
► C onnect hand pum p to connection o f valve E 6 2 and to the tank.
► S et valve E 6 9 to em ergency operation position.
► S et valve E 6 2 to em ergency operation position.
► Establish pressure w ith hand pump.

(> Luffing cylinders retract.
(> Boom low ers as long as the hand pum p is operated.
O nce em ergency operation is com plete:
► Set valve E 6 9 to norm al position.
► Set valve E 6 2 to norm al position.

•S
I 4 .1 5 .4 L o c k in g and u n lo c k in g s le w in g g e a r lo c k
9
L o c k in g th e s w in g lo c k
► D isconnect coupling blue and red from the hydraulic system .
► C onnect coupling h a n d p u m p w ith coupling blue.
copyright by
SKCBW/NV001 LIEBHERR 135

166516
Operation
Emergencyoperation
► C onnect coupling t a n k m V n coupling red.

> Locking cylinder extends.
> Swing lock is locked.
► C onnect coupling blue and red w ith the hydraulic system .
U n lo c k in g th e s w in g lo c k
► D isconnect coupling blue and red from the hydraulic system.
► C onnect coupling h a n d p u m p w ith coupling red.
► C onnect coupling tank with coupling blue.

t> Locking cylind er retracts.
t> Swing lock unlocked.
► C onnect coupling blue and red w ith the hydraulic system .
copyright by

166516
O p e r a tio n a l fa u lts , d ia g n o s is 5
166516
5 O p e r a tio n a l fa u lts , d ia g n o s is
166516
5 O p e ra tio n a l fa u lts , d ia g n o s is
5 .1 L it r o n ic ® te s tin g s y s te m
5 .1 .1 O v e r v ie w
W A R N IN G
A M aking unauthorised alterations to the Litronic® testing system !
► C hanges to the setting and/or correction values m ay only be carried out by

Liebherr service personnel.
The Litronic® testing system is a com prehensive diagnosis and se rvice tool avail
able on the m onitor, a service notebook and also via a m odem connection (if avail
able). It is used to m onitor I/O, flags, internal system variables and statuses. The
Litronic® testing system can be accessed com pletely independently from several
interfaces a t the sam e tim e (e.g. m onitor, service notebook, GSM m odem , etc.).
The Litronic® testing system provides the follow ing functions:

- Displays the installed softw are ID and version num bers
- D isplays all m odule I/O w ith com m ents
- Displays the internal m em ory variables with com m ents
- D isplays a selection list
- Displays correction values (m achine param eters)
- D isplays m essages (m essage stack)
D isplays special functions:
• M odem configuration
• M em ory card control (CF)
• CAN configuration status
copyright by

166516
Operational faults, diagnosis
Litronic® testing system
Fig. 292: Litronic® testing s y s t e m overview
1 Header; Nam e o f the current Input line: For display and

screen correction o f entered values,
display o f status m essages and
input prom pts
Main w indow : D isplays inform a- Menu bar: Buttons
tion
The Litronic® testing system com prises a num ber o f screen pages; the buttons are
used to m ove from page to page. Som e pages have tw o m enu bars that you can
toggle between using the button M E N U 1/2. The first menu bar alw ays appears
w hen a page is opened. W hen the Litronic® testing system is first started, the
hom epage (Main M enu) is displayed. On each subsequent start, the page last
open w hen the system w as exited is loaded. The other settings are also retained.
C ertain com m ands can be executed several tim es in succession by entering the
num ber o f repetitions (these appear in the input line) or by pressing the required
button. This includes P R E V I O U S and N E X T for exam ple.
5 .1 .2 S c re e n pages
M a in s c r e e n page
The various screen pages o f the Litronic® testing system are linked from the main
screen menu. Leave the current page with the button B A C K .
The follow ing pages can be reached from the main screen page:
- IN P U T /O U T P U T page 6
- M EM O R Y page
§
- SE LE C T page
- C O R R EC TIO N page
- M ESS AG E S page
- SP EC IA L FU N C TIO N S page
ojpyright by

166516
IN P U T /O U T P U T p a g e
This page allow s all the m odule I/O to be viewed.
Description o f the buttons:

- N E X T C A N L/A/Emoves to the next CAN line.
- P R E V I O U S M O D U L E and N E X T M O D U L E changes betw een th e m odules en
the selected CAN line.
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove the C ursor up and down to highlight a channel in
the selected m odule. T he highlighted channel is displayed as an inverse I or O.
- Use S E L E C T to add the highlighted channel to the select list. If it is already
selected, it w ill be rem oved from the list. The nam e o f a channel w ill be
displayed inverse if it is selected.
- M E N U 1/2 sw itches betw een the tw o menu bars.
- D O C U M E N T d \ s p \ a y s 16 channels (inputs/outputs) w ith co m m en ts on a page.
In d i^ a l m odules (32 channels) use P R E V I O U S and N E X T to sw itch to the
second page.
- U N D O C U M displays all inputs and outputs on one page.
- I D E N T I F Y displays 16 inputs and outputs on one page w ith the identifier on one
page. In digital m odules (32 channels) use P R E V I O U S and N E X T to switch to
the second page.
- B A C K returns to the hom e page.
M E M O R Y page
This page is used to display the internal flags that are being used.

- N E X T S E C T I O N m oves between the 16 flag sections: X-B -W -D , 1-2-3-4.
- P R E V I O U S P A G E and N E X T P A G E m ove between the pages. Each page
contains 16 flags from the selected section.
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove betw een the flags. The highlighted flag is
displayed as an inverse M.
- Use S E L E C T to add the highlighted flag to the Select list. If it is already
selected, it w ill be rem oved from the list. The nam e o f a flag w ill be displayed
inverse if it is selected.
- D O C U M E N T displays the flags w ith com m ents.
- I D E N T I F Y displays the flags w ith the id e n tifie r
S E LE C T page
To avoid having to alw ays sw itch betw een the I/O and the flag m enus, values can
be added to the S elect list. T hese entries can then be view ed and e dited on the
SE LE C T page at the sam e tim e. The Select list can consist o f several pages. If a
new value is added to the S elect list w hen the list is already full, the old est value is
rem oved from the list. T hese S elect lists can also be backed up on th e m emory
card and reloaded again w hen necessary.
How to add entries to the S elect list:

- Using the button S E L E C T directly on the IN PU T/O U TPU T-, M E M O R Y - or
C O R R E C T IO N - page (grouping o f entries).
- Use the button A D D on the S E LE C T page by inputting the lE C address.
- Reading from a file using the button L O A D F R O M C A R D on the S E LE C T page.
How to delete entries from the S elect list:

- R eselecting a selected value using the button S E L E C T d irectly on the INPUT/
O U TPU T-, M E M O R Y - or C O R R E C T IO N - page.
copyright by

166516
- D eleting the highlighted entry using the button D E L E T E on the SE LE C T page
D escription o f the buttons;

- A D D adds a new entry to the S elect list. A menu bar is displayed in w hich the
lEC address is entered.
- D E L E T E rennoves the highlighted entry from the list.
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove betw een the different S elect entries. The high
lighted entry is displayed as an inverse I, O or M
- N E X T P A G E m oves to the next page o f the S elect list so th a t m ore values can
be viewed.
- I D E N T I F Y d isplays the inputs and o utputs or tags w ith the identifier.
- D O C U M E N T displays the inputs and outputs or tags w ith the com m ents.
- L O A D F R O M C A R D loads a new S elect list from a file A menu is then
displayed. The m enu contains a list o f files, one o f w hich can be selected, and
also allow s a specific file nam e to be entered .
- S A V E T O C A R D saves the current S elect list in a file. A menu appears from
w hich the nam e o f the file can be selected .
- M E N U 1/2 sw itches betw een the tw o m enu bars.
A d d S e le c tio n p a g e
This page is accessed from the S E LE C T page using the button A D D . This enables
the lEC address o f a new S elect entry to be entered. The ICE address is entered
w ith the corresponding buttons in the entry line.
Exam ple;
- D esired I EC address; % QW 1.17.1
- %, Q and W are entered using the appropriate buttons.
- 1.17.1 is entered as a norm al n um ber and can be edited as necessary using the
button T A K E & B A C K to apply the address.
D escription of the buttons;

- Use M, I or Q to select the lEC type flag, input or output. T hese change each
tim e a key is pressed and appear in the input bar. A correction can be m ade by
pressing another type.
- Use X, B, W and D to select the size o f the lEC entry. These change each tim e
a key is pressed and appear in the input bar. A correction is m ade by pressing
another size.
- T A K E & B A C K returns to the S E LE C T page and in doing so accepts the lEC
address from the input bar.
S e l e c t F i le L o a d p a g e
On this page a saved S elect list can be loaded from the m em ory card.
D escription o f the buttons;

- C H A R A C T E R N E X T adds a new ch aracte r to the end o f the input bar. New
characters can also be added by entering num bers and letters.
- C H A R A C T E R D O W N and C H A R A C T E R U P change the last character on the
input bar.
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove the cursor up and down the list. W hen a file is
selected, its nam e is copied to the input bar. This is the easiest w ay to select
the desired file.
- L O A D loads the file displayed in the input bar and returns to the SE LE C T page.
- B A C K abandons the operation and returns to the SE LE C T page.
S e l e c t F i le S a v e p a g e
On this page a saved S elect list can be saved to the m em ory card.
copyright by
142 L I E B H E R R SKCBW/N V001
166516

- C H A R A C T E R N E X T adds a new character to the end o f the inp ut b a r New
characters can also be added by entering num bers and letters.
- C H A R A C T E R D O W N and C H A R A C T E R U P change the last ch aracte r on the
input b a r
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove the cursor up and down the list. W h e n a file is
selected, its nam e is copied to the input b a r
- S A V E saves the select list in a file (enter file nam e in the input bar) and returns
to the S E LE C T page.
- B A C K abandons the operation and returns to the S E LE C T page.
C O R R E C T IO N page
This page is used to display the correction values.

- N E X T S E C T I O N m oves between the 4 correction value sections: X-B-W -D.
- P R E V I O U S P A G E and N E X T P A G E m ove between the pages. Each page
contains 16 correction values from the selected section.
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove between the correction values. T he highlighted
correction value is displayed as an inverse M.
- D O C U M E N T displays the correction values w ith com m ents.
- I D E N T I F Y displays the correction values with the identifier.
- B A S E M I N & M A X displays the correction values w ith the d efa u lt value and
upper and low er limits.
- S A V E T O C A R D saves the current correction values in a file. T h e file name can
be selected from the menu that now appears. A standard file nam e (created
from the current date) is suggested. This name can be changed if required .
- Use S E L E C T to add the highlighted entry to the Select list. If the entry is
already selected, it w ill be rem oved from the list. The nam e o f a correction value
will be displayed inverse if it is selected.
M E S S A G E S page
This page displays the saved application m essages (e.g. se nso r e rrors) and all
system errors (CAN bus, m odule, CPU, etc.). These application m essages are
buffered internally.

- A L L lists all saved m essages (max. 15,000).
- P R E V I O U S S T A R T and N E X T S T A R T m ove betw een all m essa ge s saved at
each start-up.
- P R I O R I T Y M A X F I L T E R and P R I O R I T Y M I N F I L T E R list the saved messages
filtered by priority.
- G R O U P F I L T E R lists the saved m essages filtered by certain groups.
- S I N C E S T A R T lists only the m essages since the current m achine start-up.
- L A N G U A G E e nables a d ifferent language to be loaded fo r the m essages.
M essages th a t are not found in the selected language are d isp laye d in English.
T his language change applies only to the M ESSAG ES page and not to the
Litronic® testing system.
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove between the messages.
- S A V E T O C A R D saves all m essages (ALL or SINC E S TA R T) in a file. The file
nam e can be selected from the menu that now appears. A sta nd ard file name
(created from the current date) is suggested. This nam e can be changed if
required .
- M E N U 1/2 sw itches betw een the two menu bars.
copyright by

166516
Language Selection page

The language in w hich the m essages are displayed is selected on this page.
D escription of the buttons;

- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove betw een the different languages.
- S E L E C T is used to select and load the highlighted language.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS page

V arious o the r pages are accessed from this page. It is also possible to return to the
hom e page by pressing the button B A C K .
The follow ing pages can be accessed from the SP EC IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
- M odem Function page
- Drive Function page
- Tim e Function page
- Priority Level page
- CAN C onfiguration page
- CAN Line Inform ation page
- Display C onfiguration page
- System Language Selection page
- Sam pling T race page
- System Status page
- M D E /P D E p a g e
- C lients page
Modem Function page

This page is used to configure and control the GSM modem.
The current m odem status (Online, Offline, False PIN etc.) m ay be view ed in the
input bar.
D escription of the buttons:

- D I A L dials a previously entered phone num ber.
- H/A/VGL/P term inates an active m odem connection (hang up handset).
- R L P O N / O F F sw itches the radio link protocol fo r GSM m odem connections on
or off. These settings becom e active the next tim e the m achine is sw itched on.
- V 3 2 A / 1 10 sw itches on the V32 or V 1 1 0 protocol fo r GSM m odem connections.
These settings becom e active the next tim e the m achine is sw itched on.
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T change betw een the interfaces; the defa ult M odem
C lient is COM2.
- P I N I N P U T allow s the PIN codes fo r the GSM m odem to be entered m anually.
- M O D E M C O N N E C T enables the m odem server program m e to be started on an
unused interface.
- B A C K returns to the SP E C IA L F U N C TIO N S page.
Drive Function page

This page displays inform ation about the current drive.
D escription o f the buttons:

- R E M O V E C A R D m ust be perform ed before rem oving a m em ory card from the
drive. Sw itching o ff the Litronic control system is another option. The system
autom atically recognises w hen a new card has been inserted.
copyright by

166516
- D I R L I S T displays the files and directories (but no sub-directories) on the

current drive.
- P R E V I O U S D R I V E and N E X T D R I V E switch between the individual drives
known to the Litronic control system .
- C H E C K C A R D checks the current drive for errors.
- B A C K returns to the SP E C IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
Time Function page

Date and tim e are displayed on this screen page.

- D A Y L I G H T S A V I N G sw itches to the sum m er tim e setting.
- T I M E Z O N E M O V E W E S T m oves the tim e zone setting one hour westwards.
- B A C K retum s to the SP E C IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
Priority Level page (for Liebherr service personnel only)

The Litronic® code, w hich provides access to the supervisor level, is entered on
this page. The supervisor level is necessary to change the time, fo r exam ple.

- W hen the L E V E L C H A N G E key is pressed, the value in the inp ut bar is copied
and exam ined to see w he th er it is a valid Litronic® code.
- B A C K retum s to the SP E C IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
CAN Configuration page

All the CAN m odules that are inserted, together with th eir usage status, are
displayed on this page

- N E X T P A G E m oves to the next page.
- B A C K returns to the SP E C IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
CAN Line Information page

This page displays the CAN lines being used and th eir settings.

- M O D U L E I N F O sw itches to the CAN C onfiguration page.
- B A C K returns to the SP E C IA L FU NC TIO N S page.
Display Configuration page

This page allow s param eters to be set fo r displaying the IN P U T /O U T P U T page.

- A L L M O D U L E S displays all CAN m odules ("used” and “ not u sed ”) on the
IN P U T /O U T P U T page.
- O N L Y U S E D M O D U L E S displays only those CAN m odules w hich are currently
I set as “used” on the IN P U T /O U T P U T page.
5 - N U M B E R S T Y L E sw itches the inputs, outputs and flags betw een standard and
hexadecim al display.
g - U P D A T E I N T E R V A L changes the update rate o f the input, o u tp u t and flag
displays.
- B A C K retum s to the SP EC IA L FU NC TIO N S page.
copyright by

166516
System Language Selection page

On this page the system language can be changed by selecting a language or
loading the internal standard language.
The selected system language is only activated once the Litronic control system is
sw itched back on.

- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove betviêen the different languages.
- S E L E C T loads the highlighted language as the new system language and
returns to the S P E C IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
- U S E D E F A U L T loads English as the new system language and returns to the
SP EC IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
- B A C K abandons the operation and returns to the SP EC IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
Sampling Trace page

The Sam pling T race page is used for online tracing o f data from previously
selected inputs/outputs. It displays “S am pling T ra ce ” inform ation and allow s its
status to be m odified, and also allow s the recorded data to be saved.

- S A M P L E A C T I V E a ctivates the “Sam pling T ra ce ” fu nctionality once the options
have been defined. T his enables recording and the trigg er conditions are
checked.
- T R I G G E R M A N U A L sim ulates the trig g e r conditions. T hese buttons are only
available if “Sam pling T ra ce ” is active and the trigg er conditions are not yet
satisfied.
- E N D M A N U A L ends recording o f the “S am pling T race” and changes a uto m a ti
cally to "R eady" status. This button is only available if “Sam pling T race” is
active.
- L O A D F R O M C A R D loads a configuration from a saved “S am pling T race” file. A
menu appears from w hich the nam e o f the file can be selected .
- S A V E T O C A R D saves the recorded data and the “S am pling T race” configura
tion in a file. A m enu appears from w hich the nam e o f the file can be selected .
- S A V E T O S E L E C T saves the variables used in the “S am pling T race” in the
Select list. Existing entries in the S elect list are deleted.
- L O A D F R O M S E L E C T loads the currently selected variables into the “S am pling
T ra ce ” list.
- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove betw een the configuration data. The highlighted
(active) entry is displayed inverse.
- C H A N G E is used to change the highlighted entry to the value in the input bar.
This only happens, however, if the value is w ithin the perm itted limits.
- B A C K returns to the SP EC IA L F U N C TIO N S page.
System Status page

This page displays the current system status (running, stopped, etc.) and the
tim ing o f the PLC tasks (P rogram m able Logic C ontroller).

- S Y S T E M T A S K S displays inform ation a bo ut the system tasks.
- B O A R D I N F O displays inform ation about the main board (voltage, tem perature,
etc.).
- B A C K returns to the SP EC IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
copyright by

166516
MDE/PDE page
T his page show s the status o f the M DE (M achine Data A cquisition), the PDE
(P rocess Data A cquisition) and the data logger.

- M D E d isplays the MDE data.
- P D E displays the PDE data.
- S E L E C T G R A P H I C lists the saved graphics (e.g. com pany logo) fo r printing the
PDE data. The desired graphic can be selected.
- L O G G E R displays the data logger data.
- B A C K returns to the SP E C IA L FU NC TIO N S page.
Clients page
T his page show s the status o f the individual com m unication interfaces (clients).

- P R E V I O U S and N E X T m ove betw een the interfaces.
- B A C K returns to the SP EC IA L FU N C TIO N S page.
å
o
copyright by

166516
6
o
copyright by

166516
M a in te n a n c e 6
166516
M a in te n a n c e
166516
6 M a in te n a n c e
The follow ing pages describe all m aintenance and inspection work.
6 .1 M a in te n a n c e a n d in s p e c t io n s c h e d u le
N O TIC E
M aintenance and inspection intervals are exceeded!
Dam age to m achine.
► Do not exceed the prescribed m aintenance and inspection intervals.
T his ch ap ter contains tables listing all the m aintenance w ork th a t has to be carried
out on the m achine.
O nly the w ork that the m achine operator is allowed to perform (after 8 and 40 oper
ating hours respectively) is explained.
The m aintenance and inspection intervals are specified as operating hours and
calendar period; w hich eve r com es first is applicable. These intervals are comple
m entary. This m eans th a t w hen the m aintenance intervals w ith a h ig he r hour/
calendar day count becom e due, the w ork designated for the low e r hour/calendar
day counts should be carried out as well.
The m aintenance w ork m ust be carried out conscientiously. The m aintenance

intervals m ust not be exceeded, but can be shortened if necessary. Shortening of
intervals largely depends on the operating conditions.
The m aintenance intervals should be shortened if:

- there are considerable tem perature differences on the site.
- W ork is norm ally carried out at high tem peratures.
- W ork is carried out in a corrosive environm ent (e.g. chem ical plant).
- W ork is carried out w here the air is polluted and dusty.
- heavy loads are often lifted.
M a in te n a n c e p e rs o n n e l
W ell-trained personnel with the appropriate qualifications, sp ecialist knowledge and

experience, w ho are needed to carry out m aintenance work.
A u th o riz e d s e rv ic e p e rs o n n e l
Specially trained personnel with com prehensive and in-depth know ledge o f com po
nents and system s and w ho have been authorized by Liebherr to ca rry out this
work. T hese are prim arily Liebherr service personnel w ho have been trained and
authorized by the m anufacturer itself o r one of its service agents.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Maintenance and inspection schedule
Customer:..............................Machine type:................Serial no.:......................Service hours:............... Date:.
M a in te n a n c e / in s p e c tio n T a s k s to be p e rfo rm e d
a ft e r s e r v i c e h o u rs
>% >» (A 2 i2 M 0)
ni
—
TO en ra (0 B y m a in te n a n c e s ta ff B y a u th o ris e d s p e c ia lis t s ta ff O)
0)
•c C 3 £ TO
9 CO
o C ■ O nce-only activity □ O nce-only activity Q.
3 E c (N ro c
CO
5 .C • R epeat interval O R epeat interval 0
o
X
Ü) o o TO 0
£
o o O - f As necessary ^ As necessary CO
o 8 8 o <U
in O <o Q.
s W A n nually before the w inte r
!c
o
o
o
W h o le m a c h in e
• C hecking all control equipm ent and display devices

• C hecking em ergency stop for function w itho ut load on the hook and engine
turned off
• V isual inspection of the entire crane structure (brakes, ladder, platform )
• C hecking entire crane fo r lose parts, rust, corrosion and fissures
• Perform ing all m ovem ents and check lim it sw itch fo r function
• Perform ing disc brake test (if man riding is installed)
• C hecking the operation o f the boom angle indicator for function (if installed)
V isual inspection o f the entire crane after severe incidents (e.g. storm , over
load, e m ergency stop w ith load, ...)
o C hecking the rated load display
• V isual inspection o f the paint fo r m echanical dam age or corrosion
• C hecking the rubber stoppers on the entire crane
• C hecking the condition and screw connection o f ballast and A -fram e (if
installed)
• C hecking the condition and suspension o f the blow -back polyam ide slabs (if
installed)
o C he ck tightening torque and corrosion o f the pins o f the boom flange connec
tion. R e-lubricate if required
O Exchange pins o f the boom flange connection every 10 years (if installed)
• V isual inspection of the boom pivot bearing
• C hecking the m echanical conditions and im perm eability o f all lubrication spots
and lubrication pipes
• R e-lubricate all lubrication spots every 250h
E le c tric m o to r
• C hecking the electric m otor fo r function in dependence on air hum idity and
w e a th e r conditions
o Perform ing insulation m easurem ent
• Keeping the m otor and ventilation slots clean
• C he ck the state o f the shaft seal. R eplace if required 6
• C he ck the condition o f the switch stack o f the star-delta contactor. R eplace if O
required
W hen replacing the electric motor, replace sw itch stack o f the star-delta
co nta cto r
• C hecking the state o f the fixing screw s
• C hecking the state o f the ball bearings
copyright by
152 LIEBHERR SKGBW/NV001

166516
Maintenance
Customer:..............................Machine type:................ Serial no.:......................Service hours:. .Date:.
Maintenance / inspection T a s k s to be p e rfo rm e d

after service hours
>*
ID 0) — £(/) £2
CQ CO CO B y m a in te n a n c e s ta ff B y a u th o ris e d s p e c ia lis t s ta ff 0)
en
I c 3 0) 0)
Q (D o C >> >^ B£ ■ O nce-only activity □ O nce-only activity a
.c
00 3 E c c
9 X £ £ • R epeat interval O R epeat interval 0)
o ui 0)
O 8 51
■f A s necessary ^ As necessary w
o ä
g <
D to
> rvj w ^ Annually before the w inte r
LU
§
o
4 G reasing the ball bearings (see lubrication inform ation plate, point 5 on the 180
e lectric m otor
D is trib u to r g e a rb o x
• C hecking the gearbox oil level 182
• Bring system to w orking tem perature, take gearbox oil sam ple. If required,
change gear oil
• C hecking the vent
• V isual inspection o f the fixing pins
S w in g
• C hecking the gearbox oil level 185
• C hecking the vent screw
• Bring system to w orking tem perature, take gearbox oil sam ple. If required,
change gear oil
o C heck gearbox fo r leaks
• C hecking fixing pins fo r tig ht fit
• C hecking sw ing pinion and crown gear fo r w ea r and pitting
o C hecking that the stopping brakes are w orking
S w in g c o n n e c tio n
o C heck the tightening torque o f the screw connection pins. If m ore than 10% o f
the screw connection pins are below the required tightening torque, rea dju st all
screw connection pins
• C heck toothing fo r sufficient lubrication. R e-lubricate if required 187
> Lubricating the toothing prior to longer periods o f standstill 187
• Taking a grease sam ple from the slew ing bearing
• C heck slew ing bearings every 250h fo r sufficient lubrication. R e-lubricate if 187
required
Lubricate slew ing bearings prior to longer periods o f standstill. 187
-f Perform ing a basic m easurem ent o f the pitch play after takeover 188
• C hecking the slew ing bearing pitch play 188
O R eplace the slew ing bearing every 10 years
S w in g lo c k
• C hecking the condition o f construction, locking pin and bushes
• C heck lubrication. R e-lubricate if required
W in c h e s
• C hecking the gearbox oil level
■¥ Take an oil sam ple once after lOOh. If required, change oil
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Customer:..............................Machine type:................Serial no.:......................Service hours:............... Date:.
M a in t e n a n c e / in s p e c tio n T a s k s to be p e rfo rm e d
a f t e r s e r v i c e h ou rs
>s (0 52 (A (/) (U
(5 1Ö m ra (0 B y m a in te n a n c e s ta ff B y a u th o ris e d s p e c ia lis t s ta ff en
c 3 0) a> £ ro
Q m C >> >» ■ O nce-only activity □ O nce-only activity Q.
OO
i 3 C CO c (U
q X $ • R epeat interval O R epeat interval (U
o £ w o 'S
o o o § - f A s necessary ^ As necessary CO
o o o o o
0)
in 0) o ID a.
> CNJ W sis A nnually before the w inter
8
O
• Bring system to w orking tem perature, take oil sam ple. If required, change oil
• C he ck the state of the counter bearings. R e-lubricate if required
• C hecking the vent
• C hecking the suspension o f lim it sw itch and coupling
• C hecking the function o f the lim it sw itch (if possible)
• C hecking the pins/screw connections o f the w inch to the main crane structure
o C hecking that the stopping brakes are w orking
• C hecking the condition and w ea r o f the outer disc brakes for man riding (if
installed)
• C hecking the condition and w ea r o f the rope kicker
E xchanging the rope kicker in case o f excess w ea r
• C hecking the overall m echanical condition o f the w inch like drum grooves,
flanged w heels, diagonal pipe connections, pinions, etc.
• C hecking the correct w inding o f the rope on the w inch drum
• C hecking the correct installation o f the rope on the rope fixing point and at the
fixing point itself
• C hecking the condition and suspension o f the press cylinders
• C hecking the condition and suspension o f the overspool safety device
L iftin g d e v ic e
• C hecking hooks for corrosion, w ea r and dam age

• R e-lubricating pulley bearings and hook bearings
• C hecking function o f slew ing bearing
• C hecking hook aperture safety for function and corrosion
• C he ck grabs fo r corrosion, w ea r and dam age. R e-lubricate if required
• C hecking the state o f the shackles
• S ig ht inspection of the NEM AG quick-release links (with grabber operation)
• S ig ht inspection o f the NEM AG quick-release links (with hook operation)
• MPI test o f the NEM AG quick-release links (with grabber operation)
• MPI test o f the NEM AG quick-release links (with hook operation)
• C he ck spreaders for corrosion, w e a r and dam age. R e-lubricate if required
• C hecking all cables, distribution boxes and lights fo r condition, w ea r and
dam age
• C he ck the condition, w ear and a ttachm ent o f the cable drum. R e-lubricate and
refill if required
• C hecking the condition, w ea r and a ttachm ent o f the hook fixing point
• C hecking the function o f tandem and anti-collision operation
copyright by
154 LIEBHERR SKGBW/NV001

166516
Maintenance
Customer:..............................Machine type:................Serial no.:......................Service hours:. .Date:.
M a in t e n a n c e / in s p e c tio n T a s k s to be p e rfo rm e d
a ft e r s e r v i c e h o u r s
>s (A (0 i5 (U
ni ■C £ Td (0 CD B y m a in te n a n c e s ta ff B y a u th o ris e d s p e c ia lis t s ta ff D)
0> C 3 £ n
Q (0 c ■ O nce-only activity □ O nce-only activity Q.
.c
00 3 c C ! £2 _c
-C £ • R epeat interval O R epeat interval
o o X
£
o o o o 7Ö
o 5
- f As necessary A A s necessary
o o §
lO 8 (D a
(N w ^ A n nually before the w inter
o
8
H y d ra u lic s y s te m
• Visual inspection fo r leak proofness and condition o f hoses, fittings, valves, 195
fram es, m otors, pum ps and cylinders.
O C heck the pressure settings. A d just if required
• C heck the oil cooler fo r contam ination. Clean if required
o V isual inspection fo r tooth profile w ea rs o f hydraulic m otors and pum ps
O C hecking the function o f the supply pressure switch (if installed)
• C hecking the conditions and seal o f all hydraulic drives and bulkhead plates
H y d ra u lic o il ta n k
• C hecking the hydraulic oil level. 196
• R eplacing the ve nt o f the hydraulic oil tank
• Bring system to w orking tem perature, take oil sam ple 10h after each h ydraulic 197
oil change (reference m easurem ent)
-f Bring system to w orking tem perature, take oil sam ple after 500h 197
• Bring system to w orking tem perature, take oil sam ple every 1000h/annually 197
197
• If no Liebherr hydraulic oil is used, change hydraulic oil every 2000h/every 2 197
years 197
• if Liebherr H ydraulic 37 is used, change hydraulic oil every 4000h/every 4 197
years
• If Liebherr H ydraulic Plus or Liebherr H ydraulic Plus A rctic is used, change 197
hydraulic oil every 6000h/every 6 years
• C leaning the m agnetic rod and return filte r 200
• C leaning the m agnetic rod and return filte r (weekly during the first 250h) 200
H y d ra u lic filte r
• Exchanging the filte r elem ents o f all hydraulic filters
o
A c c u m u la to r
■ C hecking the accum ulator 208
• C hecking the accum ulator 208
o C hanging the accum ulator 208
H y d ra u lic h o s e s
• V isual inspection o f rigid hoses 210
• Every 10000h/6 years - replace all o ute r hoses 210
E le c tric a l s y s te m
• C hecking the condition and insulation o f all electronic transm itters
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Customer:.............................. Machine type:. ..Serial no.:. ..Service hours:...............Date:.
M a in te n a n c e / in s p e c t io n Tasi<s to be p e rfo rm e d
a fte r s e r v i c e h o u r s
in
>% >v .c CO (/) (D
c m (0 CO (Q B y m a in te n a n c e s ta ff B y a u th o ris e d s p e c ia lis t s ta ff O)
Q 3
(0 oE c
c C! £2 Bc
■ O nce-only activity □ O nce-only activity a
00 3 a>
o X £ o • R epeat interval O R epeat interval 0
O £ '(A 1 æ
o CO
O
o o 8 Ü ■ ¥■As necessary A s necessary
m Si o to a
(N w 0 A n nually before the w inte r
g
• R eplacing sw itching cabinet filte r m ats 211

• C hecking term inals and vents o f the sw itching cabinet 212
o C hecking all term inals in the sw itching cabinet 212

• C hecking the m echanic and e lectric condition o f the distributor boxes
• C hecking all threaded cable connections fo r co rrect installation
• C hecking the correct installation and function o f the instrum ents (e.g. cables,
sensors)
• Visual inspection o f all instrum ents fo r corrosion and dam age
• C hecking the function o f lighting and heating (also that o f the e lectric m otor
and slip ring)
• Clean the battery term inal (if installed). Lubricate if required
• C heck the w a te r fill level o f the battery (if installed). If necessary, refill distilled
w ater
• C hecking the equipotential bonding connection between m oving com ponents
(e.g. boom slewing colum n)
C hecking the condition and starting pow er o f the m ain switch, the m ain fuses
(current, star, delta) and the term inal board (with electric motor)
• C hecking the electric equipm ent in line w ith the (local) regulations o r location-
specific standards
S lip rin g u n it
• C hecking the screw connections and brushes o f the slip rings

• C hecking the tight fight o f the screw s on the term inals at random
• C hecking the w ear o f the carbon brush every 150h or at latest every 6 m onths
• C hecking the tight fight o f the screw connections on the copper co nd ucto r rail
at random
• R em oving m etal particles on the insulation betw een the slip rings
• C hecking free m ovem ent o f the cable loop (if installed)
• C hecking cable loop for dam age (if installed)
E m e rg e n c y d e s c e n t re s c u e e q u ip m e n t
o C hecking safety rope fo r cuts o r fibre breaks 217
o C hecking safety rope fo r chem ical or m echanical dam age 217
o C hecking safety rope fo r thickening, kinks, knots or loops 217
o C hecking safety rope fo r rotting, excessive w ear, abrasion or scorching 217
o C hecking end term ination (knot and seam ) o f safety rope for com pletion 217
o C heck shrink hose fastening o f rope end term ination. 217
o C hecking carabiners/safety hooks fo r m echanical dam age, corrosion dam age 217
and deform ation
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Customer:.............................. Machine type:................Serial no,:......................Service hours:. •Date:,
M a in t e n a n c e / in s p e c t io n T a s k s to be p e rfo rm e d
a ft e r s e r v i c e h o u rs
>. (A £2 <n 0)
re *C £
1Ö re re n B y m a in te n a n c e s ta ff B y a u th o ris e d s p e c ia lis t s ta ff O)
I
C
O
3 <D
>v
0
>v £ 03
9 OJ c ■ O nce-only activity □ O nce-only activity Q.
£
00 3 E c CO c
g X § :c • R epeat interval O R epeat interval 0
V) £ o 15 (U
§ o o §
■f A s necessary As necessary CO
8 o o o Ü
(U
in o (D Q.
g
UJ
CM
CO 0 A nnually before the w inter
o
o
o
o C hecking closure m echanism o f carabiners/safety hooks 217

o C hecking condition o f springs/rivets/axles 217
o C hecking that snap action o f carabiners/safety hooks w orks sm oothly 217
o C hecking ease o f m ovem ent o f abseil rescue equipm ent cam 217
o C hecking abseil rescue equipm ent fo r m echanical dam age and corrosion 217
dam age
o C hecking brake cam (alum inium ) o f abseil rescue equipm ent for w ear 217
o C hecking brake cylinder (brass) o f abseil rescue equipm ent fo r w ear 217
o C hecking legibility o f type plate 217
L u b ric a tio n s y s te m
• C hecking the function o f the central lubrication 218
• C hecking fill level o f lubrication pum ps 218
R opes
• C hecking ropes fo r condition, lubrication and w inding behaviour, re-lubricate if
necessary
- f E xchanging rope kicker on the w inch w hen the rope is exchanged (only w ith
C BB 2980 - C BB 4700)
E xchanging rope kicker on the w inch if w inding is not correct (only w ith C BB
2980 - CBB 4700)
• C hecking the state o f the rope end connection
- f Shortening o f rope by 1/3 o f the w inch circum ference to com pensate rope w e a r
(with m ulti-layer spooling)
R ope p u lle y s
• C hecking pulleys fo r ease o f m ovem ent, signs o f w ear and dam age
• C he ck condition and lubrication o f the pulley bearings. R e-lubricate if required
• R enew ing plastic pulleys every 8 years
C ab
E xchanging the w indshield w ipers 240

• C hecking the function o f all operating elem ents
A ir c o n d itio n in g *
• M aintenance o f a ir conditioning according to m anufacturer's specifications 244
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Lubricants and consumables
6 .2 L u b r ic a n ts a n d c o n s u m a b le s
O beying the guidelines fo r lubrication and the use o f fuels g uarantees m axim um
reliability and a long m achine life.
C leanliness is absolutely essential w hen using lubricants and fuels.
N ote
(D Environm ental pollution!
► Fluids such as hydraulic oil, fuel and coolant m ust be disposed o f in accordance
w ith national and international regulations and guidelines.
Lubricants have 3 essential functions;

- Reducing friction
- Preventing corrosion
- Rem oving d irt and abrasion particles
Furtherm ore note that the higher the quality o f the lubricant, the lon ge r the service
life o f the com ponents or the low er the am ount o f wear. H igh-quality lubricants also
have a low er m oisture content, w hich m eans they last longer.
The specified lubrication intervals m ust not be exceeded, but can be shortened if
necessary. Shortening o f intervals largely depends on the operating conditions.
N OTICE
Insufficient lubrication!
Dam age to machine.
► The prescribed lubrication intervals on the lubrication diagram m ust be

observed.
I
5
copyright by
158 LIEBHÉRR SKCBW/NV001

166516
Maintenance
6 .2 .1 L u b r ic a tio n d ia g r a m
Fig. 293: Lubrication diagr a m
1 Pulleys and thrust bearings 4 Sw ing lock Slew bearing g ea r rinn

2 Rope 5 Swing
3 H oist winch counter bearing 6 Slew ing bearing
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
6 .2 .2 O il f i l l in g s c h e d u le
Fig. 294: Oil filling schedule
1 Swing gear (3x) 3 H oist winch gearbox

2 H ydraulic oil tank
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
6 .2 .3 F illin g c a p a c it ie s ta b le
6 .2 .4 L u b r ic a tio n c h a rt
N o. L u b ric a tio n O u ts id e te m p e ra tu re Type S p e c ific a tio n L ie b h e rr

p o in ts
ISO V G /S A E L u b ric a n ts
throughout the year SAE 10W -40 A C E A E4 L ie b h e rr M o to ro il1 0 W -4 0
to -20 °C API CF
below -20 °C with

preheating
throughout the year SAE 10W -40 A C E A E4/E6/E7 L ie b h e rr M o to ro il 10W -40

lo w a sh required when
E n g in e , o il b a tli to -20 °C API C F-4 / CG-4
1. using a so ot particle filter
a ir filte r
below -20 °C with CH-4 / CI-4
preheating
throughout the year SAE 5W -30 A C E A E4 L ie b h e rr M o to ro il 5W -30
to -30 °C A P IC F
below -30 °C with

preheating
M e c h a n ic a l to -20 °C SAE 85W -90 API GL5 L ie b h e rr H y p o id EP 90

2. g e a rs , w in c h e s to -40 °C SAE 75W -90 API G L 4 ; GL 5; L ie b h e rr S y n to g e a r P lus
a nd d riv e a x le s M T1 75W -90
to -25 °C + 50 °C ISO V G 32 - DIN 51 524 / T3 L ie b h e rr H y d ra u lic 37

46
SAE 10W -20 HVLP
A TF A) 1.D E X R 0 N II DIE
to -25 °C + 50 °C ISO V G 46 DIN 51 5 2 4 /T 3 L ie b h e rr H y d ra u lic P lu s

(32-68)
H y d ro s ta tic
SAE 10W -20 HVLPD HC
d riv e u n it,
3.
h y d ra u lic biodegradable in
s te e rin g accordance with
C EC -L-33-A-93
to -50 °C + 30 °C ISO V G 15-46 DIN 51 524 / T3 L ie b h e rr H y d ra u lic P lu s

A r c tic
SAE OW-20 HVLPD HC
biodegradable in
accordance with
C EC -L-33-A -93
H yd r. a d d itiv e DIN 51,757 L ie b h e rr s p e c ia l a d d itiv e

4. fo r fre e -fa ll NL
DIN 51,562
b ra ke
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
. -i; - ■ Vr- i
L u b ric a tio n O u ts id e ié m p e ra tu re "| Type ; S p e c ific a tio n a ■ .|i,^ iie b h e rr"'' ■; ' v
■!,. “V"'
m i
,';i' ■■■ ' \ ^
ISO V G /S Ä É L u b ric a n ts
r ■-'‘.la. •■'«. ■■ -v'i ; vC ■'hi, "K.;'"
R o lle r b e a rin g , t o -25 °C + 150 °C DIN 51 502 L ie b h e rr u n iv e rs a l
fr ic tio n b e a rin g , g re a s e 9900
For lubrication system KR 2 K-30
b a ll/ro lle r- Lubricating
b e a rin g s w in g to -20 °C + 150 °C grease, KPF 2 N-25
5.
rin g s , ca rd a n to -60 °C + 140 °C lithium saponi DIN 51 502 L ie b h e rr u n iv e rs a l
p iv o ts , o th e r fied g re a s e A r c tic
g re a se lu b ric a For lubrication system KPFHC IN -6 0
tio n t o -55 ° C + 140 °C
to -25 X + 150 °C DIN 51 502 L ie b h e rr u n iv e rs a l

g re a s e 9900
F or lubrication system 0G PF2
t o -20 ° C + 150 °C
O p en g e a r Lubrication
6. w h e e ls a nd to -60 °C + 140 °C and preserva OGPF 1 L ie b h e rr u n iv e rs a l
c ro w n g e a rs tion g re a s e A r c tic
For lubrication system
to -55 °C + 140 °C
All areas O G PF 00 L ie b h e rr p a s te s p ra y
7. R opes to -40 °C + 50 °C L ie b h e rr W R -L u b e SC
All areas DIN 51 502 L ie b h e rr g re a s e fo r te le

T e le s c o p ic Special regu
8. s c o p ic c o m p o n e n ts 9613
boom lation KP 2 K-30
P lu s
to -37 X DIN 51,757/4 L ie b h e rr A n tifre e z e M ix

9. C o o la n t
DIN 51 432/2
S c re e n w a sh to -80 °C R ala K lir r

10.
flu id
Tab. 12: Lubrication chart
A) If Liebherr oil is not being used, ATF oil is com pulsory fo r m ulti-disc brakes.
B) W h e n the oil preheater is activated, the outside tem perature m ay be about 10 °C lower.
N ote
(D The specifications indicated in the Liebherr lubricant table represent a qualitative
m inim um standard fo r oils and greases.
Liebherr lubricants have been developed and tested to suit our products and their
applications to the highest level. There is no g uarantee th a t third-party lubricants
w ill correspond to the quality and perform ance o f original Liebherr lubricants and
greases.
If the custom er uses oils and greases by o the r m anufacturers, this m anufacturer or
this supplier m ust confirm the com pliance w ith the required specifications to the
custom er. Due to the large num ber o f lubricants and m anufacturers, Liebherr I
cannot perform this check. 6
W arranty claim s are still valid if the custom er uses lubricants by another m anufac
turer o f equal or higher quality that m eet the specificatio ns o f the Liebherr lubricant
table.
► For any questions o f Liebherr lubricants contact the Liebherr-Lubricant-H otline

(+49 (0) 7354/80-6060 respectively lubrica nts@ lieb he rr.co m ).
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
O r d e r in g d a ta
Engine oil
51 c a n is te r 20 1 c a n is te r 210 1 d ru m 1000 1 c o n ta in e r
L iebherr M otoroil 10W -40 10 29 05 06 10 33 02 39 10 33 02 46 10 28 62 79
L iebherr M otoroil 10W -40 low ash 10 32 61 13 10 32 61 12 1 0 3 2 61 I I 10 32 61 10
L iebherr M otoroil 5W -30 10 42 57 12 10 42 57 13 10 42 57 15 10 42 57 19
Tab. 13: E n gi n e oil ordering data
Gear oil
5 1 c a n is te r 20 1 c a n is te r 210 1 d ru m 1000 I c o n ta in e r
L iebherr Hypoid 90 EP 10 66 48 74 10 66 48 75 10 66 48 76 10 44 16 36
L iebherr S yntogear Plus 75W -90 10 33 02 85 10 33 02 87 10 33 02 88 10 29 64 77
Tab. 14: G e a r b o x oil ordering data
Hydraulic oil
5 1 c a n is te r 20 1 c a n is te r 210 1 d ru m 1000 1 c o n ta in e r
L iebherr H ydraulic 37 10 66 48 65 10 66 48 67 10 66 47 12 10 66 4 8 56
L iebherr H ydraulic Plus 10 29 64 80 10 33 02 72 10 33 02 76 10 29 6 4 81
L iebherr H ydraulic Plus A rctic 10 29 64 79 10 33 02 77 10 33 02 78 10 29 6 4 78
Tab. 15: Hydraulic oil ordering data
Oil concentrate
5 1 c a n is te r 20 1 c a n is te r 210 1 d ru m 1000 1 c o n ta in e r
Liebherr special additive NL 10 51 53 00 10 51 57 52
Tab. 16: Oil concentrate ordering data
Grease
400 g c a rtrid g e 5 leg tu b 10 leg tu b 25 k g tu b
Liebherr universal grease 9900 10 29 68 16 10 29 68 13 10 29 68 12
Liebherr universal grease A rctic 10 29 68 28 10 29 68 25 10 29 68 24
Liebherr paste spray 10 33 03 08

10 33 03 I I
(950 g)
Liebherr grease fo r telescopic

86 13 036 08
com ponents 9613 Plus
Liebherr W R -Lube SC 10 17 33 71 (600 ml) aerosol can
Tab. 17: G r e a s e ordering data
copyright by
SKCBW/NV001 UEBHERR 163

166516
Maintenance
Coolant
1 51 c a n is te r 2 0 I c a n is te r
■■■ -D- . '. ■ '
210 r d ru m ' 1000 1 c o n ta in e r
Liebherr A n tifre e ze Mix 10 65 18 38 10 30 12 13 10 45 54 46 10 35 90 77
Tab. 18: Coolant ordering data
Screenwash fluid
S I c a n iä te r 20 I c a n is te r :,2 l0 1 d ru m 100Ö 1 c o n ta in e r
W indscreen w ash -80 °C 89 03 108 14
Tab. 19: S c r e e n w a s h fluid ordering data
Oil analysis kit

Oil analysis kit; 88 56 018 14
6 .2 .5 D ie s e l e n g in e lu b r ic a tin g o il
L u b r ic a tin g o il s p e c if ic a t io n
M odern diesel engines only use lubricating oils w ith a high additive content. Such
lubricating oils co nsist o f basic oils m ixed w ith additives. The Liebherr diesel
engine lubrication guide is based on the follow ing specifications and requirem ents:
D e s ig n a tio n . S p e c ific a tio n
A C E A (Association des constructeurs E4, E6, E7. W arning: Particle filte r oper
E uropéens de I'Autom obile) classifica ation only perm itted w ith E6.
tion
API (Am erican Petroleum Institute) clas CH-4, CI-4. W arning: O bserve shorter
sification oil change intervals.
Tab. 20: Lubricating oil specification
L u b r ic a tin g o il v is c o s it y
The choice o f lubricating oil viscosity is based on the SAE (Society o f A utom otive
Engineers) classification.
The critical factor fo r choosing the SAE class is the am bient tem perature. The SAE
class does not give any clue as to the quality o f a lubricating oil.
If the lubricating oil is too viscous it will be d ifficult to start the engine, if the
viscosity is too low lubricating efficiency m ay be lost.
The tem perature ranges shown in the follow ing chart are guideline values only.
Each end o f the tem perature range m ay be violated briefly.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
C -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50 +60

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
• ......... ... ....................)
I I I I I I I I I
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104 122 140
SAE 10W -40

SAE5W -30
Fig. 295: T e m p erature-dependent selection of S A E class
Liebherr recom m ends the follow ing lubricating oils for am bient te m peratures from
-20 °C to 45 °C:
- L ie b h e rr M o to ro il 10W -40, A C E A E4 specification
- L ie b h e rr IVIotoroil 10W -40 lo w ash, A C E A E6 specification
Liebherr reccom ends the follow ing lubricating oil fo r am bient te m p era ture s from
-30 °C to 30 °C:
- L ie b h e rr IVIotoroil 5W -30, A C E A E4 specification
L u b r ic a tin g o il c h a n g e in t e r v a ls
Lubricating oil change intervals: (For m ore inform ation see: 6.1 M aintenance and
inspection schedule, page 1 5 1 ).
If the specified num ber o f operating hours during the year is not reached: change
the lubricating oil and filte r at least once a year.
V a rio us aggravating factors a lter the m aintenance interval.
A ggravating factors:
- F requent cold starts
- S ulphur content in fuel
- O perating tem perature
If aggravating factors are present: change the lubricating oil and filte r according to
the follow ing tables.
A g g ra v a tin g fa c to r L u b ric a tin ig o il g ra d e
CH-4, CI-4 E4, E7 A)
O perating tem perature S ulphur content o f diesel fuel Interval
to 0.5 % 250 Bh 500 Bh

to - 1 0 ° C
from 0.5 % to 1 % 125 Bh 250 Bh
to 0.5 % 125 Bh 250 Bh

b e lo w -10 °C
from 0.5 % to 1 % is prohibited 125 Bh
Tab. 21: Lubricating oil c h a n g e intervals d e p e n d in g o n aggravating factors, part 1

c
■2
i A) TBN a tle a s t 1 3 m g K 0 H /g
A g g ra v a tin g fa c to r L u b ric a tin g o il g ra d e
E6
O perating tem perature S ulphur content o f diesel fuel Interval
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
A g g ra v a tin g fa c to r L u b ric a tin g o il g ra d e
to 0.005 % 500 Bh
to -1 0 ° C from 0.005 % to 0.05 % 250 Bh
from 0.05% to 0.1% 125 Bh
to 0.005 % 250 Bh
b e lo w -10 “ C from 0.005 % to 0.05 % 125 Bh
from 0.05% to 0.1% is prohibited
Tab. 22: Lubricating oil c h a n g e intervals d e p e nd i n g o n aggravating factors, part 2
6 .2 .6 Fuel
F u e l s p e c if ic a t io n s
Fuels m ust satisfy the m inim um requirem ents o f the follow ing fuel specifications.
Perm itted fuel specifications:

- DIN EN 590
- A S T M D 9 7 5 (8 9 a )1 D a n d 2 D
S u l p h u r c o n t e n t in f u e l
O nly use fuels w hose sulphur content is less than 1 % (10000 m g/kg).
Liebherr recom m ends: in the case o f diesel engines w ith external exha ust gas
recirculation (eEG R), use fuels w ith a sulphur content o f less than 0.005%
(50 m g/kg).
If the diesel engine uses E6 engine oil and a standard lubricating oil change
interval regim e (500 Bh) is in operation: O nly use fu els w hose sulphur content is
less than 0.005 % (50 mg/kg),
(For m ore inform ation see: Lubricating oil change intervals, page 165)
A ccording to the HFRR (60) test, the fuel lubricity m ust not exceed 460 ^Jm
[lubricity o f corrected w earscar "diam eter" (1.4) at 60 °C]. Fuel standard A S TM D
975 does not require fuels to have passed a fuel lubricity test. A w ritten confirm a
tion from the fuel supp lie r m ust be provided. A dditives should be added by the fuel
supplier. The fuel supplier is responsible fo r the quality o f the fuel. The addition of
secondary lubricity additives by the custom er is not recom m ended.
F u e l a t lo w te m p e r a tu r e s ( w in te r o p e r a tio n )
A cetane num ber fo r fuels o f at least 45 is required according to AS TM D 975. At

tem peratures below 0 °C, a cetane num ber o f o ver 50 is required.
A s the external tem perature drops, paraffin crystals separate out from the fuel.
Paraffin crystals increase the flo w resistance in the fuel filte r and restrict the supply
o f fuel to the diesel engine.
T he addition o f petroleum or regular fuel is forbidden fo r safety as w ell as technical

reasons. Special fuels are available for arctic conditions. Use a starting aid (e.g.
fuel filte r heater) if the diesel fuel flow is sluggish or the tem perature is below
-20 °C.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Lubricants and consunnables
6 .2 .7 D ie s e l e n g in e c o o la n t
C o o la n t s p e c if ic a t io n
The coolant is a m ixture o f w a te r and anticorrosion and antifreeze additives.
Coolant:
- can be m ixed w ith the follow ing products.
- is available in a pre-m ixed form (prem ix).
The cooling system only w orks reliably w hen under pressure. Keep th e cooling
system clean and free o f leaks. The coolant sh ut-off and w orking va lve s must be in
good w orking order. M aintain the required coolant level.
The antifreeze agents approved by Liebherr:

- guarantee adequate protection a ga in st freezing, corrosion and cavitation.
- do not attack seals and tubes.
- do not foam .
C oolants cause cavitation or corrosion dam age in the cooling syste m if they
contain unsuitable anticorrosion/antifreeze agents or are prepared incorrectly.
Therm ally-insulating deposits on heat-conducting com ponents w ill resu lt in over
heating and failure o f the diesel engine.
Em ulsifiabie anticorrosion oils are prohibited.
A nticorrosion agents w ithout any antifreeze (e.g. DCA) are never used. Their use is
possible under certain circum stances (see "P erm itted anticorrosion agents (inhibi
tors) w itho ut antifreeze").
W a te r (fre s h w a te r)
C olourless, clear, free from m echanical contam ination, potable tap w a te r with the
follow ing restricted analysis values is suitable.
Sea w ater, brackish w ater, brine or industrial w aste w ater are not suitable.
'D e s ig n a tio n ';'
Total alkaline earths (w ater hardness) 0.6 mmol/dm^ to 3.6 m mol/dm^
pH value at 20 °C 6.5 to 8.5
C hloride ion content m axim um 80 mmol/dm^
Sulphate ion content m axim um 100 mmol/dm^
Tab. 23: Fresh water quality
!:p é s ig n ä tio n ¥ a lu e ''‘^ / '■ , V.'
Total alkaline earths (w ater hardness) 0.6 mmol/dm^ to 2.7 m mol/dm^
pH value at 20 °C 6.5 to 8.0
C hloride ion content m axim um 80 mmol/dm^
Sulphate ion content m axim um 80 mmol/dm^
Tab. 24: Fresh water quality w h e n using D C A 4
A sk the relevant m unicipal authority fo r th eir w ater analysis results.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
C o o la n t m ix in g r a tio
T h ro u g h o u t th e y e a r the coolant m ust contain not less than 50 % anticorrosion/

antifreeze agent.
v O u is id e 'te m jp e ra ^ ^ - '-lyiixing;ratn^,, ...■
A n tic o rro s io n /a n tifre e z e

W a te r
agent
to -37 °C 50% 50%
to -50 °C 40% 60%
Tab. 25: Tempera t u r e- d e p e nd e n t mixing ratio of water a n d anticorrosion agent
°C -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
°F -58 -40 -22 -4 14 32 50 69 86 104 122
50 % A
60% A
Fig. 296: T e m p er a t u re-dependent mixing ratio of water a n d anticorrosion agent
A Proportion o f anticorrosion/anti
freeze agent in co olan t in %
A p p ro v e d a n tic o r r o s io n /a n tifr e e z e a g e n ts
P ro d u c t d e s c rip tio n ■ M a n u fa c tu re r
Liebherr A ntifreeze C oncentrate Liebherr
Tab. 26: A p p r o v e d anticorrosion/antifreeze agents
N ote
(D If Liebherr coolant is not available locally:
► use a coolant that conform s to the "C oolant specification fo r Liebherr diesel
engines 10652041" (contact after sales service).
Mixing different anticorrosion/antifreeze agents w ill degrade the properties o f the

coolant.
A p p ro v e d p r e - m ix e d c o o la n t s
P ro d u c t d e s c rip tio n ^ ^ M a n u fa c tu re r ^
Liebherr A ntifreeze M ix (ready-m ixed:: Liebherr

6
50 % v\/ater, 50 % anticorrosion/anti 2
freeze agent)
Tab. 27: A p p r o v e d pre-mixed coolants
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Lubricantsandconsumables
N ote
(D If Liebherr coolant is not available locally:
► use a coolant th a t conform s to the "C oolant specification fo r L ie bh err diesel
engines 10652041" (contact after sales service).
M ixing different anticorrosion/antifreeze agents w ill degrade the pro pe rtie s of the
coolant.
A p p ro v e d a n tic o r r o s io n a g e n ts ( in h ib ito r s ) w it h o u t
a n tifr e e z e
if it can be dem onstrated that no approved anticorrosion agent is available: In

exceptional cases and w here am bient tem peratures are p erm anently above
freezing point, m ix the w ater with the follow ing anticorrosion agents:
- P ro d u c t D C A 4 (Diesel C oolant A dditives 4)
- C a lte x / C h e v ro n I H a v o lin e I T o ta l
Change the coolant every year in this case.
C heck the concentration during m aintenance work.
N ote
(D If changing between antifreeze and anticorrosion agents:
► Drain coolant.
P r o d u c t d e i^ c rip tib n " » l, ^ M a n u fa c tu re r
D C A 4 Diesel C oolant A dditives Fleetguard / C um m ins Filtration
C altex XL C orrosion Inhibitor C oncen Chevron Texaco

trate
Chevron H eavy Duty Extended Life Chevron Texaco

C orrosion Inhibitor Nitrite Free (ELC)
H avoline Extended Life C orrosion Inhib Chevron Texaco

itor (XLI)
Total W T Supra Total, Paris
Tab. 28: A p p r o v e d anticorrosion agents (inhibitors) without antifreeze
6 .2 .8 H y d r a u lic o il
In itia l f illin g
The inform ation sign on the hydraulic tank filler neck displays the h ydraulic oil with
w hich the m achine w as first filled.
If the initial filling w as carried out by Liebherr, the m achine w ill have been filled with
Liebherr H ydraulic 37 or higher grade hydraulic oil as standard. In exceptional
cases (low tem perature package, bio application) the m achine is initially filled with
a special hydraulic oil.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Mixing
N o te
(D M ixing rapidly biodegradable third -p arty ester-based oils w ith m ineral oils may
result in dam age to the hydraulic system !
Liebherr recom m ends:

► do not mix rapidly biodegradable third-party oils from d ifferen t m anufacturers.
► Do not mix rapidly biodegradable third -p arty oils w ith m ineral oils.
T hird-party oils are oils from o th e r m anufacturers.
Use o f a rapidly biodegradable h ydraulic oil m ust be cleared in advance with

Liebherr.
Plant-based oils m ust not be used because o f th eir poor tem perature stability.
Using Liebherr hydraulic oils ensures th a t none o f the disadvantages listed above
w ill occur.
M ix in g L ie b h e rr h y d ra u lic o ils
L ie b h e rr m in e ra l o ils w ith o n e Can be m ixed in any ratio

a n o th e r
L ie b h e rr m in e ra l o ils w ith b io d e g ra d Can be m ixed in any ratio

a b le L ie b h e rr o ils
To ensure biodegradability, do not add
m ore than 2% m ineral oil (as per regu
lations in m ost European countries)
L ie b h e rr o ils w ith th ird -p a r ty o ils T o ensure that oil properties are not
altered, do not m ix to a proportion
higher than 10%.
Tab. 29: Mixing Liebherr hydraulic oils
6 .2 .9 P r e s e r v a tio n m e d iu m ( a n ti- c o r r o s io n c o a tin g )
W A R N IN G
A Incorrect use o f anti-corrosion coating agents!
► W hen not being used, store the anti-corrosive agent in a cool, dry place
(storage tem perature approx. 15 °C to 20 °C).
► Keep the container aw ay from naked flam e, fire, sparks and other ignition
sources.
► In the event o f fire, use C 0 2 extinguishers, foam or a chem ical extinguisher. Do

not use w ater under any circum stances!
► W hen fighting a fire, w ea r appropriate safety apparel and breathing apparatus.
T he follow ing preservation m edia are recom m ended fo r anti-corrosion coating:
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
P r ö d u c tfn å m é : ld .n o . (d ru m s )
D IN IT R O L 3650 890036814 (20 I) Use D IN ITR O L 3650 for Rem ove the protective fiim
preservation o f layered o f D IN IT R O L 3650 with
D IN ITR O L 3650 is a soft,
sheeting. A pply D INITROL m ineral tu rp e n tin e and
w axy protective coating
3650 by im m ersion, sim ilar so lve n t cleaning
w ith e xcellen t penetration
brushing or spraying. Seal agents.
properties.
the preserved parts after a
drying tim e o f 24 hours
with D IN ITR O L 4010.
D IN IT R O L 4010 890036914 (20 I) A pply D IN ITR O L 4010 by W ithin 2 w e e k s o f applica

brushing o r by airless or tion the D IN IT R O L 4010
D IN ITR O L 4010 is a hard,
airm ix spraying. protective film can be
w axy protective coating.
rem oved w ith m ineral
turpentine. If left to dry
thoroughly fo r 2 weeks,
D IN ITR O L 401 0 w ill resist
a h igh-pressure wash
containing a lkaline addi
tives.
LPS 1 861010014 (aerosol can) Use LPS 1 on electrical The protective film dries
and ele ctron ic system s and out and does not need
LPS 1 is a non-greasy 861010014 (25 I)
control cabinets. The removal.
lubricant that penetrates
g rease-free protective film
deeply, dries quickly and is
protects electrical and
dirt and dust repellent. A s it
e lectronic com ponents and
repels m oisture, it is ideal
does not cause short-
for drying electrical and
circuit.
e le ctron ic modules.
LPS 2 861009714 (aerosol can) Use LPS 2 fo r door locks,

hinges, linkages, etc.
LPS 2 is a highly-stable 861009814 (20 I)
lubricant th a t loosens
rusted up and stuck
com ponents. The non
drying film o f lubricant
provides long-term protec
tion a ga in st corrosion.
LPS 3 861009614 (aerosol can) Use LPS 3 on pendant and T he p rotective film dries
backstay straps, pin out and does not need
LPS 3 has extra deep 861009514 (5 I)
connections, etc. LPS 3 rem oval.
penetration capabilities
8 6 1 0 0 9 4 1 4 (2 0 0 I) p reserves for storage
and repels w ater. LPS 3
purposes only. The preser
dries to form a transparent,
vation m ust be applied
soft, w axy film that
every year. Avoid using in
provides effective protec
the engine com partm ent.
tion a ga in st moisture, air,
acids, alkaline vapours and
other corrosive media.
6
o
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
•P roäuct n a m e ^ A p p lic a tlo rr : R em ovalv
D e n s o ta pe 6 03231914 (sheave Use Denso T ape on Take o ff Denso Tape and

50 mm X 10 m) exposed piston rods, rem ove any residue w ith a
valves, threaded jo in ts o f degreaser or solvent-
Denso Tape is a 1 m m 693058914 (sheave
hydraulic com ponents, etc. based cleaner.
thick petrolatum tape. Its 100 mm X 10 m)
w eb is made o f a n on
rotting chemical fa b ric s u it
able for insulation and
seals.
C O R TEC VCI 368 861008714 (5 I) Use on pins that are to be R em ove protective film s
driven in again (pinning of rem oved w ith petroleum or
C O R TEC VCI 368 is a
boom sections, etc.) m ineral turpentine.
drying, film-form ing
concentrate of highly-effec-
tive corrosion inhibitors
bound together on a
m ineral-oil based carrier.
T he concentrate co nta ins
no nitrites, phosphates,
Chromates or heavy
m etals. It is also PC B - and
PCT-free.
Tab. 30: Conservative a g e n t (anti-corrosion coating)
N ote
(D ► The various preservation m edia can be ordered directly from Liebherr w ith iden
tification num bers (ld.no.).
“ First aid” after contact w ith D INITROL:

- Skin contact: Rinse w ith plenty o f soap and clear water.
- Eye contact: Rem ove anti-corrosion coating agents im m ediately by rinsing the
eyes fo r several m inutes w ith copious quantities o f fresh w ater. Seek medical
attention im m ediately.
- Swallowing: If anti-corrosive agent has been sw allow ed, drink sufficient q uanti
ties of m ilk or w ater. Do not induce vom iting! Seek m edical attention im m edi
ately.
- Breathing in: if high concentrations o f anti-corrosive agent have been breathed
in, take the affected person outside im m ediately. Seek m edical attention im m e
diately.
6 .2 .1 0 L ie b h e r r o il d ia g n o s is s y s te m
N ote
(D ► Perform the first oil change for the relevant unit as scheduled, since increased
levels o f contam ination are to be expected during the running-in phase.
The Liebherr oil diagnosis system is a preventive m aintenance system for the main
m achine com ponents.
It is based on oil analyses and has the follow ing objectives:

- to prevent m achine failures
- to reduce dow ntim e
- to m inim ise repair costs
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
- H ighlight abnorm al w ea r patterns

- Identify potential dam age scenarios in good tim e
T a k in g a n o il s a m p le
Ensure that the follow ing conditions are satisfied:

□ The Liebherr analysis kit is available.
□ The m achine is sw itched off.
□ The m achine is secured to prevent unauthorised operation.
□ The relevant m odule/com ponent has been w arm ed up fo r approx. 15 minutes.
Take the oil sam ples either directly from the housing o f the relevant m odule /
com ponent or from the oil that is being drained out w hen the oil is changed. Drain
o ff at least a qua rte r o f a litre o f oil before taking the sam ple and then fill the
container with w ell-m ixed oil.
Fig. 297: Oil analysis kit
1 Polym er syringes container cap 5 Polym er hose

2 Polym er syringes container 6 Shipping carton
3 Syringe neck 7 Sam ple data sheet
4 A dapter
► Screw the polym er hose 5 w ith a dapter 4 onto the polym er syringe container 2.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Lubricants and consunnables
Fig. 298: Tatting a n oil s a m p l e
► Take a t least 200 ml o f oil.
► C om plete all sections o f the sam ple data sheet.
► Place the oil sam ple and the sam ple data sheet into the shipping carton and
send to the pre-printed address.
U n d e r s ta n d in g th e o il d ia g n o s is re p o rt
The oil diagnosis report contains the detailed results o f the oil sam ple analysis and
provides inform ation a bo ut any m easures th a t need to be taken. Four sym bols are
used for this purpose:
* S ym bol M e a n in g
N orm al
y
High value, take a second oil sam ple fo r cross checking
1
Oil change needed
R epair needed
\
Tab. 31: S y m b o l s a n d their m e a n i n g
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Lubricantsandconsunnables
Im p le m e n t a tio n in s t r u c t io n s f o r th e m a in te n a n c e
A W A R N IN G
Entering w orking and danger zone w hile m achine is running is not perm itted!
R isk o f crushing o f limbs, death.
► Ensure that m achine o perator rem ains in cab at all tim es w hile m achine is
running.
► C arry out w o rk on m achine w hile under continuous visual and radio contact with
m achine operator.
W hen w orking on m achine w itho ut presence of m achine operator:

► Switch o ff the battery m ain switch.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Maintenanceladder*
6.3 Maintenance ladder^
The m aintenance ladder provides access to tiie m aintenance platform o f the base
column.
N O T IC E
M aintenance ladder m ay not be left behind after term ination o f m aintenance w ork!
Dam age to the m aintenance ladder.
► Place m aintenance ladder in its intended spot in the slew ing colum n after m ain
tenance w ork is finished.
C A U T IO N
A Incorrect assem bly o f the m aintenance ladder!
Fall hazard.
► M ake sure that only authorised and trained personnel installs the m aintenance
ladder.
► Only access m aintenance ladder w ith suitable safety barrier.
Fig. 303: At t achment eyelets for safety barrier
1 A ttachm ent eyelets fo r safety

barrier
6 .3 .1 I n s t a llin g th e m a in t e n a n c e la d d e r
► Unfold m aintenance ladder.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Maintenance ladder*
► Bolt m aintenance ladder to slew ing column.
► Fix safety pin w ith linchpin.
6 .3 .2 A t t a c h in g th e m a in te n a n c e la d d e r
► Lift m aintenance ladder o ve r the m aintenance platform w ith an additional rope.
Fig. 306: Securing the m a i n t e n a n c e ladder
► S ecure the m aintenance ladder betw een screw connection pins.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Maintenance ladder*
► Insert distance rolls in suspension eyelet.
Fig. 308: Inserting the threaded rod
1 C om pensation w asher Nut
► Inserting the threaded rod!
► Attach the threaded rod w ith a connpensation w ash er and a nut.
6
O
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Electric motor
6 .4 E le c tr ic m o to r
C AU TIO N
A Bew are o f hot surfaces, live and rotating parts.
These can cause burns, e lectric shock and bruising.
► O nly inspect the electric m otor w hen it is at rest.
► W ear protective clothing.
A C AU TIO N
Inadm issibly deactivated auxiliary supply!
Dam age to e lectric m otor through condensation.
D eactivated auxiliary heating.
► M ake sure that the auxiliary supply is alw ays on.
C AU TIO N
A O verheating o f e lectric m otor!
Dam age to e lectric motor.
► M ake sure that the m achine room is sufficiently supplied w ith fresh air.
Fig. 309: Electric m o t o r
1 G rease nipple Electric m otor
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Electric motor
6 .4 .1 G r e a s in g th e b a ll b e a r in g s
N O T IC E
Inadm issible grease!
D am age to electric m otor.
► Only use lubricant in line w ith lubrication inform ation plate (attached to the e le c
tric motor).

□ Protective clothing is being worn.
□ G rease gun w ith suitable grease is available.
Fig. 310: Lubrication opening
1 Lubrication opening closed 2 Lubrication opening open
► Open lubrication opening.

> Lubrication channels are open.
► S tart electric motor.
► Apply grease gun to grease nipple.
► Press in suitable grease in line w ith the lubrication inform ation plate o f the elec
tric motor.
[> G rease spreads th ro ug h ou t ball bearing.
► Leave m otor running 1 to 2 hours.

> Excess grease is pressed o ut o f ball bearing.
► Close lubrication opening.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Distributor gearbox
6 .5 D is tr ib u to r g e a r b o x
CAUTION
A Hot g earbox com ponents and gearbox oil!
Burns.
► M aintenance and inspection w ork nnust only be carried out w hen th e distributor
gearbox is sw itched o ff and the m otor has cooled down.
► W e a r protective gear.
Fig. 311: T o p view distributor g ea rbox
1 Oil dip stick 2 Ventilation
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Distributor gearbox
Fig. 312: B o t t o m view distributor gearbox
1 Drive fo r pum p 3 Driven by engine

2 Oil drain
6 .5 .1 C h e c k in g t h e g e a r b o x o il le v e l
Ensure th a t the follow ing conditions are satisfied:

□ T he m otor has been sw itched o ff fo r five m inutes.
□ T he m achine is secured to prevent unauthorised operation.
□ W ear protective clothing.
A C A U T IO N
Hot gearbox com ponents and gearbox oil!
R isk o f burns.
► M aintenance and inspection w ork m ust only be carried out w hen the distributor
► W ear protective equipm ent.
► Clean the area around the oil dipstick.
► Pull out the oil dipstick.
► Clean oil dipstick.
^ Insert the oil dipstick as fa r as it w ill go.
► Pull o ut the oil d ipstick again.
► C heck the gearbox oil le v e l.
If the gearbox oil level is below the MIN mark:

► T op up using the appropriate gearbox oil according to the lubrication chart (For
m ore inform ation see: 6.5.2 Topping up the g earbox oil, page 1 8 3 ).
If the gearbox oil level is above the M AX mark:

► Drain the gearbox oil.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Distributor gearbox
6 .5 .2 T o p p in g u p th e g e a r b o x o il

□ The m otor has been sw itched o ff fo r five minutes.
□ M achine is secured against unauthorized operation.
C A U T IO N
A Hot gearbox com ponents and gearbox oil!
Risk o f burns.
► M aintenance and inspection w ork m ust only be carried out w hen th e distributor
gearbox is sw itched off and the m otor has cooled down.
NOTICE
Dirt and foreign bodies in the d istributor gearbox!
The d istributor gearbox is liable to be dam aged.
► Ensure that no d irt or foreign bodies enter the filler neck.
► Open vent.
NOTICE
Incorrect or contam inated gearbox oil!
The d istribu to r gearbox is liable to be dam aged.
► Top up exclusively using the appropriate gearbox oil according to the lubrication
chart (For m ore inform ation see: 6.2.4 Lubrication chart, page 1 6 1 ).
► M ake sure that no contam inated gearbox oil is used.
► Top up the gearbox oil until the M AX mark.
► Insert the oil dipstick as fa r as it w ill go.
► C lose vent.
► S ta rte n g in e .
► Leave engine to run 10 m inutes at idling speed.
► Turn engine off.
► C heck gearbox oil level again after 1 minute.
6 .5 .3 D r a in in g th e g e a r b o x o il

a A suitable and sufficiently large collecting container is to hand.
□ An oil drain hose is to hand.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Distributorgearbox
C AU TIO N
Burns.
► M aintenance and inspection w ork m ust only be carried out w hen the distribu to r
► W e a r protective gear,
► Open vent.
► Place the collecting container in position.
► Open oil drain.
► Attach the oil drain hose.

t> Oil drains out.
► D etach the oil drain hose.
► C lose oil drain.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Swing
6 .6 S w in g
Fig. 313: S w i n g
1 Sight glass 3 Filler neck

2 V ent screw 4 Pinion
6 .6 .1 C h e c k in g th e g e a r b o x o il le v e l

□ Swing housing has normal operating tem perature.
► C heck the g earbox oil level in the sight glass.
If no gearbox oil is visible in the sight glass:

► Top up using the appropriate gearbox oil according to the lubrication chart (For
m ore inform ation see: 6.2.4 Lubrication chart, page 1 6 1 ).
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Swing
6 .6 .2 T o p p in g u p th e g e a r o il

□ T he m otor has been sw itched o ff fo r five minutes.
□ Swing housing has norm al operating tem perature.
□ W e a r protective clothing.
N O TIC E
Dirt and foreign bodies in the sw ing gear!
D am age to swing gear.
► Ensure that no d irt or foreign bodies e nte r the filler neck.
► Rem ove the venting screw from the filler neck.
N O TIC E
D am age to swing gear.
► T op up using only the appropriate g earbox oil according to the lubrication chart
(For more inform ation see: 6.2.4 Lubrication chart, page 1 6 1 ).
► M ake sure that no contam inated g earbox oil is filled in.
► Clean the area around the filler neck.
► T op up the gearbox oil up to halfw ay on the sight glass.
► Attach vent screw to filler neck.
► Close vent screw on filler neck.
► S tarte ng in e .
► Leave engine to run 10 m inutes a t idling speed.
► M ove the sw ing in both directions.
► C heck gearbox oil level again a fte r 1 m inute.
o
o
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Swing connection
6 .7 S w in g c o n n e c tio n
6 .7 .1 G r e a s in g th e t o o t h in g

a The engine has been sw itched off.
If the sw ing teeth are not lubricated by a central lubrication:

► Lubricate the sw ing teeth using the requisite grease or a lterna tively apply an
even coating o f graphite spray (For m ore inform ation see: 6.2.4 Lubrication
chart, page 1 6 1 ).
► Turn the m achine on and operate the slewing gear in both directions.
> Toothing is evenly lubricated.
6 .7 .2 C h e c k in g th e b e a r in g lu b r ic a tio n

□ The engine has been sw itched off.
a M achine is secured against unauthorized operation.
C A U T IO N
A Rotating slew ing colum n!
Risk o f crushing limbs.
► Ensure that nobody enters the dan ge r area during the lubrication process.
► Leave the dan ge r area.
If the sw ing bearings are not lubricated by a central lubrication:

► C heck bearing lubrication.
If no grease collar is visible:

► Use the grease gun to press grease into the grease nipple.
Fig. 314: G r e a s e collar
1 G rease collar
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Swing connection
► Turn the slew ing colum n by 45° after each lubrication process (per grease
nipple).
[> The grease distributes itse lf better in the sw ing ring.
> Grease collar is visible.
6 .7 .3 C h e c k in g th e s le w in g b e a r in g p it c h p la y
W e a r o f the bearing runs increases the play o f the slew ing bearings.
M e a s u r in g p o in ts
The follow ing overview show s the possible m easuring points.
Fig. 315: M e a s u r in g points ball-bearing sw i n g ring
1 Slewing colum n (turning) 3 Base colum n (not turning)

2 Slewing bearing
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Swing connection
Fig. 316: Mea s u r i ng points roller-bearing swing ring
1 Slewing colum n (turning) 3 Base colum n (not turning)

2 Slewing bearing
M e a s u re m e n t
M ake sure that

□ the first m easurem ent (basic pitch play m easurem ent) is p erform ed in new
state.
Fig. 317: C r a n e positions
M e a s u rin g m e th o d 1 (re c o m m e n d e d )
► Establish 0° boom position and mark.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Swing connection
► Raise boom w itho ut load until it reaches the upper luffing g ea r lim it switch.
► S et dial gauge to 0 at position 1 and 2.
► Low er boom until it reaches the low er luffing gear lim it switch.
► Load boom w ith m axim um adm issible load in line w ith load chart.
► Read off m easuring value on gauge.
► Enter m easuring value on gauge,
► Sw ivel crane by 90°.
► R epeat m easurem ent o f the slew ing bearing pitch play (set dial gauge to 0 at
position 3 and 4).
M e a s u rin g m e th o d 2 (a lte rn a tiv e )
► Low er boom in parked position 0°.

or
Place boom in boom storage.
► Attach ja c k up cylind er to position 1 betw een base and slew ing column.
► Set dial gauge to 0 at position 1.
► Lift up jack up cylinder 1 until the m easuring value rem ains constant.
► Read o ff m easuring value on gauge.
► Enter m easuring value on gauge.
► R epeat m easurem ents on positions 2 to 4.
R ep ea te d m e a s u re m e n t
► M easurem ent under the sam e conditions (hook size, boom radius, m easuring
device, load, position o f the ja ck up cylinders).
A d m is s ib le p it c h p la y
B a s ic p la y m ax. w ear m a x. p itc h

in n ew
c o n d itio n
Ball bearing slew ing rim s w ith external 0.5 mm 1.5 mm 2 mm

dia m e te r up to 2500 mm
Ball bearing slew ing rim s w ith external 0.5 mm 2.5 mm 3 mm

diam eter above 2500 mm
R oller bearing slew ing rim s 0.5 mm 1 mm 1.5 mm
Tab. 32: Limit table
If the lim it o f the slew ing bearing play is reached during one o f the m easurem ents:
► R eplace ball a nd /or roller bearing slew ing rim.
6
o
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hoist winch
6 .8 H o is t w in c h
Fig. 318: Hoist winch
1 Oil dip stick, filler neck Oil drain

2 Vent
6 .8 .1 C h e c k in g t h e g e a r b o x o il le v e l

A C A U T IO N
Hot w inch com ponents and hot gearbox oil!
R isk o f burns.
► M aintenance and inspection w ork on the w inches m ay only be carried out when
the m achine is sw itched o ff and has cooled down.
► W e a r protective equipm ent.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hoistwinch
NOTICE
D irt and foreign bodies in the w inch gearbox!
The w inch gearbox is liable to be dam aged.
► Ensure that no d irt or foreign bodies e nte r the filler neck.
► Pull o ut the oil dipstick.
^ Clean oil dipstick.
► Insert the oil d ipstick as fa r as it w ill go.
► Pull out the oil d ipstick again.
► C heck the gearbox oil level.
If the gearbox oil level is below the MIN mark:

► Top up using the appropriate gearbox oil according to the lubrication chart (For
m ore inform ation see: 6.8.2 Topping up the gearbox oil, page 1 9 2 ).
If the gearbox oil level is above the M AX mark:

► Draining the g ea r oil.
6 .8 .2 T o p p in g u p th e g e a r b o x o il

□ T he m achine is secured to prevent unauthorised operation.
A C AU TIO N
H ot w inch com ponents and hot gearbox oil!
Burns and open w ounds.
► M aintenance and inspection w ork on the w inches m ay only be carried out w hen
the m achine is sw itched off and has cooled down.
N O TIC E
Dirt and foreign bodies in w inch gearbox!
T he w inch gearbox w ill be dam aged.
► Ensure that no dirt or foreign bodies enter the filler neck.
► Open vent.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hoistwinch
N O TIC E
The winch gearbox w ill be dam aged.
► Top up using only the appropriate gearbox oil according to the lubrication chart
(For m ore inform ation see: 6.2.4 Lubrication chart, page 1 6 1 ).
► C heck the purity o f the gearbox oil.
► Top up the gearbox oil until the M AX mark.
► R einsert the oil dipstick as fa r as it w ill go.
► C lose vent.
► S ta rte n g in e .
► Leave engine to run 10 m inutes at idling speed.
► M ove the w inch in both directions at low speed.
► C heck g earbox oil level again a fte r 1 minute.
6 .8 .3 D r a in in g th e g e a r b o x o il

a A suitable and sufficiently large collecting container is to hand.
□ An oil drain hose is to hand.
C AU TIO N
Burns.
► M aintenance and inspection w ork m ust only be carried out w hen the distributor
gearbox is sw itched off and the m otor has cooled down.
► W ear protective gear.
► Open vent.
► Place the collecting container in position.
► Open oil drain.
► Attach the oil drain hose.

> Oil drains out.
► Detach the oil drain hose.
► C lose oil drain.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hoist winch
6 .8 .4 C h e c k in g th e r o p e k ic k e r
► C heck the w ea r o f the rope kickers.
N O TIC E
D ifferent w ear o f screw s and rope kicker!
R opes m ay becom e dam aged.
► Use only original Liebherr spare parts.
► Exchange rope kicker in case o f excess wear.
► C heck w hether the screw s are sunk.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic system
6 .9 H y d r a u lic s y s te m
6 .9 .1 C h e c k th e h y d r a u lic s y s te m f o r le a k s

C AU TIO N
A Hot hydraulic oil!
D anger o f burns.
► Carry out m aintenance and inspection w ork on hydraulic system exclusively

w hen engine is sw itched off.
► W e a r protective equipm ent.
► C heck hydraulic system fo r leaks.
If there is a leak in the hydraulic system :

► Switch o ff m achine.
► C ontact Liebherr after sales service.
6
o
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic oiltank
6 .1 0 H y d r a u lic o il ta n k
Fig. 320: Hydraulic oil tank
1 Vent 4 Inspection hatch

2 Oil level sensor 5 Sight glass for checking oil level
3 Return filter
6.10.1 Checking the hydraulic oil level

□ The motor has been switched off for five minutes.
□ The machine is secured to prevent unauthorised operation.
□ All hydraulic cylinders are retracted.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulicoil tank
A CAUTION
Hot hydraulic oil!
Danger of burns.
► Do not carry out any maintenance and inspection work on the hydraulic system
until the engine has been switched off and has cooled down.
► Wear protective equipment.
► Check the hydraulic oil level in the sight glasses.

If no hydraulic oil is visible in the lowest sight glass:
► Top up using the appropriate hydraulic oil according to the lubrication chart (For
more information see; 6.2.4 Lubrication chart, page 161).
6.10.2 Carrying out a hydraulic oil analysis
(For more information see: 6.2.10 Liebherr oil diagnosis system, page 172)
6.10.3 Topping up with hydraulic oil
(D Note
► If replacing “mineral oil-based hydraulic oil” with “synthetic oil-based hydraulic
oil”, please contact Liebherr after sales service.

□ Torque wrench 69 Nm (width across flats 19) is available.
CAUTION
A Hot engine parts and hydraulic oil!
Danger of burns.
► Do not open the cover of the return filter unless the engine is switched off and
the temperature of the hydraulic oil is 40° or less.
Fig. 321: Opening the return filter
► Undo all cylinder screws.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic oiltank
NOTICE
Dirt and foreign bodies in return filter!
Damage to the liydraulic system.
► Ensure that no dirt or foreign bodies enter the return filter.
► Remove the cover from the filter housing.
NOTICE
Hydraulic oil topped up incorrectly!
Damage to the hydraulic system.
► Only top up with hydraulic oil through the return filter.
NOTICE
Wrong hydraulic oil!
► Top up with suitable hydraulic oil only (For more information see: 6.2.4 Lubrica
tion chart, page 161).
► Do not add any additives or concentrates.
► Fill with hydraulic oil.

► Replace the filter housing cover and align it so that the screw holes match.
Fig. 322: Closing the return filter
► Tighten the screws by hand.

► Torque the screws to 69 Nm.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic oiltank
6.10.4 Draining the hydraulic oil

□ The motor has been switched off for five minutes.
□ Machine is secured against unauthorized operation.
□ Hydraulic oil has normal operating temperature.
□ Wear protective clothing.
□ A suitable and sufficiently large collecting container is to hand,
a An oil drain hose is to hand.
Note
(D Environmental pollution!
► Fluids such as hydraulic oil, fuel and cooling liquid must be disposed of in
Fig. 323: Hydraulic oil tank - oil drain valve
1 Oil drain valve
► Place collecting container under oil drain valve.

► Remove the oil drain valve cover.
► Connect the oil drain hose from the Liebherr tool kit to the oil drain valve.
► Drain the hydraulic oil.
► Close the oil drain valve cover.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic oiltank
6.10.5 Cleaning the magnetic rod in the return filter

□ Torque wrench 69 Nm is available.
Opening the return filter
A CAUTION
Hot engine parts and hydraulic oil!
Risk of burns.
► Do not open the cover of the return filter unless the engine is switched off and
the temperature of the hydraulic oil is 40° or less.
Fig. 324: Opening the return filter
► Undo all cylinder screws.
NOTICE
Dirt and foreign bodies in return filter!
► Ensure that no dirt or foreign bodies enter the return filter.
► Remove the cover from the filter housing.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic oiltank
Cleaning the magnetic rod
r'
L_.
Fig. 325: Cleaning the magnetic rod
1 Screw with circlip 6 Pressure flange

2 Filter cover 7 0-ring
3 Sealing ring 8 Filter element
4 Magnetic rod 9 Filter housing
5 Compression spring
► Carefully remove the filter cover and the sealing ring lying underneath it.
► Remove the magnetic rod, compression spring, pressure flange, 0-ring and the
used filter element from the filter housing.
► Check the magnetic rod for metal dust and clean with a clean, lint-free cloth.
► Thoroughly clean all remaining parts.
► Check the 0-ring and sealing ring for damage, replace if necessary.
► Clean the inside of the filter housing thoroughly.
► Insert a new original filter element.
► Refit parts in reverse order.
► Check 0-ring and sealing ring for cleanliness and correct fit.
Note
► Fluids such as hydraulic oil, fuel and cooling liquid must be disposed of in
accordance with national and international regulations and guidelines.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic oiltank
C losing the return filter

► Replace the filter housing cover and align it so that the screw holes match
Fig. 326: Closing the return filter
► Tighten the screws by hand.

► Torque the screws to 69 Nm.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Tank fillingsystem
6 .1 1 T a n k fillin g s y s t e m
Fig. 327: Tank filling system

6
1 Hydraulic oil tank 6 Filter unit

2 Tank filler neck 7 Aggregate
3 Tap valve 8 Suction hose
4 Conveyor hose 9 Supply container
5 Plug-type coupling
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Tank fillingsystem
6.11.1 Tanking hydraulic oil
NOTICE
Incorrect use of the tank filling system!
Environmental damage.
► Only operate the tank filling system if the filling process is supervised by 2
persons.
► Supervise supply container.

► Supervise hydraulic oil tank,
► Connect conveyor hose with plug-type coupling.

► Insert tap valve into tank filler neck.
► Immerse suction hose into supply container.
► Check the filter unit for contamination.
► Switch on aggregate.
[> Hydraulic oil is tanked.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic filter
6 .1 2 H y d r a u lic filter
6.12.1 C hanging the pressure filter
Fig. 328: Filter overview
1 Upper housing section 5 Filterelement

2 Pressure sensor 6 Lower housing section
3 Sealing ring 7 Nut (welded)
4 0-ring
► Undo the nut.

► Take off lower housing section.
► Carefully remove filter element and dispose of remaining oil from lower housing
section.
► Clean all parts thoroughly.
► Check 0-ring and sealing ring for damage.
If the 0-ring or sealing ring is damaged:
► Replace the 0-ring or sealing ring.
► Thoroughly clean inside the filter housing.
► Insert a new filter element.
Check 0-ring and sealing ring for cleanliness and correct fit.
► Reassemble the parts in the reverse order.
► Tighten nut of lower housing section as far as it will go.
► Startengine.
► Leave engine to run 5 minutes at idling speed.
► Tighten nut of lower housing section again as far as it will go.
► Startengine.
► Let engine run at idling speed.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic filter
► Check hydraulic system for leaks.

If there is a leak in the hydraulic system:
► Contact Liebherr after sales service.
6
o
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Accumulator
6 .1 3 A c c u m u la to r
Fig. 329: Accumulator
1 Connection for pressure gauge Drain valve

2 Accumulator
A WARNING
Incorrect handling of accumulator!
Explosion and bursting.
► Only have accumulator serviced by authorised maintenance personnel.
► If in doubt, contact Liebherr after sales service.
A CAUTION
Hot hydraulic oil escaping under high pressure!
Burns and open wounds.
► Wait a few minutes until the pressure has fallen to 0 bar and the temperature of
the hydraulic oil is no more than 40°C.
► Wear protective clothing.
copyright by
166516
Maintenance
Accumulator
6.13.1 C hecking the accu m u lato r

□ The engine has been switched off.
a Machine is secured against unauthorized operation.
□ Pressure gauge is available.
► Close gate valve on hydraulic oil tank.
► Open drain valve.
> Hydraulic oil is drained from accumulator.
► Connect the pressure gauge to the pressure gauge connection point.
► Compare the actual pressure displayed by the pressure gauge with the target
pressure indicated by the operating data of the accumulator.
If the actual pressure is lower than the target pressure;
► replace the pressure accumulator.
6 .13 .2 C hanging the accu m u lato r

□ Original Liebherr accumulators are available.
□ Pressure of hydraulic oil is 0 bar.
□ The temperature of the hydraulic oil is 40 °C.
□ Suitable tools are available.
NOTICE
Dirt and foreign bodies in hydraulic system!
► Make sure the hydraulic system is free of dirt and foreign bodies.
► Close gate valve on hydraulic oil tank.

► Open drain valve.
> Hydraulic oil is drained from accumulator.
► Replace accumulator with a new original Liebherr accumulator.
► Accumulators must be thoroughly cleaned on the outside so that the markings
and operating data are clearly visible.
► Open gate valve on hydraulic oil tank.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic cylinders
6 .1 4 H y d r a u lic c y lin d e r s
6.14.1 C heck th at th e hydraulic cylind er fits properly and

does not leak
► Check that the hydraulic cylinder fits properly and does not leak.
If the hydraulic cylinder is leaking or loose:
6.1 4 .2 P reserving th e piston rods o f all exposed cylinders

The following hydraulic cylinders require maintenance:
- Luffing cylinders
- Swing lock cylinder
► Clean cylinder pistons.
► Preserve cylinder pistons with anticorrosive C O R T E C VCI 369.

► Fully extend and retract the cylinder pistons 2-3 times.
> Cylinder pistons are preserved.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Hydraulic hoses
6 .1 5 H y d r a u lic h o s e s
6.15.1 C hecking hydraulic hoses and hose lines
Hydraulic hoses and hose lines are subject to a natural aging process. This limits
the storage time and service life.
Useful life will be shortened by use at the limit of permitted stress (very high/iovi^
temperatures, high pulse frequencies, multi-shift operation, etc.).
A CAUTION
Faulty repair of hydraulic hoses and hose lines.
Damage and injury.
► Hydraulic hoses and hose lines should only be renewed.
► Use only original Liebherr spare parts.
► If in doubt, contact Liebherr after sales service.
► Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for damage to the outer layer as far as
the reinforcement (chafing, cuts and cracks, etc.).
► Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for cracks in the outer layer (tears in the
hose material, etc.).
► Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for deformation in the pressurised and
depressurised state, and at bends that do not correspond to the original state of
the hydraulic hose or hose line (layer separation, bubble formation, etc.).
► Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for leaks.
► Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for damage or deformation of thehose
fitting which reduces the strength of the fitting or the hose/fitting connection.
► Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines to see whether the hose has come
undone from the fitting.
► Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for corrosion of the fitting which reduces
its efficiency or strength.
► Check hydraulic hoses and hose lines for expiration of the storage time and
period of use.
In case one of the stated test points occur:
► replace hydraulic hoses and hose lines.
6
o
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Electrical system
6 .1 6 E le c tr ic a l s y s t e m
6.16.1 Replacing fuses and lamps

a The engine has been switched off.
□ Machine is secured against unauthorized operation,
a Original Liebherr spare parts are available.
► Replace faulty fuses and lamps.
► Check that the new part is correctly seated.
6.16.2 Cleaning the slip ring unit
NOTICE
Improper cleaning with wet or damp cleaning cloths!
Damage to the slip ring unit.
► Use only dry methods (compressed air or vacuum cleaner) to clean the slip ring
unit.

□ Ship's power supply is turned off and secured against reactivation.
□ Compressed air or a vacuum cleaner is available.
► Remove the cover.
A CAUTION
Swirling dust and dirt particles!
Eye injuries.
► Wear protective clothing (safety goggles and breathing mask).
► Clean the slip ring unit with compressed air and a vacuum cleaner.
► Check brushes for wear and correct position.
► Check tightening torque of the cable lug fixing screw.
► Reattach the cover.
6.16.3 Replacing filter mats

□ An original Liebherr filter mat is available.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Electrical system
Fig. 330: Switch cabinet filter mat cover
1 Filter mat cover
► Remove the filter mat cover.

► Replace the old filter mat with a new original Liebherr filter mat.
► Reattach the filter mat cover.
6.16.4 Checking screw and terminal connections

□ Ship's power supply is turned off and secured against reactivation.
► Check all screws and clips for tight fit and tighten if necessary.
► Check tightening torque of the screws on main switch and star-delta contactor.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Limit switcli
6 .1 7 L im it s w i t c h
6.17.1 Checking hoist and luffing gear limit switch for func
tion
► Move luffing gear to upper and lower limit switch.

► Check triggering of the limit switches.
► Move hoisting gear to upper and lower limit switch.
► Check triggering of the limit switches.
If the limit switch triggers too early or not at all:
► Switch off machine.
► Contact Liebherr service department.
d
o
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Emergency stop
6 .1 8 E m e r g e n c y s to p
6.18.1 Checking the emergency stop
A WARNING
Unauthorised triggering of the ennergency stop!
► The emergency stop may only be triggered when the diesel engine is running,
the machine is not moving and no load is attached.
► Check that all emergency stops are working.

If the diesel engine does not switch off:
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Fire extinguishers
6 .1 9 F ire e x t in g u is h e r s
6.19.1 C hecking th e proper seals and inspection dates on the

fire extinguishers
Fig. 331: Fire extinguisher
NOTICE
Unsuitable or broken fire extinguisliers!
► Note the type plate on the fire extinguisher.
► Observe national regulations.
The guidelines for checking hand extinguishers are nationally regulated.

► Check the proper seals and inspection dates on the fire extinguishers.
If the fire extinguishers are missing or the inspection dates have been passed:
► Replace the fire extinguishers or have them inspected.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Personal protective equipment
6 .2 0 P e r s o n a l p r o te c tiv e e q u ip m e n t
6.20.1 C hecking personal protective gear
A WARNING
Inadequate protection!
Serious injury
► Observe the guidelines on care and maintenance of the safety equipment.
► Do not repair protective gear yourself.
► Check that the personal protective gear is in place, intact and complete (For
more information see: 2.4 Personal protective equipment, page 4 2).
If the personal protective gear is not present, damaged, or incomplete:
► Complete the personal protective gear.
► Clean the personal protective gear.
► Have the personal protective gear cleaned.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Emergency descent rescue equipment
6 .2 1 E m e r g e n c y d e s c e n t r e s c u e e q u ip m e n t
6.21.1 C hecking em ergency d escen t rescue eq u ip m en t
► Have the emergency descent rescue equipment inspected by a specialist.

► Have the result of the inspection entered in the warranty and inspection card.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Lubrication system
6 .2 2 L u b r ic a tio n s y s t e m
Fig. 332: Lubricating pump
1 Control unit 4 Filling nipple

2 Supply container A Set lubrication time rotary control
knob
3 Maximum fill level “marker” B Set pause time rotary control
knob
After the engine is switched on, the yellow indicator light lights up for 1.5 seconds,
indicating readiness for operation.
6.22.1 C hecking th e function o f th e central lubrication
► Press the Interim lubrication button.

> Interim lubrication with programmed lubrication time.
> After expiration of the programmed break time, the programmed lubrication
process continues.
If no interim lubrication takes place after pressing the Interim lubrication button:
► Contact Liebherr service department.
6.22.2 C hecking th e fill level o f th e lubrication pum ps

□ The grease gun from the Liebherr tool kit is present and filled with grease (For
more information see: 6.2.4 Lubrication chart, page 161).
□ The machine is switched off.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Lubrication system
NOTICE
Incorrect or impure grease!
Damage to machine.
► To prevent impurities: only fill the supply container with grease via the grease
nipple.
► Ensure purity of grease,
► Top up using only the appropriate grease according to the lubrication chart (For
more information see: 6.2.4 Lubrication chart, page 161).
NOTICE
Grease supply container is empty!
The swing ring and tooth flanks will be insufficiently lubricated and damaged.
Expensive cleaning and venting work on central lubrication pumps.
► Ensure that supply containers are permanently topped up.
► Check the fill level of the lubrication pumps.

If the fill level lies well below the “Maximum fill level” marker:
► Top up with grease until the “Maximum fill level” marker is reached.
6.22.3 C hecking the tim e intervals o f the lubrication pum ps

For optimum lubrication, the following factory-set time intervals may not be
changed:
- Lubrication time: 13 minutes
- Break time: 4 hour
► Check the time intervals of each lubrication pump.

If the lubrication pump settings do not match the specifications:
► Correct the settings to match the appropriate specifications.
6.22.4 C hecking th e lubrication points

a The machine is secured to prevent unauthorised operation.
► Check the lubrication points for sufficient lubrication.
If no grease collars can be seen at the lubrication points:
► Check the settings of the lubrication pumps.
► Check the lines for damage.
5 ► Contact Liebherr after sales service.
copyright by
166516
Maintenance
Ropes
6 .2 3 R o p e s
Due to the limited service life of wire ropes, ropes must be checked at regular inter
vals during use to correctly identify when the rope has reached the end of its
service life and to remove it from service before it fails completely.
The following points are important when determining the inspection intervals and
may shorten the intervals:
- National and local regulations that apply in the country of use.
- The environmental conditions to which the machine is exposed.
- The first few weeks after a rope has been put on.
- Results of previous inspections.
- The length of time the rope has already been in use
A DANGER
Rope damage is not noticed!
Load breakaway.
Following prolonged shutdown of the machine or incidents that could have resulted
in damage to the rope:
► Check rope and end attachments.
These rope changing criteria form part of ISO 4309. They describe the most
commonly occurring types of rope wear.
A DANGER
Incorrect maintenance of ropes!
Load breakaway.
► All the listed criteria must be checked at the prescribed maintenance intervals.
► Check the rope in particular around the end attachment as it is subject to
increased mechanical stresses at this point.
If any doubts on the operational safety of a rope exist:
► Lay down the rope or have the rope inspected by a qualified engineer.

6.23.1 C heck the rope fo r diam eter sh rin kag e

As a result of natural wear that occurs during use, ropes gradually become thinner
and must eventually be withdrawn from service. If the rope diameter has reduced
over long sections by more than 10% relative to the nominal dimension as a result
of internal friction, corrosion, etc., the rope must be changed regardless of whether
or not wire breaks have occurred.
□ A caliper gauge with wide jaws is available.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
Fig. 333: Correct (left) and incorrect measurement (right) of rope diameter
► Measure the rope diameter on two separate points at least one metre distant
from each other.
► Always measure the rope diameter twice at the same point.

The average corresponds to the rope diameter. The rope diameter must measure
at least 90% of the nominal rope diameter.
► Calculate the average of the four measurements.
If the rope diameter is smaller than the nominal rope diameter by more than 10%:
► Remove the rope.
Note
(D If new ropes are to be attached:
► Check the rope drive.
6.23.2 C hecking th e ropes fo r deform ations
Check for: Photographs o f damage:

Pockets: These can occur when the outer layer of wires
loosens or the outer wire strands are longer than the
inner ones. Movement of the outer wires or strands in
relation to the inner ones causes movement of the
excess length at a particular location.
copyright by
166516
Maintenance
Ropes
Check for: Photographs of damage:

Loop form ation: Single wires or groups of wires
emerge from the rope structure. The loops usually lie in
a series of strands.
Necking: is reductions in the diameter of the wire rope

over short lengths. Rope sections immediately before
the end attachment must be checked for necking with
particular care. Necking is often difficult to recognise at
these points.
Knots: are deformations of the wire rope. They are

formed when a eyelet-shaped rope loop is pulled
straight without the wire rope being able to compensate
by turning on its axis.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
Corkscrews: With this type of deformation, the axis of
the unloaded wire rope becomes helical. This does not
weaken the wire rope initially, though it might prevent
the rope drive from running smoothly. The resultant
damage can include increased abrasion and more wire
breaks. The rope must be withdrawn from service if the
area of greatest deformation exceeds 1/3 of the nominal
rope diameter.
Tab. 33: Checking the ropes for deformations
► Check the ropes for deformations.

If the rope meets one of the criteria above or exhibits specific damage;
► Switch off the machine and, if possible, determine the cause of the damage.
► Remove the rope and/or rope pair.
6.23.3 C heck ropes fo r corrosion

C orrosion: occurs mostly in corrosive and salt water
atmospheres (e.g. prolonged storage of ropes in the
open air, salt water atmospheres, etc.). Two types of
corrosion occur: atmospheric corrosion (causes
"even" rust) and localised corrosion, such as pitting
(forms deep holes in places where the protective
sheath is missing or damaged). The photographs
both show atmospheric corrosion.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes

The diameter of the rope has reduced as a result of
corrosion. If the rope diameter has reduced by 10%
or more relative to the nominal dimension, the rope
must be changed regardless of whether or not wire
breaks have occurred.
Tab. 34: Check ropes for corrosion
► Check ropes for corrosion.

If the rope meets one of the criteria above or exhibits specific damage:
6 .23 .4 C heck ropes fo r abrasion

Abrasion: reduces both the static breaking force of
the rope due to reduction of the metallic cross-
section and its fatigue limit due to wear grooves. If
the rope diameter has reduced by 10% or more rela
tive to the nominal dimension, the rope must be
changed regardless of whether or not wire breaks
have occurred.
Tab. 35: Check ropes for abrasion
► Check ropes for abrasion.

If the rope meets one of the criteria above or exhibits specific damage:
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
6.23.5 C heck ropes fo r the effects o f heat

Heat dam age:lf the temperature rises aboveSOO °C
the tensile fibre structure of the wire rope caused by
cold deformation recrystallises and the wire loses
around 2/3 of its original strength.
An extreme form of heat damage is caused by light

ning strike. The rope may heat up at the point of the
strike to such an extent that the steel starts to melt.
In all cases of exposure to high temperatures, the
rope must be changed regardless of whether or not
wire breaks have occurred.
Tab. 36: Check ropes for the effects of heat
Note
(D ► For permitted operating temperatures for ropes and end attachments, refer to
EN 12385-3.
► Check ropes for significant heat damage.

If a rope displays signs of external heat damage, such as recrystallisation, melting,
etc.:
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
6.23 .6 C heck the rope fo r n u m ber o f perm itted w ire brealcs

The following tables are an excerpt from ISO 4309:2004.
The tables show the permitted number of wire breaks relative to a defined control
section of the rope.
Rope category (see Number of bearing w ires in the Number of wire

Annex E) outer strands of the wire rope breaks at end of
service life
n 6D 5) 30D 5)
01 to 50 2 4
02 51 to 75 3 6
03 76 to 100 4 8
04 101 to 120 5 10
05 121 to 140 6 II
06 141 to 160 6 13
07 161 to 180 7 14
08 181 to 200 8 16
09 201 to 220 9 18
10 221 to 240 10 19
11 241 to 260 10 21
12 261 to 280 II 22
13 281 to 300 12 24
Special constructions with larger outer wire dimensions deviating from the
standard may possibly be classified divergent from table 1. Contact the manufac
turer to this respect. For wire ropes in Seale Machart in which the number of outer
wires in braids does not exceed 19, the rope should be classified two lines above
the actually applicable line in table 1.
Note: The number of wire breaks apply for steel grooves or plastic pulleys in
combination with multi-layer spooling (for the part of the rope subjected to most
stress). They do not apply for plastic pulleys in combination with single-layer
spooling.
Tab. 37: Number of wire breaks and the end of service life for single-layer spooling
and lang lay ropes
Filler wires are not considered to be bearing wires. In the case of wire ropes with
several layers of strand, only the strands in the outermost layer are deemed to be
outer strands. In the case of steel ropes, the steel core functions as the inner
strand.
A broken wire has two ends.
The stated number of wire breaks refers to systems categorised in the groups
M1 - M4. The maximum number of admissible wire breaks doubles for ropes
applied in or on systems in the groups M5 - M8.
Inner rope diameter
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
Rope category (see Number of bearing w ires in the Number of wire

Annex E) outer strands of the wire rope breaks at end of
se rv ice life
n 6D 5) 30D5)
21 4 rope braids 2 4
to 100
22 3 rope braids 2 4
4 rope braids
over 100
23 at least 10 outer braids 2 4

Note: The number of wire breaks apply for steel grooves or plastic pulleys in
combination with multi-layer spooling (for the part of the rope subjected to most
stress). They do not apply for plastic pulleys in combination with single-layer
spooling.
Tab. 38: Number of wire breaks at the end of the sen/ice life for strain-free ropes
A D AN G ER
Unsuitable rope is used!
Load breakaway.
If a new rope is to be attached:
► Choose a rope where the rope diameter, the breaking load and the number of
bearing wires in the outer strands matches those of of the original rope.
► Choose a rope that meets the applicable national and international regulations.
Exam ple: if the measured diameter D is 30 mm, this means that the number of
permitted wire breaks on a control section measuring 6 x D = 180 mm may not be
higher than 9. On a control section measuring 30 x D = 900 mm, the number may
not be higher than 18.
► Check the number of wire breaks with the values in the table.
If the number of wire breaks exceeds the number of permitted wire breaks:
Filler wires are not considered to be bearing wires. In the case of wire ropes with
several layers of strand, only the strands in the outermost layer are deemed to be
outer strands. In the case of steel ropes, the steel core functions a s the inner
strand.
A broken wire has two ends.
The stated number of wire breaks refers to systems categorised in the groups
Ml - M4. The maximum number of admissible wire breaks doubles for ropes
applied in or on systems in the groups M5 - M8.
Inner rope diameter
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
6.23.7 Storing ropes
NOTICE
Ropes are not labelled!
Ropes/rope winders could be mixed up.
If the label is missing or is no longer clearly legible,
► Rope winders according to the delivery documents.
► Check that the labeling of supplied ropes matches the material inspection docu
ments and the order.
► Material inspection certificates should be carefully filed away.
NOTICE
Incorrect storage!
Ropes may become damaged.
► Ropes should be stored correctly.
► Store wire ropes in a dry, well-ventilated area.

► Protect rope and rope winder from the elements: Never store rope or rope
winder directly on the ground.
► Avoid storing them outdoors for prolonged periods.
6.23.8 Tran spo rtin g ropes

Ropes are very sensitive to external damage.
A WARNING
Incorrect transport (loaded, unloaded)!
► Ropes should be transported correctly.
copyright by
166516
Maintenance
Ropes
X
Fig. 344: Lifting a rope winder correctly (left) and incorrectly (right) on a forklift truck
Correct procedures to avoid damage to ropes during transport:

► Lift rope winders using textile rigging (flat lifting slings or round slings).
► Ideally, rope winders should be lifted with a shaft pushed through their middle.
► Lift rope winders using forklift forks.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
6.23.9 W inding ropes

Ropes will only function properly if they are undamaged and are laid without any
distortion.
NOTICE
Ropes are not handled correctly!
► Spool ropes exclusively as described below.
If the winding area of the rope is more in the upper rope layer when operating
winches with multiple-layer spooling, the lower rope layer may become loose. This
results in a slight ovalisation of the rope that changes the winding diameter across
the width of the drum. This leads to gaps in the running rope layer, which impairs
the spooling properties and increases rope wear.
NOTICE
Lower rope layer loosened!
Risk of damage to the rope.
► Improve the the spooling properties and decrease wear: completely unwind the
rope at regular intervals and then wind it up again under pre-tension (1 to 2% of
the rope minimum breaking force).
A rope works most economically when its entire length is used. It is therefore
recommended that an appropriate length of rope is used for lengthy operations.
Ensure that personal protective equipment is worn at all times.
NOTICE
Incorrect handling of the rope!
► Do not brake the rope directly.
► Do not pull the rope along the ground.
In case of multi-layer spooling;
► 1. Pretension rope layer during stranding with at least 10% of SWL(max).
A B
X
Fig. 345: Winding ropes without brake
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
► Unwind ropes from the rope winder in the winding direction A.
Unwinding to the side causes the rope to twist until it is destroyed by kink forma
tion,
► Unwind ropes from a jacked up rope winder B.
Fig. 346: Winding ropes with brake
► Unwind ropes from a rope winder A that is braked.

► Check the ropes for damage, deformation, wear, etc. while it is unwound.
If the rope shows any signs of damage, deformation, wear, etc.:
6.23.10 Luffing ropes

When luffing the rope, pay attention to the following points:
- Make sure that the rope does not become untwined or twisted.
- If an auxiliary rope is used, make sure the permitted tensile force is applied (at
least the weight of the rope).
- If the old rope is used as the luffing rope, ensure that the new rope does not
become twisted.
A WARNING
Rotating winches, moving rope!
Risk of crushing of limbs, death.
► Turn off the engine when working on winches.

► Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone around the winches.
6
► Ensure that the machine operator is in visual and voice contact with his assis
o tant.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes

□ The rope is checked before luffing for damage as a result of incorrect handling
or storage.
□ Protective equipment is worn.
► Dismantle hook.
NOTICE
Rope deflexion angle is too large (more than 1.5°)!
► Position the rope winder some distance away and without any lateral deflection.
► Position rope winder with new rope in front of the boom.
A WARNING
Impermissible welding together of ropes!
Breaking as they pass over sheaves, damage to the machine and the rope, severe
injuries.
► Use a rope stocking to connect both ropes.
► Follow the instructions of the rope stocking manufacturer.
► Use an auxiliary rope.
► Attach a new rope with rope stocking to the old rope.

► Spool the old rope onto a winch.
> New rope is luffed.
► The rope must be pulled in until it reaches the winch.
► Detaching the rope stocking.
► Unwinding the old rope from the winch and winding it up onto the rope winder.
A WARNING
Improper detachment of the end of the rope from the drum!
Serious injury.
► Ensure that the rope is free from tension.
► Unreel the rope from the drum carefully.
► Detach the rope fixation point on the winch.

► Attach new rope to the rope fixing point of the winch.
► Switch on the engine.
► Wind up rope observing the required tensioning force.
► Before use, check to ensure that the newly fit rope is located correctly in the
grooves on drums and pulleys.
► Have the rope limit switch checked and adjusted by an authorised service engi
neer.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Ropes
► Hoist a light load (up to 10% of permitted rope pulling force) several times to
check that the rope is winding onto the drum correctly.
6.23.11 R etract ropes
NOTICE
Wrong winding of rope!
Damage to the rope, the winch and the pulleys.
► Do not exceed the prescribed maintenance and inspection intervals.

► Check winding state of the winch and pulleys.
► Check rigging material.
► Remedy errors and damage immediately.
In order to ensure perfect winding:

► Perform 3 drive cycles at reduced speed (30% of v(max)) and reduced load
(10% of SWL(max)).
► Perform 2 drive cycles with 1/3 SWL(max).
► Perform 2 drive cycles with SWL(max) at max. radius in line with the load chart.
► Check winding behaviour.
6.23.12 Lubricate ropes

Regular rope maintenance ensures safe operation of the crane and increases the
service life of the rope.
□ Suitable lubricant is available.
Note
(D Third-party ropes
► Observe lubricant selection of the respective rope manufacturer.
► Apply more lubricant on bending zones on winch drums and pulleys.

► Apply grease with a brush or high-pressure lubrication unit,
or
Spray lubricants containing solvents on rope.
copyright by
166516
Maintenance
rope drive
6 .2 4 r o p e d riv e
6.24.1 C hecking the rope drive

The service life of the rope depends to a large extent on checking of the rope drive.
Any fault on the rope drive will dannage the rope. The rope will reach the end of its
service life more quickly due to increased wear. The grooves of the winching drums
and the pulleys are therefore checked for wear using test templates.
Test templates are related to the nominal groove base diameter.

C hecking w inch drum groove base fo r w e a r

Ensure that the following conditions are satisfied;
□ A suitable test template is available.
Fig. 347: Permissible result when testing the groove base using a test template
1 Test template 2 Winch drum
The diameter of the measuring device (test template 1) must be virtually identical to
that of the groove base so that it fits easily into the groove. The groove diameter of
the winch drum 2 must be 4% to 8% larger than the diameter of the test template 1.
► Use the test template 1 to check each individual groove on the winch drum 2.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
ropedrive
Troubleshooting
Is the diameter of the test template not the same as the groove base of the winch
drum? Is there a crescent-shaped gap between the test template and the groove
base?
Fig. 348: Impermissible result when testing the groove base using a test template
1 Test template 2 Winch drum

► Smooth the surfaces of the grooves.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Rope pulleys
6 .2 5 R o p e p u lle y s
6.25.1 C h eck pulleys fo r ease o f m ovem ent

► Check pulleys for ease of movement.
If the pulleys do not move easily:
► Lubricate the pulley bearings (For more information see: 6.25.5 Lubricating the
pulley bearings, page 238).
6 .25 .2 C hecking steel pulleys fo r w ea r

The steel pulleys are checked in exactly the same way as the winch drum groove
base, in other words the radius of the grooves is checked using a test template.
The rope grooves often exhibit an imprint corresponding to the negative imprint of
the rope in question. The impressions of the individual strands in the rope grooves
are normal and not undesirable, since these produce a greater rope support
surface, which increases the service life of the rope. When the rope is changed,
the ridges must be removed and any sharp edges on the surface of the pulley
smoothed.
a A suitable test template is available.
Fig. 349: Checking steel pulleys for wear
1 Test template Maximum permissible wear on

pulley
2 Steel pulley
The maximum permissible wear A is 4% of the nominal rope diameter.

► Use the test template to check the radius of the groove in the pulley.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Rope pulleys
If the actual wear exceeds the maximum permissible wear:

► Replace the pulley.
6.25.3 C hecking plastic pulleys fo r w ear

The rope grooves often exhibit an imprint corresponding to the negative imprint of
the rope in question. The impressions of the individual strands in the rope grooves
are normal and not undesirable, since these produce a greater rope support
surface, which increases the service life of the rope. When the rope is changed,
the ridges must be removed and any sharp edges on the surface of the pulley
smoothed.
□ A suitable test template is available.
Fig. 350: Checking plastic pulleys for wear
1 Test template A Maximum permissible wear on

pulley
2 Plastic pulley
The maximum permissible wear A is 50% of the nominal rope diameter.

► Use the test template to check the radius of the groove in the pulley.
If the actual wear exceeds the maximum permissible wear:
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Rope pulleys
6.25 .4 C hecking pulleys fo r dam age
NOTICE
Pulleys placed in the ground without protection!
Damage to the pulleys.
► Pulleys must only be laid on the ground with protective equipment.
Fig. 351: Damaged pulley
1 Crack Nicks
The pulleys must be aligned with the running direction of the rope. They must also
be in good condition, without wobbles or any other damage.
► Check pulleys for damage (nicks, wobbles, cracks, notches, etc.).
If the pulley is damaged:

6.25 .5 Lubricating th e pulley bearings

□ Grease gun from Liebherr tool kit is at hand and filled with grease.
Ensure that the grease does not escape from or between the pulley bearings.
► Lubricate the pulley bearings on the slewing column head and boom head via
the grease nipples using a grease gun.
6.25.6 C hecking th e bearing fo r p roper seating and position
► Check the bearing for proper seating and position.

If the seating and position of the bearing or circlip is not correct:
► Correct the seating and position of the bearing.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Rope pulleys
6.25.7 C leaning plastic pulleys
NOTICE
Using dirty pulleys!
► Clean dirt, gum, etc. from the plastic pulleys.
NOTICE
Unauthorised cleaning agent!
► Only clean plastic pulleys with suitable cleaning agents.
Plastic pulleys are resistant to:

- Mineral oil
- Petrol
- Kerosene
- Diesel
Plastic pulleys are not resistant or not fully resistant to:

- Concentrated mineral acids (e.g. sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, nitric acid)
- Concentrated organic acids (e.g. formic acid)
- Concentrated bases (e.g. sodium, caustic potash solution or corrosive potas
sium salts)
- Alcohol other than ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol and propyl alcohol
- Inorganic chlorides, e.g. calcium, lithium chloride, magnesium chloride and zinc
chloride
► Clean plastic rope pulleys using a cleaning cloth and authorised cleaning
agents.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Cab
6 .2 6 C a b
6.26.1 C heck the w in d o w s of the cab fo r dam age

► Check the windows of the cab for damage.
If any of the cab windows are damaged;
► Change the window.
6.26 .2 C hecking th at th e cab d o o r and th e do o r lock w ork

properly
C hecking th e operation of th e cab door

► Check the operation of the cab door.
If the cab door does not move freely or does not latch in the open position:
► Spray the hinges with adhesive lubricant.
C hecking th e operation o f the do o r lock

► Check the operation of the door lock.
If the door lock is not operating correctly:
► Spray the locks with adhesive lubricant.
► Apply frost protection to the locks in the event of low ambient temperatures.
6.26 .3 C hanging th e w in d screen w ipers

a A suitable lifting platform is available.
□ Ring spanner with width across flats 13 is available.
□ Open spanner with width across flats 13 is available.
□ New Liebherr windscreen wiper is available.
NOTICE
Incorrect maintenance!
Risk of damage to the windscreen wiper nozzles.
► Note the windscreen wiper nozzles on the windscreen wiper mount.
A WARNING
Improper protection against falling.
Falling off the lifting platform
► Secure maintenance personnel with suitable safety equipment.
► Check personal safety equipment in line with manufacturer's specifications.
copyright by
240 IIE B H E R R SKCBW/N V001

166516
Maintenance
Cab
Fig. 352: Windscreen wiper
► Hold the screw with the open spanner and undo the nut using the ring spanner.
► Change the windscreen wiper.
Only tighten the screw by a certain degree so that the windscreen wiper can still
move freely.
► Place the screw through the mount and windscreen wiper.
► Tighten the nut using the ring spanner.
6.26.4 Filling th e w indscreen cleaning system

Make sure that:
□ suitable windscreen wash fluid is available.
copyright by
166516
Maintenance
Cab
Fig. 353: Windscreen wiper system containers
1 Cover (2x) 2 Container (2x)
The containers are behind the driver's seat in the cab.

► Open the cover.
NOTICE
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluid!
Damage to the system.
► Fill container exclusively with suitable windscreen washer fluid.
► Top up the windscreen washer fluid in the containers.

► Close the cover.
► If necessary clean the windscreen wiper nozzles on the windscreen wipers with
a needle.
I
ö
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
O perator's seat
6 .2 7 O p e r a to r 's s e a t
6.27.1 C hecking th at the d river’s s ea t w orks properly

► Check that the driver's seat works properly.
If the driver's seat is damaged or faulty in any way:
6
o
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Air conditioning*
6 .2 8 A ir c o n d itio n in g *
6.28.1 C hecking air cond itioning
A WARNING
Incorrect maintenance of the air conditioning system!
Poisoning and frostbite.
► Work on the air conditioning system must only be carried out by authorised
Liebherr maintenance personnel.
► Check system to ensure it is in good working order, free from leaks, clean and
securely seated.
► Check the functioning of ventilation flaps and outlets to ensure they are clean
and in good working order.
copyright by
166516
Maintenance
Machine care
6 .2 9 M a c h in e c a r e
6.29.1 C leaning the m achine

Liebherr recommends that the external machine parts are cleaned regularly to
maintain an even surface quality. This is strongly advised following work with highly
corrosive materials.
NOTICE
Unsuitable cleaning agent is used!
The surfaces will be damaged.
► Do not use any aggressive cleaning agents.
► Do not use any abrasive cleaning agents.
► Do not use any phosphate cleaners.
► Do not use and solvents or solvent-containing cleaning agents.
► Only use cleaning agent with a pH value of < 12.

□ Machine is switched off.
□ The machine has cooled down.
□ Electronic components are covered.
A CAUTION
Hot vapour!
Danger of scalding.
► Only use water temperature < 80 °C
NOTICE
Inadmissible use of the high-pressure cleaner!
Paint damage.
Damage to machine.
► Wash machine with at most 150 bar.
► Wash machine at a distance of at least 40 cm.
The water jet must not be directed onto the following components:
- Intake manifolds for drawing air to cool the engine
- machinery room
- Electrical plug-in connections
- Cab interior
► Clean the machine using a high-pressure cleaner.
copyright by
166516
Maintenance
Machine care
Note
► Dispose of the oil-stained tools and cleaning agents in accordance with national
and international guidelines and regulations.
► Cleaning water must pass through an oil separator before it enters the sewer
system.
6.29.2 C leaning th e hydraulic, w a te r and air coolers
Type o f d irt Method

Dry dust Clean with compressed air (maximum working pressure
3-4 bar)
Wet dust Clean with steam jet (maximum working pressure 3-4
bar)
Oily dust Clean with steam jet, adding a mild cleaning agent
(maximum working pressure 3-4 bar)
Tab. 39: Type of dirt
6.29.3 Preserving the m achine

□ Machine is switched off.
□ The machine has cooled down.
□ Suitable preservation agents are available in sufficient quantities (For more
information see: 6.2.9 Preservation medium (anti-corrosion coating),
page 170).
□ The appropriate tools and accessories are available.
a Wear protective clothing.
WARNING
A Insufficient or incorrect preservation agents are applied to the machine!
Risk of injury to the respiratory tract, suffocation.
► Wear breath protection.
► Spray all machined, but unpainted, parts external to the machine (e.g. pins,
bearings) with DINITROL 4010 or LP S 3 anti-corrosion coating agent.
► Spray all machined, galvanized, but unpainted, parts within the machine (e.g.
flanges, pins, screws, joints, casings, contact surfaces) with anti-corrosion
coating agent DINITROL 4010 or LP S 3.
► Spray the entire engine compartment with DINITROL 3650 anti-corrosion
coating agent.
► Allow a drying time of 24 hours then spray the entire engine compartment with
DINITROL 4010 anti-corrosion coating agent.
► Spray electrical components inside switch cabinets and terminal boxes as well
as plug-in connections and limit switches with LP S 1 anti-corrosion coating
agent.
► Spray screws on railings, boom walkways, steps, moving parts and floodlights
with LP S 3 anti-corrosion coating agent.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Machine care
► Wrap connections, threaded joints, valves of the hydraulic system with DENSO
tape.
► Do not use LP S 3 anti-corrosion coating agent in the engine compartment.
copyright by

166516
Maintenance
Machine care
copyright by

166516
Checking hoist and luffing gear limit switch for
In d e x function 213
Checking hydraulic hoses and hose lines 210
Checking personal protective gear 216
Checking plastic pulleys for wear 237
Checking pulleys for damage 238
Checking screw and terminal connections 212
Checking steel pulleys for wear 236
Checking that the cab door and the door lock work
properly 240
Checking that the driver's seat works properly 243
Accumulator 155,207 Checking the accumulator 208
Add Selection page 142 Checking the bearing for proper seating and
Additional cab equipment 116 position 238
Admissible pitch play 190 Checking the bearing lubrication 187
Aggregate 31 Checking the emergency stop 214
Air conditioning* 94, 114, 157, 244 Checking the fill level of the lubrication pumps 218
Appropriate use 23 Checking the function of the central lubrication 218
Approved anticorrosion agents (inhibitors) without Checking the gearbox oil level 182, 185, 191
antifreeze 169 Checking the hydraulic oil level 196
Approved anticorrosion/antifreeze agents 168 Checking the hydraulic oil tank gate valve 107
Approved pre-mixed coolants 168 Checking the lubrication points 219
Areas of responsibility 39 Checking the operation of the cab door 240
Attaching the maintenance ladder 177 Checking the operation of the door lock 240
Checking the proper seals and inspection dates on
the fire extinguishers 215
B Checking the rope drive 234
Banksman 40, 41 Checking the rope kicker 194
Boom 33 Checking the ropes for deformations 221
Brief work interruption 130 Checking the slewing bearing pitch play 188
Burns 51 Checking the time intervals of the lubrication
pumps 219
Checking winch drum groove base for wear 234
Checks before start up 107
Cab 157,240 Chemical burns 52
Cabin 32 Cleaning plastic pulleys 239
CAN Configuration page 145 Cleaning the hydraulic, water and air coolers 246
CAN Line Information page 145 Cleaning the machine 245
Carrying out a hydraulic oil analysis 197 Cleaning the magnetic rod 201
Central lubrication system 115 Cleaning the magnetic rod in the return filter 200
Central lubrication system* 36, 101 Cleaning the slip ring unit 211
Changing the accumulator 208 Clients page 147
Changing the pressure filter 205 Closing the return filter 202
Changing the windscreen wipers 240 Commissioning after brief interruption of work 130
Check pulleys for ease of movement 236 Construction conditions 25
Check ropes for abrasion 224 Control and operating elements 75
Check ropes for corrosion 223 Control panel grab operation* 88
Check ropes for the effects of heat 225 Control panel hook fixing point* 89
Check that the hydraulic cylinder fits properly and Control panel man riding* 90
does not leak 209 Control panel spreader operation* 91
Check the hydraulic system for leaks 195 Control panel swing lock* 87
Check the rope for diameter shrinkage 220 Control panel X20 83
Check the rope for number of permitted wire Control stand 76
breaks 226 Coolant 164
Check the windows of the cab for damage 240 Coolant mixing ratio 168
Checking air conditioning 244 Coolant specification 167
Checking emergency descent rescue equipment 217 CO RR ECTIO N page 143
copyright by

166516
Index
H
Danger 24 Hand pump with tank* 35
Danger zone 43 Hand pump without tank* 34
Decommissioning 130 Hand signals 61
Decommissioning prior to brief interruption of Hand signals for lifting operations in accordance with
work 130 ASME/ANSI B30.5 67
Definition 24 Hazards 48
Diesel engine coolant 167 Hoist winch 191
Diesel engine lubricating oil 164 Hoisting gear 120
Display Configuration page 145 How to respond in the event of a current transfer 58
Distributor gearbox 153,181 How to respond in the event of a fire 59
Draining the gearbox oil 183,193 Hydraulic cylinders 209
Draining the hydraulic oil 199 Hydraulic energy 50
Drive Function page 144 Hydraulic filter 155,205
Hydraulic hoses 155, 210
Hydraulic oil 163,169
Hydraulic oil tank 155,196
Electric motor 152, 179 Hydraulic system 155,195
Electrical energy 49
Electrical system 155, 211
Electromagnetic influence 54 I
Emergency descent rescue equipment 125, 156, 217 Implementation instructions for the maintenance 175
Emergency operation 134 Inappropriate use 24
Emergency stop 27, 129, 214 Initial filling 169
Engine oil 163 INPUT/OUTPUT page 141
Environment 58 Installing the maintenance ladder 176
Environmental conditions 26 Interim lubrication 115
Explanation of symbols used 82
Exposure to wind 54
Language Selection page 144

Left control lever 77
Filling capacities table 161 Liebherr oil diagnosis system 172
Filling the windscreen cleaning system 241 Lift boom 123
Fire and explosion 52 Lift load 120
Fire classes 59 Lifting device 154
Fire extinguishers 215 Lighting 112
Fire protection signs 47 Lightning strike 57
Firefighting 59 Limit switch 213
First response to a current transfer 58 Litronic® testing system 139
Fuel 166 Load indication T300* 96
Fuel at low temperatures (winter operation) 166 Locking and unlocking slewing gear lock 135
Fuel specifications 166 Locking the swing lock 135
Function assignment of left control lever buttons 77 Locking the swing lock* 130
Function assignment of left control lever movement Long interruption of work 130
directions 78 Lowering a load 121
Function assignment of right control lever buttons 79 Lowering the boom 124, 135
Function assignment of right control lever movement Lowering the load 135
directions 80 Lubricants and consumables 158
Lubricate ropes 233
Lubricating oil change intervals 165
Lubricating oil specification 164
Gear oil 163 Lubricating oil viscosity 164
General hand signals in accordance with BGV A8 62 Lubricating the pulley bearings 238
Grease 163 Lubrication chart 161
Greasing the ball bearings 180 Lubrication diagram 159
Greasing the toothing 187 Lubrication system 157,218
copyright by

166516
Index
Luffing gear 122 Preservation medium (anti-corrosion coating) 170

Luffing gear operation 123 Preserving the machine 246
Luffing ropes 231 Preserving the piston rods of all exposed
cylinders 209
Priority Level page (for Liebherr service personnel
M only) 145
l\/lachine care 245 Product description 21
IVIachine operator 40, 41 Prohibition signs 44
l\/lachinery room 30
Main screen page 140
IVIaintenance 151
l\/laintenance and inspection schedule 151 Replacing filter mats 211
Maintenance ladder* 176 Replacing fuses and lamps 211
Maintenance personnel 40, 42 Requirements to personnel 41
Mandatory signs 47 Retract ropes 233
Manufacturer 39 Rigger 40, 41
M DE/PDEpage 147 Right control lever 79
Meaning of the safety signs 44 rope drive 234
Measurement 189 Rope pulleys 157,236
Measuring points 188 Ropes 157,220
Mechanical action 48
MEMORY page 141
M E S S A G E S page 143
Mixing 170 Safety devices 26
Modem Function page 144 Safety instructions 39
Moving the hook into horizontal hook fixing point* 132 Sampling Trace page 146
Moving the hook into vertical hook fixing point* 131 Screen pages 140
Moving the hook out of horizontal hook fixing Screenwash fluid 164
point* 110 Select File Load page 142
Moving the hook out of vertical hook fixing point* 110 Select File Save page 142
S E L E C T page 141
Selecting crane operation 117
N Selecting the operation mode 117
Noise emissions 26 Setting the lubrication time 115
Setting the pause time 115
Slewing column 28
Slewing column overview 28
Oil analysis kit 164 Slip ring unit 156
Oil concentrate 163 Snow and ice loads 56
Oil filling schedule 160 S P E C IA L FUNCTIONS page 144
Opening the return filter 200 Special hand signals for attachment operations 64
Operating hoisting gear 120 Starting engine 109
Operating the air conditioning 114 Start-up 109
Operating the signal horn 116 Stepping on the machine 106
Operating the swing 118 Steps 106
Operation 105 Storing ropes 228
Operation emergency stop 129 Sulphur content in fuel 166
Operational faults, diagnosis 139 Swing 118, 153, 185
Operator's seat 243 Swing connection 153,187
Ordering data 163 Swing lock 153
Overview 139 Switch cabinet X I 99
Owner 39 Switching access lighting on 113
Switching off the ignition 133
Switching off the main feed 133
Switching on helicopter warning light* 113
PÅ amplifier* 97 Switching on the ignition 109
Personal protective equipment 42, 216 Switching on the main feed 109
Poisoning and suffocation 53 Switching on the searchlight* 112
copyright by

166516
Index
Switching the engine off 133

System Language Selection page 146
System Status page 146
Taking an oil sample 173

Tank filling system 203
Tanking hydraulic oil 204
Technical condition of the machine 39
Technical data 25
Time Function page 145
Topping up the gear oil 186
Topping up the gearbox oil 183, 192
Topping up with hydraulic oil 197
Transporting ropes 228
Turn crane to the left 118
Turning on the cabin lighting 113
Turning the crane to the right 119
Turning the slewing column 135
Type plate 21
u
Understanding the oil diagnosis report 174
Unlocking the swing lock 136
Unlocking the swing lock* 111
Use of the fire extinguisher 60
Using the emergency descent rescue equipment 125
V
Vibrations 26
w
Walk round 107
Warning signs 45
Water (fresh water) 167
What to do in dangerous situations 58
Whole machine 25, 152
Whole machine overview 25
Winches 153
Winding ropes 230
Work area 43
copyright by

166516
4
fttör*“ "t^äW^y:
iSWcf-
T e c h n ic a l in f o r m a tio n E N
Type:
C B W 5 0 ( 4 0 ) / 2 9 .2 ( 3 1 .5 ) S T
Serial number:
1 6 6 5 1 4 - 5 1 7
001 - 1 2 .0 7 .2 0 1 2 /Iw n n u m i
T a b le o f C o n te n t
1. GENERAL DRAWINGS
1 05 0 21 0 7 - G .A. C B W 5 0 (4 0 )/2 9 .2 (3 1 .5) S T (5 1 72 001 0 0 00 000 002)
1 05 0 21 5 6 - R O P E S (5172 721 00 00 000 001)
2. HYDRAULIC DRAWINGS
1 05 0 44 9 6 - D IA G R A M H Y D R (5172 9 70 00 00 001 004)
3. ELECTRIC DRAWINGS
1 05 0 46 5 9 - P O W E R S U P P L Y (5172 600 00 00 031 001)
105 0 46 6 2 - C IR C U IT D IA G R A M EL (5172 6 0 0 00 00 061 007)
1 6 6 5 1 4 -5 1 7 /0 0 1
G E N E R A L D R A W IN G S 1
166514-517/ 001
? I 1 IZH
MAX. RADIUS 31500
= AENDERUNGSINDEX
II1 INDEX OF ALTERATION
SCHWERPUNKT
® CENTRE OF GRAVITY
s- REFERENZPUNKT /REFERENCE POINT "A”
1
SCHWERPUNKT/ C.O.G. GEWICH' fS Ä T 5172 001 00 00 000 002
X{mml Y(mm) 2(mm) WEIGHTIkg G.A. CBW50I 40 /29.2(31.5 ST
KRANKOMPLETT1CRANECOMPLETE 7102 8 3403 52358 G.A. CBW50I 40i/29!2f31.5 ST
AUSLEGERKOMPLETT/ JIBCOMPLETE 13645 -17 4723 22691 SI10502107 Ewenef/orttfnoMr
OREHSAEULEKOMPLETT/ SLEWINGCOLUMNCOMPLETE 167 30 2220 27288 ilE B H E R R
UebhWT^yiCCtaoQmbH Nam»/name
UNTERFLASCHE/ LOWERBLOCK 32800 0 3180 1250
SEIL/ROPE 16400 0 5670 1129 ig zvvfsdwnMaO-,Form-undPi
S2800-I GRUNDSAEULEKOMPLETT/ BASECOLUMNCOMPLETE 0 0 0 41659
1 •~'"l I 5 ZE 1^ I
1-FALL
A U F T R A G S S P E Z IF IS C H E S E IL E IN S C H E R U N G (E N )
S IE H E G Ü L T IG E T R A G L A S T T A B E L L E N IN
A U F T R A G S S T Ü C K L IS T E (N )
F O R O R D E R R E L A T E D R O P E -R E E V IN G (S ) R E F E R
T O V A L ID L O A D C A P A C IT Y C H A R T S IN
O R D E R P A R T LIS T (S )
NUR SYMBOLHAFTE DARSTELLUNG!

pictorial representation only!
drowjngno. 5172 721 00 00 000 001
B E S E IL U N G
ROPES
1 0 5 0 2 1 5 6 I » " " ' “ *« Projewi./proi.mgr.
2 -F A L L S E IL F IX P U N K T UEBHERR
Liebherr-Wei1<NenzinqGmbH
2 -F A L L R O P E A N C H O R A G E
Ii 2 -F A L L S E IL F IX P U N K T -
4 -F A L L S E ILF IX P U N K T - IS0 13920-BF
4 -F A L L R O P E A N C H O R A G E ml telerancASISO27S8•fflK•E
2 -F A L L R O P E A N C H O R A G E iraltetersneesforweldadeonsnieüonsIS013920•BF
ln«caiionafnofacetextur«inlaehnicalproductdoeumsntstionISO 1302 BlalUV«n/sheei/ctf
Ii
'i
DETAIL "1"
HAKENBETRIEB
r HOOKOPERATION
II/ "#< -Ii"

(l '
2-FALL 3-FALL
/
/I
/ /il' V
t f , J- , II ' ' ^ r,- , , j I/';;

ff S/ L I ‘' I^ V
« J /^ / ^~i '' '1 ' / r - - I " •-' < ,0i
V -M
DETAIL "I"
SPREADERBETRIEB
SPREADEROPERATION
' 5172 721 00 00 000 001

eenennung B E S E IL U N G
RO PES
D E T A I L "I" eremnof / ori^ lo f
Liebherr-Werfc Nenzing GmbH ind./idx. lAnd.yrw.
MnOstab/scsla
6tatlAan/ah««(M'
li-
2-FALL 4-FALL
' 5172 721 00 00 000 001

BESEILUNG
ROPES
S I S . '1 0 5 0 2 1 5 6 1 ° -« "'"« ”
L IE B H E R R
Liebherr-Wéf1< Nenzing GmbH Ind./Mx lAnd./rov.
sntSO2768-mK-E
mISO13820-BF
MsOsUb/wale
Irvtotlonafsurfacetraauteintechnical productdeeiimentaäanIS013C2 aooAon/shaMÜr
1 I 2 3 \ . < I 5 I 7 — r 10 I 11 I 12 14 I 15
2 1 3 1 4 I 7 10 [ 11 12 I 13~~ I 14 I 15~
3-FALL
4-FALL
2-FALL
^ 5172 721 00 00 000 001

B«nan~ng BESEILUNG
ROPES
10502156 ProiBMl./prel,mgr.
L IE B H E R R
Liebhea-Werk Nenzing GmbH Name/name
mISO 13920-BF
GenerB)tolonncnISO2768-oiK•E MaOsUb/seals
tndteatlenoI surfaeatanSuniniscMeal p( BtattAan/shsMW
1 I
N ^ I-
Jj X tn
ro Q) ”
£2 ' 5
o5
c (D 05
ACHTUNG:
0 JZ C
ro O) c
SEILFIXPUNKT AUSSEN AN DER TROMMEL
ATTENTION:
3 (U ° ROPE ANCHORAGE OUTSIDE THE DRUM
m ■G‘9
^ Q .^
0 to '
'îi
> (C ' - '
c CL C3)
^ ^
E’ l ' ^
3 o Q)
1 ro-^
B
■E
0) - §
S E^
I i ä)
N "-S
^-3
^03 o —>
P O
fe.S«
ro
E o
S “
O) o
= t
en (U
c j=
;ro jQ
en 0
N-<
c 'S
1^ . ANZUGSDREHMOMENT, FESTIGKEITSKLASSE
“ II & ANZAHL DER SCHRAUBEN SIEHE
g Q.S?
° 0 )^
WINDENZEICHUING.
.S’ m ^
GEWINDE GEFETTET, KEINE MOLYKOTE
OT ro (D ODER GRAPHITTE VERWENDEN.
l i s
D TIGHTENING TORQUE, BOLT GRADE
o | | & QUANTITY OF THE BOLD SEE
° iS < : DRAWING OF WINCH.
THREAD GREASED, USE NO MOLYKOTE
-2 T3
OR GRAPHITIZED GREASES.
“ cp cs
■o
g o §,
5V c
0 )-<
c = .
3 ro c / drawing no. 5 1 7 2 7 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
•E ? -S
0) « "t: Benennung B E S E IL U N G
c O) o
0) c ■<- / description
O i .52 R O PE S
0) 2 i_-
o 5-o£ G ew iclit / weight Projektl. / proj. mgr. 23.09.2008 BURGER
^ -o
5^0) Ersteller / originator 23.09.2008 LEDERLE
= h- "O
<u -Z ■>
E
o ro
o
L IE B H E R R
t <2
ro 2
Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH Ind. / idx. Änd. / rev. Dat. / date Name / name
'S ,« Allgemeintoleranzen ISO 2768 - mK - E

Allgemeintoleranzen für Schweißkonstruktionen ISO 13920 - BF
3 ro
Angabe der Oberflächenbeschaffenheit in der technischen Produktdokumentation ISO 1302 GAD - PTC
Zusammenhang zwischen Maß-, Form- und Parallelitätstoleranzen DIN 7167
i > General tolerances ISO 2768 - mK - E Maßstab / scale
N | .| | 1:1
General tolerances fo r welded constructions ISO 13920 - BF
%
Indication of surface texture in technical product documentation ISO 1302 Blatt/von / sheet/of
o u>>2 Relationship between dimensional tolerances and form and parallelism tolerances DIN 7167 6/6
A4
H Y D R A U L IC D R A W IN G S 2
166514-517/ 001
r
;i,-
i as h I nÜ jjø /3 8 0 ; J0/380 I 50/380
=2 (5014235i min A6VM ^50
■1H-S22 •10 é •6
Dj = 735 mm
i =63.94
£
Seilø = 25 mm Bl — 1~
E41U Pst MB MB Pst MB I Pst
t i
U -
R ÆD ^H-S2B 4H-S26 NRS D r e h w e r k

HBIU r)A ^
H41
350 400 s I ew g e a r
DB6K - u
R = 1 ,0 T HN-Begrenz.
BVG-12R-H
hg lim it a tio n L Y - ^ ■g:
BKH-3/8"
rij^= 1600 min-’ ---1X 1----
Q- = 175 ------
fl DG2
HG3 bulkheadplate 'D rt = 15,4
HÎR KHM heb en /h o i s t in g D63R
Vgmax -D X l-
r e c h t s ^ r ig h t N R S /R F K RNSCHLUSS HRNDPUMPE
l i HX3-
KHM se n ke n d loiuer in g c onnectio n hand pump
iT2 MB I JMPI I in k s - ^ le ft
HG3R RNSCHLUSS HÅNDPUMPE
---X
-o-X *¥ connection hand pump ---- 1 II
t f 1 * < X
MK VF VG ) EN05CHRLTER •I 1 ; ;
"1 1 1! 4D-Y07
EG2 KH3-R3/B limiting switch 11
11 1 11
H52 4WE6D
--0 - — 4x 'IHEGD T X
RHV IBLR D60
h e b e n /h o i s t
RHV -12 LR
4H-Y01: 4WHGC
»— 5 - 6bar
P1
RN5CHLU55 HflNBPUMPE S 30 R27 5 bar
connectio n hand pump --------------O -------------- H33
IBl s e n k e n / 1oil)
--------------O -------------- Q 4H- S24
s 30 A27R 5 bar
'a l RI Bl !al Fil Bl :a2 P2 B2 NV10S |>(p]2 4H-Y02; »5 . 5^
R2 P2 HED
ø0,5 s\;t - r is
Tanklei_tungen H50
tank I ines f-
ø0,5 ø0,5
T2 *1B2 4H- S25
TI h e b e n /h o i s t — 3 ^ » 5 ,5
2,0 bar
/ / / 4E-Y01 HED
D23 X
3?0 P3
0 0,5
— -k
R51 R52
S illz U s e n k e n / loui 0l,2
GLD 25
E -VWvV 4E-Y02 0l,2 ><
he a te r 400
-Ot X P4
V T 2 13 P
temp 7 B4
’,3 P _T_2^
X23 H23 E23 r - ! ^ :o2i| IH21

B4 RGG
LS2
P1 P2
LSI I MLS “IPl |bl .bl ;b2 P1 I LSDl
4NEGD
*
BKH-R3/B re c h ts /rig h t
------- c x h - - - A 4D-Y01
Drehwerk Wippwerk
H20 >< slaw gear luff gear
4A-M01 P1
50Hz n= 1484 min -1
( M \ n =195 kW 4T-Søg
V / 60Hz n= 1784 min -1 B1 I in k s /le ft
Hubwerk
hoist gear
N=22D kW m 9 R l-2 7 4D-Y02 4WEGD
LSI P1 HRl P3 iFa X P2
50Hz 60Hz SBO210

m
Q-222 l/min 0 -2 6 7 l/min 4NEGT 0. IG B2 HG7
Ap =350 bar Ap =350 bar
R=1,36 R=1 , 5
(k> N=95 kW N=105kW nmin= 500 fnin"' RHD 18 L
STI nmax= 2000 mi n-'
B I fl
RI
R2G
50Hz 60Hz
4D-Y12 -- <o> -
2 5 5 (2 3 5 ) 0-2 22 l/min Q-267 1/rain ' K 75 kW
Ap =3 5 0 bar Ap=350 bar WV10S
5155.007-D G eschwindigkeiten
R= 1 ,3 B R=1,5 5 0 H z
2551235) N=95 kW N=105kW w orking speeds
RHD 10 S
K la m m e r w e r ts f ü r 60Hz
r A clamp a c c o u n t f o r 60Hz 4WE6D H u b w e rk/h o istin g gear fo n o t 33 m/min
t|5Q ” 0
L FBN1E0 Z2SG HL, 4D-YI1 50 t 15,2 m/min
UEV-A2Z RH2 P
R2 X D re h w e rk /s ie w in g gear 0,6 rev/m in
ST2 1
1
1
------
100 s e c/re v
Ö 1
>i<
I----------
50Hz 6GHz -J Wipp- E in zie h w ø rk/lu ffin g gear 115 sec
------- ' H4
1464 1784 ™ iO 1!
0=35 l/min 0=42 l/min 1- _ ZU
MV53E -T j VM5/210B KF ------------------- LJit-
a p =25 bar &p=25 bar
N=1,4 kW N=1,7 kW Ä2 G eschwindigkeiten ©
12^5'
>1<I
:ls 2 P2 HR2 P4 SiSZ! w orking speeds
N R S /R F K
BVSGG12
P tT - 33 m/min
H u b w e rk/h o istin g gear ^ 0 t
50Hz 6DHz
, 148^ 178/! ödhO -
12-S 50 t 17 m/min
0 0=56 l/min Q=57 l/min RF
Ap=65 bar Ap=85 bar D re h w e rk /s ie w in g gear 0,6 rev/m in
N=6 kW N=7,5 kW
R2! 100 s e c /re v
Wipp- E in zie h w e rk/lu ffing gear 115 sec

CBW 5 0 ( 4 0 ) / 2 9 , 2 ( 3 1 ,5) Ls
Benennung/description Zeichnungsnummer: / drawing no.: Blott/sheet
#X E l n s t e I 1anweI sung s i e h e B l a t t 2 * sie h e B l a t t 3 D ru c k ta b e lle

A2 S c h e m a H y d r
4
3
106232
97187
29.06.11 Vrisk
20,09,10 Schworzhans 5 1 7 2 - 9 7 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 0 4
#X o d j u s t m e n t i n s t r u c t i o n lo o k a f s h e e t 2 » lo o k a t s h e e t 3 p re s s u re list L IE B H E R R d i a g r am h y d r 2
1
94086
838 08
07.06.10 Gassner
Identnummer:
25.05.09 Schworzhans ident no,:
Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH 1 0 5 0 U 9 6
CAD-PROMIS Copyright© arstellt/issued 06.0^.09 Schworzhans geprüft/approved 06.04,09 Kräutler Ind. Änderung Datum Name
fwen’i.n.jrflsit.i stior i r«!Tiii>9s>vtn«: I ^«r>g no Bo!i/5he-H
.Xg^~;y ■'-Zijim.,
00 60
j «X CinsKil I ;-Vi >sijnq nflhe I I! 2 1 !’ öi.ilt 3 D:ud ;coe;ie | A2 Gchem c Hv-:ir r4-
37 ?o ya '0 !.cf>ieoilh5n5
tic
, n
00
5 i7 ; - g 7 o oc Q ü i-o o i 1
j «/ ailiu5lm«ni mstnjftton looi <3i snoet : | j . i*r,k oi sn«.»t ? i-oss..-:» ii<:( j E . B E B B IE B S iK a n qJr ofT h y' d f ^
; ■: aonsr.si
LteOfwn-wetk. Neoing OmW
C«0-r?CMS C^p.rigM.r 1^60 03
-Ii'» jIct>* f?h ft$jgft'fuit/fippiov.vlj 06.0* Ü? | /roytlai iir,] ArJpnj-3 Doi'jm !)jisa 10504495 i
©
3
D R U C K S P E IC H E R
V gnnin - E in s te llu n g = 94 cm /u
V g m in - a d ju s tm e n t D re s sL ire a c c u m u la to r
V gm ax - E in s te llu n g =160 cm /u
I i
V gm ax - a d ju s tm e n t
TTTTTTTT
A B c
Bezeichnung Volumen Vorspanndruck

Typ stuck
description volume pre-charge
NR. IDENT NR. type piece
(max. Druck bar) pressure
(max. pressure bar) Idm^ ] [bar]
1 0 5 3 8 4 3 . SBO 210 0 ,1 6 1
Y = 1 8 , 5 mm
UM DIE SICHERHEIT DES GERÄTES ZU GEVi/ÄHRLEISTEN, MÜSSEN DIE

Vgmin [X] Schraube 100 A 6 V M
DRUCKSPEICHER ALLE 2 JAHRE ÜBERPRÜFT ODER AUSG ETAUSCHT WERDEI

Vgntax [Y] Schraube 80 M o t o r
To ensure the safety of the lifting appliance, the pressure
accumulators have to be checked or replaced every two years.
Benennung/descrlption Zeichnungsnummsr: / drawing no.- Blatt/stieet

A 4 S c h e m a H y d r 5 1 7 2 - 9 7 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 0 4 2
4 106232 29,06.11 Vrisk
d I a g r am h y d r 3 97187 20,09.10 Schwarzhans vcn/ot
Identnummer
? 9<06B 03 05,10 Gassner ident no.:
L iebherr-W erk N erizing GmbH 0 5 0 4 4 9 6
CAO-PROMIS Copyright© erstellt,'issued 03.05.10 Schwarzhans gepruft/approved 03.05.10 Kräutler Ind. Änderung Datum Name 4
A u s g e f ü l Ä E in s te ü a n w e is u n g v e rb ie ib jÄ im K ra n a kt, K o pie an TBH
D r u c k t a b e / l e
C o m p l e t e3 sa ^ C h e c k lis t to be filed in CTane F ile. C op y to TBH
p r e s s u r e / / 5' t
E in s te llu n g le d ig lic h ü b e rp rü fe n i/o n ly to che cl< a d ju s trn e n fl (n /a n ic h t verw endet / not a p p lie d )
B e ze ich n u n g K o o rd in a te n "So/ /" D ruck I s t - E i n s t e l lung D u rc h s c h a lte n Is t- L in s te llu n g P rü fsta n d Is t- E in s te llu n g Übergabe
C d ic u ld te d
I n d e n t i - f i c a t son C o o rd in a te s p re ssu re a c tu a l-a d ju s t. fu n c tlo n a lte s t a c tu a l-a d ju s t. te s ts ta n d a c tu a l-a d J u s t. d e li very
SheetNo.Xyy b a r b ä r Sign, b y P e r s o n a l No. b ä r Sign, by P e r s o n a l No. b a r Sign, b y P e r s o n a l No.
4 H - S 2 1 1 . 4/R 40
4H-522 1 . 4/R 285
4H-S23 1 . 3/R 225
4H-S24 1 . 10/C * 5 , 5
4H-S25 1 . 10/D * 5 , 5
4H-S2G 1. 4/B 400
4H-S27 1. 3/R 400
4H-S28 1 .4 /B 350
R2G 1 ,5 /F 65
R4 1. 4/G 28
R50 1. 3/D 370
R50 1 . 3/D 400
D23 1. B/D 1 2 - lB
D23 1 . 6 /D 3 15
D42 1 . 8 /G 8
DU 1 . 7/R 5 0 /3 8 0
DU 1. ?/R 5 0 /3 8 0
DV 1 . 8 /R 5 0 /3 8 0
DV 1 . 9/R 5 0 /3 8 0
DW 1 . 10/R 5 0 /3 8 0
A u s fü h re n d e r M o n te u r / C o m m is io n in g E n g in e e r Name: Name: Name:
Da t a ! D a t a. ' D ata :
A uf t ragsnummer :
O rder-num be r : S ig n a tu re : S ig n a tu re : S ig n a tu re :
Benennung/descnption Zeichriungsnummer: / drawing nö.: ßlatt/sheel

A 4 S c h e m a H y d r 5 1 7 2 - 9 7 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 0 4 3
d I a g r am h y d r identnummer yon/of
Lieb h err-W e rk N erizing GmbH ident nö.:
Vrisk gaprüft/approved 16.06.11 Kräutler Ind. Andsrung 0 5 G U 9 6 4
CAD-PROMIS Copyright© etstellt/issued 16.06.11 Dotum Name
A u s g e f ü l Ä E in s te lla n w e is u n g v e rb le ib m K ra n a kt, K opie on TBH
D r u c k t a b e } J e
C o m p le te a C h e c k lis t to be filed in f o a' n e F ile. C opy to TBH
p r e s s u r e / / s t
E in ste llu n g le d ig lich ü b e rp rü fe n i/o n ly to ci'>ecl< a d ju s tm e n t! (n /a n ic h t verw endet / not a p p lie d )
B e ze ich n u n g K o o rd in a te n “S o / / " D ruck I s t - E i n s t e / lung D u rc h s c h a l ten Is t- E in s te llu n g P rü fs ta n d Is t- E in s t e Ilu n g Ü bergabe

A
C d I CU I d t e d
In d e n t i- f ic a t lo n C oordI n a tes p re ssu re a c tu a l-a d ju s t. fu n c tlo n a lte s t a c tu a l-a d ju s t. te s ts ta n d actu a / - a d ju s t . d e h very
SheetN o.X/Y b a r b a r S ig n , by P e rso n al No. b a r S ig n , by P e rso n al No. b a r S ig n , b y P e rso n al No.
DW 1 . 10/R 5 0 /3 8 0
E23 . 5/D 150
E23 ,5 /D 380
E4 l U ,5 /R 450
E4 1 V . B/R 450
H23 . 4/D 150
H23 . 4/D 380
Hn . 1/F 22
HH . 1/G
O "3
i_ L.
HR . 2/F 2 5 5 (2 3 5
HR . 2/G 2 5 5 (2 3 5
HU , 2 /B 450
HU ,2 /B 450
X2 3 . 3/D 380
X23 .4 /D 150
A u s fü h re n d e r M o n te u r / C o m m is io n in g E n g in e e r N dm e: Ndme: Name: D
D ata : D ata : D ata :

Au f t r a g s n u m m e r
Order-numbe r : S ig n a tu re : S ig n a tu re : S ig n a tu re :
Benennung/description Zeichnunasnummer: / drawing nö.- eiatt/shest

S c h e m a H y d r 5 1 7 2 - 9 7 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 0 4 4
d I a g r am h y d r Identnummer von/ot
Idönl no/
L iebherr-W erk N enzing GmbH 0 5 0 U 9 6
Vrisk geprüft/opproved 16.06.11 Kräuller Ind. Änderung 4
CAD-PROMIS Copyright© erstetit/issued 16.06.11 Datum Ndme
CO
00
E L E C T R IC D R A W IN G S
166514-517/001
C R A N E TY P E : C B W S T A N D A R D 1 9 5 /2 2 0 k W
K R A N T Y P :
O R D E R N O :
A U F T R A G S N R .
P R O JE C T :
P R O JE K T :
Pow er calculation methods: Power sudp Iv tolerances:

Pnom Is calculated as the relevant interm ittent power requirem ent All pow er supplies to the crane have to
fo r 40% interm ittent duty. The crane main drive is designed be within the follow ing tolerances:
according to this value (S6-40% rating).
-AC steady state +/- 10% volts
+/- 5% frequency
-AC transient +/- 20% volts

+/- 10% frequency
-DC +/- 10% volts
Fault level:
Protected power supplies shall be provided to the crane.
The short circuit capacity of the crane electrical sw itchgear
is based on the follow ing max. short circuit fault level at
the crane term ination point:
main supply : max. 42 KA rms

aux. supply : max. 10 KA rms
LIEBHERR-WERK NENZING GMBH drawing no.: assemblygroup sheet

83972 21.09.09 IwnsiwO Erstellt 27.10.08 outlinepowersupply Zeichnungsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 031 001 Blatt
ind; mod.no.; A-6710 NENZING
Ind; Änd. Nr.:
date
Datum
name
Name
approved
21.09.09 twnkltO
Copyiighl(c)
Uitieberrechl (c)
ÜbersichtStromversorgung ident. no.:
Identnr.: 10504659 location
Ort____
C R A N E T Y P E :
K R A N TY P :
iS ss CBW STANDARD
I l l
E X X
0> r- T- Ii d
S, 8
O R D E R N O :
A U F T R A G S N R .:
m a in s u p p ly
4 0 0 V ,5 0 H z ,3 p h ., 1 9 5 k W o r
A 4 4 0 V ,6 0 H z ,3 p h ., 2 2 0 k W
a u x . s u p p ly
2 2 0 V ,5 0 H z ,3 p h ., 8 k W o r
magn. 6-13xltherm. _ p 2 2 0 V ,6 0 H z ,3 p h ., 8 k W
4.65KA
therm. 250-500A
357A
(j^02 ^1_x70__
For power requirements calculation
method please refer to front sheet.
■
fl)g
E
<u P u I start
600A 6 00 A 6 00 A
1x600A Ö5
(KW) (A) (A)
PE
195/ 350/ 719/
main motor S6,40%ED
c z iz z r' 220 354 746
^te j_ _
I
400V.50Hz,3Ph or PE
440V.60Hz.3Ph emergency stop
main power supply on turning ladder
ALL SHIPYARD CABLES ARE TO BE

Note1: shipyard cable CONNECTED TO THE SLIPPING COLLECTOR;
83972 issued LIEBHERR-WERK NENZING GMBH drawing no.: sheet

Erstellt
A-6710 NENZING
outlinepowersupply Zeichnungsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 031 001 Antage Biatt
ind;
Ind;
mod.no.; date
Änd. Nr.: Datum
name
Name
approved Copyright (c)
Urtieberrecht (c)
ÜbersichtStromversorgung ident. no.:
Identnr.: 10504659
location
Ort__
10504659 I 3 -
IS
w'p.
:? control voltage
Q) j5 -_
S. lighting crane
S
g : o ^
(D
Iss
power socket
in switch cabinet X1
_____ lighting inside

I -( X ) switch cabinet X I
1 X 15W
standstill
heating
1 x90W standstill heating
switch board
-V 1 x30W
|l° 3 g
l ^ iii
:s a :
standstill heating
^ S s
E - motor
o :
2x50W
X spare
-CD &
S
I- i
ä o
CO 5
3 ^
1 1
© heating cabin
o> en -Hlllll- 1 x 2000W
I^ §<
■ V
I f l CD
"Z w w
I Ii
fO P
X T '
n §
spare
stadard light
1 X 70W inside
slewing column
ng
stadard light
1 x 7 0 W inside
slewing column
äS -X T
I I stadard light
1 x 7 0 W inside
P slewing column
P '
So-
§ 5 Ö'
g (Q ä
O)
en o '" cabin
CD ■a.
§ stadard light
I 1 x70W
cabin inside
base column slip ring element slewing column

C R A N E T Y P E : C B W S T A N D A R D 1 2 0 -2 2 0 k W
K R A N T Y P :
O R D E R N O :
A U F T R A G S N R .
P R O JE C T :
P R O JE K T :
b a s ic w ir in g d ia g r a m
G r u n d - S c h a ltp la n
Notel RFK - additional wiring diagrams may as on

option amend this basic wiring diagram.
MRS - Zusatzschaltpläne können auftragsspezifisch
ais Option diesen Grundplan ergänzen.
issued UEBHERR-WERK NENZING GMBH drawing no.: assembly group sheet

Erstellt wiringdiagram Zeichnungsnr.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage______ Blatt
A-6710 NENZING
ind: mod.no.: date
Ind: And. Nr.: Datum
name
Name
approved
28.06.11 IwnkltO
Copyright©
Urheberrecht €>
Stromlaufplan idem, no.:
Identnr.: 10504662
location
Ort
54
I
IN D E X :
IN H A L T S V E R Z E IC H N IS :
1 wiring diagram 29 RFK - load & radius limit 1-, 2-fold

Stromlaufplan MRS - Lasteck 1-, 2-fach
2 index 30 RFK - auxiliary hoist
Inhaltsverzeichnis MRS - Hilfshub
3 components identification 32 RFK - slewing stop parkposition
Gerätebezeichnung MRS - Drehwerk Stop Parkposition
4 hydraulic control 33 RFK - slewing gear interlock
Hydrauliksteuerung MRS - Drehwerksverriegelung
B B
5 general control 37 RFK no slowly up luffing gear
Allgemeine Steuerung MRS kein Kriechgang auf Wippwerk
6 lighting and heating 38 screen wiper / horn
Beleuchtung und Heizung Scheibenvwscher / Hupe
7 lighting 39 auxiliary supply
Beleuchtung Hilfseinspeisung
8 RFK - auxiliary hoist 40 heating
MRS - Hilfshub Heizung
9 RFK - slewing gear interlock 41 lighting
MRS - Drehwerksverriegelung Beleuchtung
C C
10 RFK - outline electric of crane 42 RFK - floodlight boom
MRS - Übersicht Elektrik Kran MRS - Scheinwerfer Ausleger
II power supply 43 RFK - floodlights slewing column
Stromversorgung MRS - Scheinwerfer Drehsäule
12 emergency stop 44 RFK - helicopter warning light boom
Not-Aus MRS - Helikoptenwarnleuchte Ausleger
13 motor start 45 control lighting + heating
Motor Start Steuerung Beleuchtung + Heizung
15 RFK- power management system to ship 47 slip ring element
MRS- Powermanagement System zum Schiff Schleifringkörper
D D
16 motor control 48 PE - connection
Motorüberwachung PE - Anschluss lo c a tio n
17 indicating devices 49 setpoint table O rt
Anzeigegeräte Einstellwerttabelle
19 hydraulic control 50 name plate fuse list XI switch cabinet
Hydrauliksteuerung Schild Sicherungsaufstellung Schaltschrank
20 limit switches hoisting gear 51 checklist electric safety devices X I0 slip ring element
Endschalter Hubwerk Checkliste El. Sicherheitseinrichtungen Schleifringkörper
21 pressure limitation hoisting gear 54 modification index X20 indication unit
Druckabsicherung Hubwerk Änderungsindex Meldeeinrichtung
E E
22 limit switch luffing gear X57 terminal box
Endschalter Einziehwerk Klemmkasten
23 hoisting gear, luffing gear, slewing gear stop X58 terminal box
Hubwerk, Wippwerk, Drehwerk Stop Klemmkasten
24 RFK - luffing slewing sector
MRS - Wippwerk Drehwerk Sektor 4 device outside
27 RFK - load & radius limit 1-, 2-fold Gerät außen
MRS - Lasteck 1-, 2-fach
28 RFK - load & radius limit 2-fold
F NRS - Lasteck 2-fach F
isêd LIEBHERRWERK NENZING GMBH drawing no.; assembly group

Erstellt
A-6710 NENZING
index Zeichnungsnr.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7
M9!____
mod.no.: date
Änd. Nr.; Datum
name
Name
approved
gep«
Copyright ©
Urheberrecht £)
Inhaltsverzeichnis ident. no.;
Identnr: 10504662
locatran
Ort
54
I ... ~T
E L E C T R IC A L C O M P O N E N T S ID I 111 II Ii ^ 11
B e z e ic h n u n g e le k tr is c h e r G e r ä te
CABLES COM PONENTS & INSTRUMENTS L O C A T IO N

Kabel Geräte & Instrum ente Ort
1 W 20 . 1 =DS + 4H - SOI X... panel..., junction box...
L_^ Schaltschrank..., Klemmkasten..
running number T kind of item, running number 4... field device
laufende Nummer Art des Betriebsmittels, laufende Nummer externe Geräte
to location location, function group ..1 running number
zum Einbauort Einbauort, Funktionsgruppe laufende Nummer
from location assembly group
vom Einbauort Anlage
ASSEM BLY GROUP FUNCTION GROUP KIND OF ITEM COLOUR - CODE FOR CABLE CORES
Anlage Funktionsgruppe A rt des Betriebsm ittels Farb - Code fü r K
AL boom A general control A amplifier BK black

Ausleger Allgemeine Steuerung Verstärker SW Schwarz
AW drive wagon B lighting and heating B converter BN brown
Antriebswagen Beleuchtung und Heizung Umformer BR Braun
OB slewing platform C damping cylinder / casing osztllator C capacitor
RD red
Drehbühne Anpresszylinder / Verrohrungsmaschine Kondensator
binary elements RT Rot
OS slewing column D slewing gear D
Drehsäule Drehwerk Binäre Elemente OG orange
ET external E luffing gear E anything else OR Orange
Extern Wlppwerk Verschiedenes VE yellow
F8 travelling beam F travelling gear F protective devices GE Gelb
Fahrbalken Fahrwerk Schutzeinrichtungen GN green
FS drivers cabin G grab control G generators, power supplies
GN Grün
Fahrerhaus Greifersteuenjng Generatoren, Stromversorgungen
GE generator H hoisting gear (main) H indicating devices BU blue
Generator Hubwerk ( Haupt-) Anzeigegeräte BL Blau
GS base cloumn K trolley gear K contactors, relais VT violet
Grundsäule Katzfahrv/erk Schütze, Relais VI Violett
HW hoisting gear L steering L inductance GY grey
Hubwerk Lenkung Induktivität GR Grau
KB cabin M mill M motors
WH wnthe
Kabine Fräse Motoren
WS W îss
KZ trolley N cable drum P test devices
PK pink
Katze Kabeltrommel Prüfeinrichtungen
strut cylinder / outrigger power switch gears RS Rosa
MA mast Q Q
Mast Abstützung / Schwenkholme Starkstromgeräte TQ turquoise
MH engine room S spreader R resistors TK Türkis
Maschinenbaus Spreader W derstände GNYE green/yellow
OW superstnjcture T additional devices S switches GNGE Grün/Gelb
Oberwagen Zusatzeinrichtungen Schalter SR silver
QT girder V drilling devices T transformers
Silber
Querträger Bohrgerät Transfomiatoren
RK slewing head X whip hoist gear V semiconductors
Rollenkopf Hilfshubwerk Halbleiter
ST strut Y tugger winch w cables, transmission paths
Stütze Benjhigungswinde Kabel, Übertragungswege
TM tower Z closing winch X terminal strips, plugs, sockets
Turm Schliesswinde Klemmleisten, Stecker, Steckdosen
TK tank Y valves
Tank Ventile
UW under carriage
Untenn/agen
ZA aggregate
Zentralaggregat
issued dravwng nö.: assembly group Sheet

Erstellt
27.10.08 IwnsiwO U r a H E R R components identification Zeichnunqsnr.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage Blatt 3
ind: mod.no.: date name approved CopyrightO ident, nö.: location of
Gerätebezeichnung 10504662 54
Ind; Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht <S> Identnr,: Ort von
iS ^ ^ optional scope of supply
I I I o CO O
J^
1 Optionaler Lieferumfang
CT-D
u^ Q. o ' if not applicable, plug is to be sealed
5 (O il
I I
X3 ^ I2 IliJ åI = <
c
ü
«
0
c
I with cover plate or tape
Falls nicht vorhanden, Stecker mit
■ Blindkappe oder Klebeband abdichten
*
< ^ m . CO 03 ,rS CM Q s Qg
5 °s P ri
+ '? ? + >r ci T>r >r c! s ■?>r
reference to relevant parts list position
CD ¥ Referenz zur relevanten Stücklistenposition
¥
note 1 slewing column remaining EL
=ZA
+4A Drehsäule Rest EL
-S12.X -Y01.X -Y01.X -Y02.X -Y01.X -Y02.X -Y01.X -Y02.X note 2 suction pipe EL
51 note 1 Ansaugrohr EL
+4A +4H +4H +4E +4E +4D +4D
note 3 tank hydr. EL
Tank Hydr. EL
note 4 RFK - no slowly up luffing gear
MRS - kein Kriechgang auf Wippwerk
issued drawing no.: assently group Sheet

Erstellt
IwnsiwO L IE B H E R R hydraulic control Zeichnungsnr: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage =DS Blatt
ind; mod.no.: date name approved
Liebherf-CW
oerr
pykiN
genz
htOingGmbH ident, nö.; location
Ind; Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht® Hydrauliksteuerung
Identnr.; 10504662 Ort____
+X1 54
I ' " 4—
gear temperature hoisting winch ^ °
Getriebetemperatur Hubwinde ^ "
-S22
/19.B3
50 note2

Referenz zur relevanten Stücklistenposition
Drehsäule Rest EL
note 2 hoisting winch EL
Hubwinde EL
note 3 limit switch luffing gear EL
Endschalter Wippwerk EL
note 4 cabin EL
Kabine EL
note 5 ring carrier pre-assembly EL
Schleifringkörper Vormontiert EL
note 6 switch cabinet
Schaltschrank
note 7 central power unit EL
Zentralaggregat EL
* ' supplied by customer
j Vom Kunden geliefert
80161 12.03.09
issued
Erstellt UEBHERR
Liebherr-WerkNenzingGmbH general control
drawing no.:
Zeichnungsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 assembly group
=08
ind; mod.no.: date name approved Copyright® Allgemeine Steuerung ident. no.:
10504662 location
+4A 54
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urtieberrecht® Identnr.: Oil
Drehsäule Rest EL
note 2 cabin EL
Kabine EL
note 3 RFK - hydraulictank heating
MRS - Hydrauliktank-Heizung
note 4 RFK - lighting slewing column
MRS - Beleuchtung Drehsäule
i f ' supplied by customer

I Vom Kunden geliefert
issued assembly group sheet

Erstellt
27.10.08 IwnsiwO U E B H E R R lighting and heating SinunTsnr.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage =DS Blatt 6
Liebheir-Wferk Nenzing GmbH
ind: mod.no.: date name approved Copyright © location of
geprüft
Beleuchtung und Heizung 10504662 +4B 54
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name Urtieberrecht O Ort von
1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8
I
=AL
78. 79nolii5 +4B
-E34
/44.E3
100W
=AL
multi cable transit
Merfach Kabeldurchführung ~ 74.75,76nole 1 +4B
1000W
=AL
74.76,76 note 2 ’•'‘•B
-E35
M 2 .E 3

-E33 Scheinwerfer
1
I Mm:3.E3 note 1
note 2
floodlight boom
Scheinwerfer Ausleger
RFK - floodlight boom
NRS - Scheinwerfer Ausleger
note 3 RFK - floodlights slewing column
MRS - Scheinwerfer Drehsäule
note 4 RFK - additional floodlights slewing column
NRS - Zusätzliche Scheinwerfer Drehsäule
note 5 RFK - helicopter warning light boom
NRS - Helikopterwarnleuchte Ausleger
Drehsäule Rest EL
issued dravtnngno.; assemblygroup sheet

Erstellt 27.10.08 IwnsiwO ilE B H E R R lighting Zeichnungsnr.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage =DS Blatt 7
ind: mod.no.; date name approved Liebherr-Wérk Nenzing GmbH ident. no.; location ol
Copyright O Beleuchtung +4A
Ind; And. Nr: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht © Identnr.; 10504662 Ort von 54
VA
II
If
H
crawling speed slewing gear

Kriechgang Orehwerk
parking - slewing gear position

Parkposition - Drehwerksposition 1
-S32
/33.B6
lock cylinder locked

Veniegelungszyiinder verriegelt
-Y07 brake
-S33 /36.D3 Bremse
/33.B7
lock cylinder unlocked

Verriegetungszylinder entriegelt

note 1 RFK - slewing gear interlock

MRS - Drehwerl^sverriegelung
drawingno.: assemblygroup
27.10.08 IwnsiwO U E B H E R R RFK - slewing gear interlock Zeichnungsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 =DS
approved
Llebherr-CW
oérr
pykiN
genz
htOingGmbH location
ind: mod.no.: date
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum
name
Name geprüft UrheberrechtO MRS - Drehwerl<sverrie9elung ident. no.:
Identnr: 10504662 Oil____
+4D 54
note 1 RFK - luffing slewing sector
MRS - Wippwerk Drehwerk Sektor
note 2 RFK - slewing stop parkposition
MRS - Drehwerk Stop Parkposition
note 3 RFK - emergency stop in pedestal
NRS - Not Aus in der Grundsäule
note 4 RFK - emergency stop in pedestal

MRS - Not Aus in der Grundsäule
IwnsiwO
Erstellt 27.10.08 IwnsiwO ilEBHERR
Liebherr-WerkNenzingGmbH RFK - outline electric of crane
drawing nö.:
Zeichnungsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 assemblygroup
Anlage =D S
Sheet
Blatt 10
ind; mod.no.; date name approved Copyright© MRS - Übersicht Elektrik Kran ident, nö.:
10504662 location
+4D 54
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft UrtieberrechtG Identnr.: Ort____
400/440VAC L4
■0/13.A1
400/440VAC L5
■0/13.A1
. 7QQ.70Q 400/440VAC
2.5A I—DE
2.5-4 A
-Q02
13 5 143I31 I note 1
' main switch settings:
main switch
j refer to setpoint table at
Hauptschalter
* the end of wiring diagram
|22 • Hauptschalter Einstellungen;
I siehe Einstellwert-Tabelle
-XI I am Ende des Schaltplans
400/440 bridaes connection voltaae
-E 1 1
U1 + V1 + W1 L1 + L2 + L3 20
+ V
U2 + V2 + W2 L1 + L2 + L3 ov
/11.C5 110VAC 2 7V D C U3 + V3 + W3 t1 + L2 + L3 -20V
110
note 1
BK-ks.6Q
BK-ks.6Q -XI
Ol ■v'/ie.D?
-FO8 sA -F40 ^
-F06 jA 13A ■*! 3A
Is
3A -X lÄ
-XI ^/38.A1
M9.AK-X1
■0 /2 3 .A 1
-XI -X1 M9-X1■O/IS-AI

-K 0 5 \
/12.E7
-K 0 5 \
.mK:Xic>/16.Al
CO /12.E7 -X1 ( =KB
=GS 0 44
+X10
L1 L3 PE II +X20
-^/13.A1 -X20
-X I0
/47.C3 LI L2 L3 PE (0
-X1 ^S-------- M6-X1 ^
indication unit
Meldeeinrichtung
M6.K-XV
-4 > / 1 6 .A 1
supply 2 4 V D C
Versorgung 2 4 V D C
main power supply -X1 - 0/110VAC M 2 -X 1 ^
-------------------------------- 0 / 1 4 . E1
Haupteinspeisung s]
3x400V/50Hz or ,1Q 0/110VAC____ M 2 . K - X 1 ^ ^ ^ „ ^
3x440V/60Hz UJ
refer to drg. outline power supply
Siehe Zng. Übersicht Stromversorgung
-X1A" supply 110VAC
Versorgung 110VAC
X X X X 600 00 00 031 O XX
issued drawingno.: assemblygroup

Erstellt 27.10.08 L IE B H E R R power supply Zeichnungsnr: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage =DS II
ind: mod.no.: date name approved
Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH ident. no.: location
Copyright ® Stromversorgung 10504662 +X1 54
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht O Identnr,: Oft____
I ^ --
/ 1 1 .A 8 C 400/440VAC ,70Q.70Q
n i : A 8 0 ' - ^ 400/440VAC ,70Q.70Q
L6 400/440VAC
/11.A8CS
M1.K-X1 110VAC
(opt.) refer to order parts list

(Opt.) siehe Auftragsstückliste
only if R F K ampere meter

switch cabinet is applicable.
Nur wenn N R S Amperemeter
Schaltschrank vorhanden ist.
1 3 5
-K 1 3 \ -K 1 1 V V
/14.E5
-KI2V
/14.E4
PE
W1 W2
U2
n o te 3 V2
' actual motor rating refer to drg. =ZA 1TP1

I outline power supply +4A r 1TP2
I X X X X 6 0 0 00 00 031 OXX -M01 1HE1
' Atuelle Motorleistung siehe Zog.
1HE2
»01*0^^39.07
I Übersicht Stromversorgung -J^5212^/39.D7
I X X X X 6 00 00 00 031 OXX
note 3
hydraulic drive
Hydraulikantrieb
/12.E8C>-
12
/17.B3 143.^1
22
/16.B6 2 4 3 s J 1
PTC-protection
Kaltleiterschutz
issued
Erstellt LIEBHERR
Liebherr-WérkNenzingGrTibH motor start ZeicJinungsnr. 5172 600 00 00 061 007 An!age_ =DS 13
ind: mod.no.: date name CopyrightC> Motor Start ident. no.:
10504662 location
+X1 54
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht<D Identnr.: Ort__
-K09 -K 1 1 \
/16.E6 /14.F3
1^12
-K14
/14.E2
-X1
21 21 13 13
-K14 -K12 T - K il / -K 1 3 \ -K 1 2 \
/14.E2 /14.E4 /14.E3 /14.E5 /14.E4
DIP- Switches
22 -P01
■ t1
■
t2
■
LEDgreen
suppô.k.
LEDyellow
relaisactiv
-K14 <13
/14.E2 m å l
-K11 1________ _ -K12 1 Y -K 13| N -K20 I
0.8-e/&^0sec /14.E3 [5 1 5 /14.E4 /14.E5 /14.E7
8sec
40/60/80/1 OOmsec
60nisec
M2.K-X1 0/110VAC
/13.E8C>
M2-X1 0/110VAC -XI
/ 1 1 .F 4 0
IL - 2 13 14
I 15
18^-^ _4 hour meter 2 3 ^ “^ 4
/13.C4 /13.C5 /13.C2
_6 Betriebsstundenzähler 3 3 -" 34
13; 14
/14.C5
13^ " l 4
/14.C5
13" J4 43-'
■^2
/14.C3
21^; “^ 2 21^: _22 5 3 '' 54
_32 ^ Ih _ 3 2 /45.D7
31j. J2 /39.C8
32
44 43_ 44 43_ 44 7 ^ _72
/15.C1 /39.C8
83 84
motor start
Motor Start motor running
Motor läuft
issued assemblygroup sheet

Erstellt 27.10.08 IwnsiwO L IE B H E R R motor start Slåsn,.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 7 Anlage =DS Blatt 14
ind: mod.no.; date name approved Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH
Copyright Q Motor Start location of
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name gepriW Urtieberrecht ® 10504662 +X1 von 54
Oil
Nur wenn M R S Powermanagement
start request crane System vorhanden ist.
Startanforderung Kran
issued LIEBHERR-WERK NENZING GMBH drawing nö.: assemblygroup

Erstellt RFK- power management system to ship Zeichnungsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 Anlage =DS 15
ind; mod.no.; date name approved A-6710 NENZING ident, nö.: location
tnd; Änd. Nr.; Datum Name gepron
Copyright O
Urtieberrecht ©
MRS- Powermanagement System zum Schiff
Identnr; 10504662 Ort____
+X1 54
I 4 I --------
M1-X1 110VAC
-K >/ 2 0.A 1
/ 1 1 . D 7 0 24VDC- X1 ■k>/23.A 1
-X1
123
+4H +4H
- K 8 l\
"I -S24.X^ -S25.X,
/31.E2 1^ =2A
« CO
+4A ^ . 0- +4H +4H
-S13 @ \ T -S24 [p]— -S25 0 —
/4.E6
-S24.X -S25.X
-XI +4H +4H
•XI
-X1 -4 > / 2 1 .A 4
-X1 -^/27.B4
tft
1|
■4 > / 2 1 .B 4 ■4 >/ 2 1.B 4
f i -K80V
'5 ,/31.E
flj (O 24
Io I*; R F K - load & radius limit 1-, 2-fold
B3 N R S - Lasteck 1-, 2-fach
-K32
q: /19.E5
/■ DIP
Switches
joystick
LED U Meisterschalter
supplyO.K.
LED R
reiaisactiv
-K32 I
-K30 /19.E5
\l\
/19.E3 1-10 sec
3 sec
A2
/16.D8D M10.K-X1 0/24VDC

/16.E8C5^ ■^/20.E1
13 14
23' 24 16
33-^ 34 /17.B4 -, ^ 871
43' 26*
53" 'I a /16.C6 2 b S
6 1^ 62
/17.B5
7 1^ jrz
83 84
content hydraulic tank
temperature of hydraulic oil Inhalt Hydrauliktank
Hydrauliköltemperatur
gear temperature hoisting winch

Getriebetemperatur Hubwinde
issued drawingno.: assemblygroup sheet

06 96141 20.08.10 IwnsiwO Erstellt 27.10.08 IwnsiwO U iB H I R R hydraulic control Zeichnunqsnr: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage =DS Btatt 19
ind: mod.no.: date name approved Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH ident. no.: location of
Copyright 0 Hydrauliksteuerung +X1
Ind; Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht ■& Identnr: 10504662 Ort von 54
n
<o 0>
■> æ
l_
X XX"
X ro X
to "5 N) to 2
o o 03 O O OD
0^7 ^éT “ ^84-----
R F K - auxiliary hoist
N R S - Hilfshub
lifting stop working range
Heben Stop Arbeitsbereich
O)
o 140
5 7^ +
P 7^ 2 g ^
i s° (2 Ü1 disconnect
iK.K.S.S auftrennen
SU> S1.2 S1.1 140
S1.4 S1.3
lowering stop working range

Senken Stop Arbeitsbereich
0)
o
5 +
s s 52i
18 tn O)
K)= .1Q
f-r SU
en a
0)
o
-/M V E . il
®PE
VVV
a is ß
O -* Ü1
(3 > >>
M1-X1 110VAC - X I
/20.A8P»------------------------------ ■4>/22.A1
/19.C70 ---- M154-X1^^2 7 . Bi 5

+4H +4H
-S28.X, -S21.X, /19.C7I>'^^S4.K-X1
/19.C80J
+4H ^ +4H
-S28 [ E —
15
/10.C2 fl
|3|2 .2 : -K121 V
/21.E3 1,^ »
-S28.x'" -S21 .X
+4H +4H I ä
I s -K33
I I
t I '21 bl -K118 I i
3Q -KIS /30.E7 I2
I
-XI -XI /22.E4 I '
<r /■
15
<N
-K125 -K l 25 V -K l 25
-K33 -K121 /21.E5 il|i6 /21.E5 12^26
/21.E2 /21.E3 DIP-Switches
DIP DIP Func. 1 Time
Switches Swrtches ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ 1 ■
■ ■ LEDgreen
LED U LED U supplyo.k.
supplyo.k. supplyo.k. LEDyellow
LED R LED R relaisactiv
relaisactiv relaisactiv
-K33
/21.E2 ^ T a3 '2 1 . E 3 ^ " I a 3 ^21.E5 A2 /21.E7 B2 A2
0,1-1 sec 0.1-1 sec l.O-IOsec
1 sec 0.1 sec S.Osec
. M2.K-X1 0/110VAC M 2 .K -X V
-4>-/22.D1
16 , 12
/21.C5 J5 /23.B2 1 4 -^
26 M ' 22
/21.C7 2 8 3 1 25 /17.B6
24^s^1
overload
1 0 0 % pressure limit switch hoisting gear hook lashing overload reset Überlast
1 0 0 % Druckschaller Hubwerk Haken Verzurrung Überlast Reset
LIEBHERR-WERK NENZING GMBH

pressure limitation lioisting gear
dravinngno.:
Zeichnungsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 Massemmb____
lygroup
=D S 21
ind: mod.no.: date name approved A-6710 NENZING ident. no.: totion o._ 5^
Copyright O
Ind: Änd Nr.: Datum Name geprOfl Urheberrecht ©
Druckabsicherung Hubwerk
Iderfinr: 10504662
7
/ 1 9 .A 8 0
M9.K-X1 24VDC
/16.A8C>
M9.AK-X1 2 4 V D C
/11.D7C
13
hydraulic temperature -K 3 0 \
Hydraulik Temperatur /19.E3
-K17
Si
R F K - luffing slewing sector
/22.E3 8 I -K l 23
1^12 M R S - Wippwerk Drehwerk Sektor
g /26.E5
1^12
-K16 -K19\
/20.E5 /22.E5
1^12
-XI
II R F K - slewing stop parkposition

2 ^ 8I -K 2 8 \ M R S - Drehwerk Stop Par1(position
£ 0
(N £ 23
I » /32.E3
-K107\'
= ^ /29.E3
J
-X1 !------------- ^
i l
i - - -K107\ ro {fl
R F K - slewing gear Interlock
/29.E3 8I -K 4 4 \
|5 i(O ^ n /34.E3
34
M R S - Drehwerksverriegelung
■O '
Sw
-XI -XI, -XI - x ii -XI -XI
+4H +4H +4E +4E +4D +4D

-Y01.X, -E10 -Y02.X
-E10
-YOl.Xjl,- -Y02.X, -Y O I.X i’ -Y 0 2 .X ^-
-E10 -E l O - E lo -E10
+4H +4H «E '' +4E « o i +4D
-Y01 I -Y02 [ -Y01 CO * -Y02 I -Y01 L Z -Y02 I
/4.B4 M .B 4 /4.B5 /4.B5 /4.B5 I /4.B6
.. o ^ l.
-YOI.XT cm -Y02.X -YOI.XJc^ -Y02.X -Y01.X -Y02.XT'^
+4H +4H +4E +4E +4D +4D
-X I i - -X li- -X 1 > -k > / 3 1 .E 1

M10-K-X1 0/24VDC
/19.E8t> ■^/31.E1
no slewing left stop
no lifting stop no lowering stop no luffing in stop no luffing out stop no slewing right stop kein linksdrehen Stop
kein Heben Stop kein Senken Stop kein Einwippen Stop kein Auswippen Stop kein rechtsdrehen Stop
A optional scope of supply

V N Optionaler Lieferumfang
L
if not applicable, plug is to be sealed
with cover ptate or tape
Falls nicht vorhanden, Stecker mit
Blindkappe oder Klebeband abdichten
drawing no.: assemblygroup sheet

ilE B H E R R hoisting gear, luffing gear, slewing gear stop Zeichnungsnr: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 Anlage =DS Blatt 23
ind: mod.no.: date name
Liebherr-CW
oerr
pykiN
genz
ht©ingGmbH ident. no.: location
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht© Hubwerk, Wippwerk, Drehwerk Stop
Identnr.: 10504662 Oil____
+X1 54
I 4 I --------
M1-X1 110VAC
/22.A8CS
110VAC .
/22.B7I M1E,S01^,29.A4
-H >/26.A 1
-K27 CMCM
« •£ /24. ° °
I«
c &o +4E +4E
■S M -S01-10 Ot- « 55 -S01-10 Ct-
gI «,B3 oS /5.B3
il g’ t
" I -K 2 6 \ l |
^ 8 /25.E7
OJ CNJ - S -X1, -X1.

o o - K 2 l\
/24.E7
-K27 I -K21 I
-K117 I /24.E6 /24.E7
/24.E2 A2 A2
>X1 M 2 -X U
>/27.E1
J4 13 1 14
/24.B4 -
12 33-
_24 23 n ^ 4
/22.C3 1 4 - ^ I I _34
/26.B7 ^3-,
22 _44 43^ 44
24^n^ 1 5^" 53"
62 6 1^ ^ 2
7tj. J2 7 1^ _ 7 2
no luffing out stop 83 84 83 84
kein Auswippen Stop
no sector 1 no sector 2
(Opt.) siehe Auflragsstückliste NI nicht in Sektor 1 nicht in Sektor 2
4 k
only if R F K lufTing slewing
sector is applicable.
M NI
Nur wenn M R S Wippwerk
Drehwerk Sektor vorhanden ist. __ |
issued dravwngno.; assemblygroup siieet

Erstellt 27.10.08 IwnsiwO ilE B H E R R RFK - luffing slewing sector Zeichnunqsnr.; 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Antaqe =DS Blatt 24
ind: mod.no.; date name approved LiebheiT-Werk Nenzing GmbH
Copyright © MRS - Wippwerk Drehwerk Sektor ident. no.; location of
Ind: Änd. Nr.; Datum Name geprüft Urheberrechte Identnr.: 10504662 Ørt +X1 von 54
=KB
/ 2 4 .A 8 0
110VAC _iX 1 ^ -k>*/27.A1
+X20
M 1.A D-X20 n O V A C
/20.A8C>
I» gI , =KB
+X20 ^ ^
f S -S19
fO
CO fO
+4D I" I“ +4D ^ +4D i .w . w +4D n? =KB
-S01-08 & — F -S01-08 Ot— 7^ \ -S01-08 (b—F \ -S01-08 Gt—F \
/10.D3 /10.D3 /10.D3 /10.D3
+X20
CO *w W w -X20
iS
-xiA" -xilS - x il-
JJ64
C >/ 3 8 .D 2
=KB
+X20 ui
CL
-X1
-K22 I -K23 I -K24

/25.E2 /25.E3 V /25.E4 'y /25.E6 Y /25.E7
Y
A2 A2 A2 A2
M 2.W W -X1 0/11 0V A C
■4 >/26.E 1
J4 J4 J4 J4
/24.B3 ^ | v /24.C3 ^ |v /24.C3 ^|v /24.B2
J4 _24 J4 _24
/26.B6 33-,
J4
/26.C2 33-,
_34 “ 33J _34 '26 '^ Vt -
/26.C7 ^|-.
4^' J4 4^' 43_' 43_- _44
5^- _54 5^' 5^' 5^' _54 5^' _54
62 6t; _62 61^ _62 61^ _62 _62
7tj _72 71^ _72 7 ^ _72 71^ J2 7t^ _72
83 84 83 84 83 84 83 84 83 84
no sector 1 no sector 1 no sector 2 no sector 2 bypass sector

nicht in Sektor 1 nicht in Sektor 1 nicht in Sektor 2 nicht in Sektor 2 Überbrückung Sektor
(Opt.) refer to order parts list
only if R F K lufTtng slewing

sector is applicable.
Nur wenn M R S Wippwerk
Drehwerk Sektor vorhanden ist. __ |
issued
Erstell!
27.10.08 IwnsiwO LIEBHERR
Liebherr-WerkNenzingGmbH RFK - luffing slewing sector
drawing nö.:
Zeichnungsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 Anlage =DS 25
ind: mod.no.: date name Copyright© MRS - Wippwerk Drehwerk Sektor ident, nö.:
10504662
location
+X1 cf
54
Irtd: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht© Identnr: Ort von
7
M1-X1 11PVAC
/ 2 5 .A 3 0
joystick
Meisterschalter
-------M15k2üc^ß8.B4
+4H
-S 2 2 E } ■4 >/ 2 8.B 5
/4.E2
- K l 00 V
/27.E3 1^^.
load > X to
1 load corner Last > x to -S 2 3 .X
1 Lasteck
- K l 03
-K 1 00 /27.E6
/27.E3
DIP
Switches
LEDgreen
LEO U Süpptyo.k.
supplyok- LEOyellow
LEO R relaisactiv
relaisactiv
AI
-K 1 0 0 I - K l 03 M
/27.E3 ^ /27.E6
821 A2
0,1-1 sec 1,0-10 sec
1 sec 1 sec
- . > -------- ' '" —— — ... ........ ........ ........ ........ ■ .1Q,10,1Q
0/110VAC
12
/29.B3
22
24^^21
(opt.) refer to order parts list load not > x to

(Opt.) siehe Auftragsstückliste Last nicht > x to load > X to
Last > X to
only if R F K load & radius
limit is applicable.
Nur wenn M R S Lasteck
vortianden ist.
J
drawngno.; assemblygroup sheet

Eretellt
27.10.08 IwnsiwO lI E B H iR R RFK - load & radius limit 1-, 2-fold Zeichnungsnr; 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage =DS Blatt 27
Liebherr-Werk Nenzing GmbH location of
ind; mod.no.: date name approved Copyright & M R S-Lasteck 1-, 2-fach ident. no.;
10504662 +X1 von 54
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht @ Identnr: Ort
Ml-XI 110VAC ■4>/30.A 1
/28.A8I>
/24.A8o M 1 ^ 1
SX
A £ +4E
1 E -S O I-10 O t-
s 3
X X » S /5.B3
AA
- K l 02 P
2a
m.
-X1
+4E
-S 0 1 -1 0
I? I“
Gt— ^ \
il? /5.B3
g '!
AA -K 1 1 2 \
I I
-X 1 F
- K l 07
/29.E3
A2
M2.LR-X1__ 0/11OVAC
13 14
23" ^ 4
33-^ 34
43-
53" "l4
6^ 32
7^ j n
83 84

(Opt.) siehe Auflragsstückliste overload
Überlast
only if R F K load & radius
limit is applicable.
Nur wenn M R S Lasteck
vorhanden ist.
J
issued assemblygroup
61533
Erstellt
L IE B H E R R RFK - load & radius limit 1-, 2-fold Snunåsnr.: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 =DS 29
ind: mod.no.; date name approved
Liebherr-CWoeprykriNgehntz®ingGmbH ident, nö.: location
Ind: Änd. Nr: Datum Name Urheberrecht® M R S-Lasteck 1-, 2-fach
Identnr.: 10504662 Olt
+X1 54
/23.A8C=
M9-X1 2 4 V D C M9-X1C»/33.A1
=KB
+X20
M 1.A D-X20 110VAC -X 2 0 ,
/25.A8I5 ^^/33.A1
({
=KB
+X20 13 11 -K 8 0 \ - K 8 l\
-S81 / /31.E3 /31.E2
14 12
=KB
+X20
-X20
-X1^ -X IJ
61 61 +4H
4H| +4X I
-Y08, -E lo -YOS.xi"
-K80 / -K81 /
/31.E3 /31.E2
62 +4H +4X r V7
-Y08 ( >L\ - Y o s i : ^ -E10 A
/8.D3
-YOS.XTtM -Y08.X
+4H +4X
-K81
/31.E2 /31.E3
T Y
A2 A2
1XI 0/110VAC
M10-X1 0/24VDC
/23.E8C»
M10.K-X1 0<24VDC
/ 2 3 .E 8 0 -k > / 3 6 .E 1
13 14 13 14
2 3 " '^ 4 23" 24
/19.C4
33"^ 34 33 34
/31.B5 main hoist preselection auxiliary hoist
43" 43 ' “a a
/20.B3 Haupthub Vonwahl Hilfshub
5 3 " ^^54 5 3 ""
"^ 2
/31.D3 /31.D2
7 1^ ^ 2 71^ _72
83 84 83 84
auxiliary hoist preselection main hoist
only if R F K auxiliary hoist Hilfshub Vofwahl Haupthub
is applicable.
Nur wenn M R S Hilfshub
vorhanden ist.
J
issued drawing no.; assemblygroup sheet

Erstellt U E B H E R R RFK - auxiliary hoist Zeichnungsnr.; 5172 600 00 00 061 007 Anlage____ =DS Blatt 31
ind; mod.no.; da!e name approved
üebherr-CWoeprkiN
yr et
ghnz
©ingGmbH ident, no.; location of
Ind; Änd. Nr.; Datum Name gepiM Urheberrecht€> MRS-Hilfshub
Identnr.; 10504662 Ort +X1
von 54
-X I
/31.A8 o M S-X^ 2 4 y .D C_ -^/36.A1
=K B
+X 2 0
/31 M 1.A D-X20 110VAC -X20p- M!.-AD:X20^^^3g
=K B
+X20 . , 13 111
-S 5 0 [h P - v A
— f
14 ll2
=K B
+X 2 0 le
- X 2 0 i-
-X1
-K 1 9 A \
/22.E6 '
12
-K 4 0 I
/33.E2
^ M10-X1 0/110VAC ,1Q M 1 0 -X W

_ M10-X1 0/24VDC M 1 0 -X V
H ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 14
23^ *^ 4
33-^ 34 /36.A2 /34.C2 /35.B5 /34.
4 3 " 44
53" . 1 1 * '
^ 2
7 1 ^ __72
II
83 84 o> I>
m
■s I H’q
(opt.) refer to order parts list preselection slewing interlock I t
(Opt.) siehe Auftragsstückliste Vorwahl Drehwerksverriegelung I« i.2
only if R F K slewing gear
I I
interlock is applicable. Ii t f
Nur wenn M R S Drehwerks I i II
verriegelung vorhanden ist.
issued assemblygroup Sheet

07 106655 28.06.11 IwnsiwO Erstellt 27.10.08 IwnsiwO U IB H E R R RFK - slewing gear interlock z e Ü Z r. 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 061 0 0 7 Anlage =DS Blatt 33
name approved Liebherr-Werk Nenzlng GmbH location of
ind: inod.no-: date Copyright© MRS - Drehwerksverriegelung +X1
Ind: Änd. Nr: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht © 10504662 Ort von 54
^ 3 3 ,A 8 ^ M 9 0 ( i^ 4 y D ^ -X I,
-k > /3 7 .A 1
61
/3 3 .E 5
^12
-K 4 3
-K 4 4 T
/3 4 .E 3
62
-K 4 5 -K 4 6
/3 5 .E 2 /3 5 .E 3
23
- K 4 0 \ -K 4 5 -K 4 6
/3 3 .E 2 /3 5 .E 2
1^12 /3 5 .E 3
1^12
-X I -XI OO- -X I -X I
+4D + 4D
+ 4D + 4 D I -Y 1 2 .X 1 - - Y 1 3 .X 1 -
-E 1 0
- Y 0 7 .x i- - E lo - E lo -E 1 0
-Y 1 1
+ 4D J L
+ 4 D + 4D -Y 1 2 L I -Y13 L D - ^
-Y 1 1 I -Y 0 7 [ I /9 .C 3 I /9 .D 3
/9 .C 3 /9 .D 3
- Y 1 2 .x Y '^
I' -YIS.XJc'^
-Y 1 1 .X - Y 0 7 .x ' +4D +4D
+ 4D + 4D
■^/37.E1
M 1 0 .K -X 1 0 /2 4 V D C
/3 1 .E 8 C = ■ 4 > /3 7 .E 1
c r a w l in g s p e e d b ra k e lo c k p a r k p o s itio n u n lo c k p a r k p o s itio n
K r ie c h g a n g B re m s e P a rk p o s itio n v e r r ie g e ln P a rk p o s itio n e n tr ie g e ln
rVc
( o p t.) r e f e r t o o r d e r p a r t s li s t n
( O p t.) s ie h e A u flr a g s s tü c k lis te
o n ly if R F K s le w in g g e a r
ir ^ te r t o c k is a p p l i c a b l e .
N u r w e n n N R S D re h w e rk s -
v e r n e g e l u n g v o r h a n d e n is t.
03 81S33 22.04.09 IwnsiwO iE

ssued 27.10.08 IwnsiwO U E B H E R R
drawingno.: assem blygroup sheet
rstelt Liebherr-V
\ferkN etnO
zingGmbH R F K - s le w in g g e a r in t e r lo c k Zeichnunqsnr.; 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 7
Aniaqe = D S
Blatt 3 6
ind; mod.no.; date name approved Co ident.no.; location of

ep
byerirre
Ind; Änd.Nr.: Datum Name geprüft gh
Urh ctU<0 M R S - D r e h w e r k s v e r r ie g e lu n g
Idenfrir.; 1 0 5 0 4 6 6 2
Ort +X1
von 5 4
2 20 V A C L17
■ 0 /4 0 .A 1
2 20 V A C L18
■ O /4 0 .A 1
220VAC L19^
N
-F 2 4 ^ ■
1 3 5
A
30m A 1 N
-S 0 2
>15Q M906 O -/4 0 .B 1
/1 5 Q
71
-K 2 0 \
/1 4 .E 7
-K 2 0
/1 4 .E 7
/
T
-X 1
-X 1
Ys
-X I
-X I
■’" T s -X 1
g
O)
__ M8060 / 4 7 . 8 5
-X 1
K > /4 7 .8 5 /1 3 .E 4 « 0
M911
n s| s /1 3 .E 4 -
= Z A
'v + 4 A
=GS
+X10 6N BK
-XI o
/47.C3 3 S PE L1 N
j
Ii?
c o n tr o l v o lta g e 2 2 0 V A C
S te u e rs p a n n u n g 2 2 0 V A C
-E05 -E06 T -M01

a u x i l ia r y s u p p l y
15W 30W 35W
H i lf s e i n s p e i s u n g
lig h tin g p o w e r s o ck e t X1 s w itc h c a b in e t h e a t e r X 1 fa n
2 2 0 V , 5 0 /6 0 H Z , 3 P h o r
B e le u c h tu n g + S t e c k d o s e X 1 S c h a lts c h r a n k H e iz u n g X 1 V e n t il a t o r
2 2 0 V , 5 0 /6 0 H Z , 2 P h
i f a u x . s u p p l y is 2 P h . , a s u i t a b l e j u m p e r
is t o b e f itte d b e t w e e n te r m in a l L 1 4 a n d L 1 6
B e i 2 P h . H i lf s e i n s p e l s u n g i s t e i n e D r a h t b r ü c k e
z w i s c h e n K l e m m e L 1 4 u n d L 1 6 z u le g e n
issued
U E B H E R R
drawingrto.; assem blygroup Sheet
Erstellt
2 7 .1 0 .0 8 Iw n s iw O
a u x ilia r y s u p p ly Zeichnunqsnr: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 7
Anlage = D S
Blatt
39
ind; mod.no.; date nam

e approved
L ie b h e rr-W e rk N e riz in g G m b H
Copyright® idenL nö.: location of
Ind; Änd. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht© H ilf s e in s p e is u n g
Identnr.:
1 0 5 0 4 6 6 2
Ort
+X1
von
54
L 17 220VAC
/39.A8C5 H > /4 1 .A 1
|o > /4 1 .A 1
/3 9 : A 8 C = ^ L M 0 X m ^ 0 > /4 1 .A 1
-F 2 9
16A
H g
- K 9 0 \
/4 5 .E 7
-XV -XV
-X 1 -X 2 0
Ys + X 2 0
= K B
i
”1
[” ( o p t . ) r e f e r t o o r d e r p a r t s li s t rr.( o p t . ) r e f e r t o o r d e r p a r t s li s t n
( O p t . ) s i e h e A u f t r a g s s t ü c k li s t e ( O p t . ) s i e h e A u f t r a g s s t ü c k li s t e
= K B
o n l y i f R F K h y d r a u li c t a n k + 4B © E e o n ly if R F K a ir c o n d itio n
h e a t in g is a p p l i c a b l e . -E 0 9 is a p p l i c a b l e .
N u r w e n n M R S H y d r a u l ik t a n k /6 .D 3 N u r w e n n N R S K lim a a n la g e
H e i z u n g v o r h a n d e n is t. 2000W
v o r h a n d e n is t.
b l o w e r c a b i n h e a t in g
R F K - h y d r a u li c t a n k h e a t in g R F K - a ir c o n d itio n
L ü f t e r K a b i n e n h e iz u n g
M R S - H y d r a u l ik t a n k - H e iz u n g N R S - K lim a a n la g e
J
J
issued drawing nö.; assembly group Sheet
Erstellt
2 7 .1 0 .0 8 Iw n s iw O L IE B H E R R h e a t in g Zeichnunqsnr:
5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 7
Anlage
= D S
Blatt
4 0
ind; mod.no.: date name approved Copyright©

ü e b h e r r -W e r k N e n z in g G m b H
ident, nö.: location of
Ind; Änd. N r: Datum Name geprüft Urtieberrecht© H e iz u n g
Id enlnr:
1 0 5 0 4 6 6 2
Ort
+X1
von
5 4
L18 220 V A C
/4 3 .A 8 0
/43.A80 L19 220V AC
-F 3 5
-S 3 5 J V N -
-X I
+ X 5 7
A-
rVc
(o p t.) r e fe r to o r d e r p a r t s li s t n
h e l i c o p t e r w a r n i n g lig h t
( O p t . ) s i e h e A u f t r a g s s t ü c k li s t e
H e l i k o p t e n v a r n le u c h t e
o n ly if R F K h e lic o p t e r w a r n in g
l i g h t s is a p p l i c a b l e .
N u r w e n n M R S H e lik o p te n w a m -
l e u c h t e v o r h a n d e n is t.
issued
Erstellt
2 7.1 0.0 8 IwnsiwO UEBHERR
RFK - helicopter warning light boom S 2 n ° s r r .: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 7
assembly group
Antage______
=D S
sheet
Blatt 44
ind: mod.no.; date name Copyright © ident. no.: location

MRS - Helil(opterwarnleuchte Ausleger 1 0 5 0 4 6 6 2 +X1 54
Ind: And. Nr.: Datum Name | geprüft Urheberrecht © Identnr: Ort
I • ' 4- I ~
M 9 0 1 -X 1 220VAC - X I, -X 1 ,
/3 9 .E 4 &
r n iS
= G S s
= K B
+ X 1 0
- X IO
+ X 2 0 1 1 -S 2 0 ß r
M 7 .C 4 4
-X 2 0 « 5 0 *3 0 *C
- •” 20“C
^ s s
■=s ■o
■e i 'S s -XV
§ 3 ?s = G S = K B
+ 4 B + X 2 0
3
-S 0 7 [ - -S 2 0 E-
1 .1 1 .
■_l
= K B
( o p t . ) r e f e r t o o r d e r p a r t s li s t /4 7 .C 4
+ X 2 0
( O p t . ) s i e h e A u f t r a g s s t ü c k li s t e
= G S -X 2 0 r n
o n ly if R F K r e m o te f lo o d lig h t + X 1 0
c o n t r o l is a p p l i c a b l e . -X 1 0
N u r w e n n M R S F e m s c h a ltu n g
F l u t l i c h t v o r h a n d e n is t. rVo
(o p t.) r e f e r t o o r d e r p a r t s lis t n
( O p t . ) s i e h e A u f t r a g s s t ü c k li s t e 31
o n ly if R F K f lo o d lig h t -K l 3 /
/1 4 .E 5
s le w in g c o lu m n is a p p lic a b le .
N u r w e n n N R S S c h e in w e r fe r
-X I -X I D r e h s ä u l e v o r h a n d e n is t.
-K 9 0 I
/4 5 .E 7
-K 9 1 p T
/4 5 .E 3
M 9 0 2 -X 1 220VAC
/3 9 .D 4 0
220VAC .
■ H > /4 6 .E 1
/4 2 .C 2 1
^ 1l J 1 12 11 \J:
/4 2 .C 2
•j
0 3" 4 3^ 4
a
D 0 L" L"
f lo o d lig h ts
/4 3 .C 2
/4 3 .C 2
T '' 1" 7*^
S c h e in w e r fe r 21^ _22 21^_22 21^ __22
__32 ^2 31j.. _32
4 ^ 44 43_ 44 43_ 44
53- 54 53' 54 53' 54
flo o d lig h ts
S c h e in w e r fe r R F K - flo o d lig h t s s le w in g c o lu m n h y d r a u li c o i l h e a t e r
N R S - S c h e in w e r f e r D r e h s ä u le H y d r a u l ik ö l h e iz u n g
issued
Erstellt
UEBHERR
Liebherr-WerkNenzing GmbH
c o n t r o l lig h t in g + h e a t in g S n w s n r.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 61 0 0 7
assembly group
Anlage =D S 45
ind; mod.no.: date name approved Copyright O ident. no.: location

S t e u e r u n g B e le u c h tu n g + H e iz u n g 1 0 5 0 4 6 6 2 +X 1 54
Ind: Änd. Nr,: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht © Identnr: Ort
I 4 I
M 9 0 1 -X 1 220V AC -X 1 .
/4 5 .A 8 C 5
= K B
+ X 2 0 i
/4 5 .B 4 0
M 9 0 1 -X 2 0 220VAC ..--xgo.o'^
r n
= K B j £
+ X 2 0
13 11 +4B
-S 0 5 E -
äa -S 0 5 E- - K 9 4 \
: .S
i2 /6 .E 2 /4 6 .E 2
= K B
+ X 2 0
-X 2 0
i
-X I -X I
-K 9 4 |j- | 1 -K 9 5 1
M 6 .E 2 /4 6 .E 4
A2
A2
M 9 0 2 .K -X 1 220V AC ,1 .5Q
/4 5 .E 8 0 -
- s S ts
lig h tin g 4^- J4
B e le u c h tu n g 5^- J4
61j 62
7^ T2
83 84
lig h tin g
B e le u c h tu n g
Erstellt
I.IEBHERR
c o n t r o l lig h t in g + h e a t in g
drawing nö.:
Zeichnungsnr.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 7
assembfy group
Anlage______ =DS 46
ind: mod.no.; date name approved Copyright O ident, nö.: location
S t e u e r u n g B e le u c h tu n g + H e iz u n g 1 0 5 0 4 6 6 2 +X 1 54
Ind: And. Nr.: Datum Name geprüft Urheberrecht O Identnr.: Ort____
I 4 I
S E T P O IN T T A B L E
E in s te llw e r tta b e lle
NAME; RANGE; AD JUST; DEVICES;

Name; Bereich; Einstell.; Geräte;
main motor 120kW 400V / 50Hz, 140kW 440V / 60Hz
Hauptmotor
X1-Q01 In = 630A main switch crane dass
lo = 0,5 - 0,8 X In lo = 0,5 x In Hauptschalter Kran
tr =
lr = 0,8-1 xio lr = 0,8x lo m
lsd = 6 -1 3 x lr Isd = 13x Ir
tr= 10A/10/20 tr= 10
Hauptmotor
X1-Q01 In = 630A main switch crane
lo = 0,5 - 0,8 X In lo = 0,5 x In Hauptschalter Kran
lr = 0,8-1 xIo Ir = 0,9 x lo
lsd = 6 -1 3 x lr Isd = 13xlr
tr= 10A/10/20 tr= 10
Hauptmotor
X1-Q01 In = 630A main switch crane
lo = 0,5 - 0,8 X In lo = 0,63 X In Hauptschalter Kran
lr = 0,8-1 xio lr = 0,9xlo
lsd = 6 -1 3 x lr lsd = 13xlr
tr= 10A/10/20 tr= 10
installation note: the setpoint table has to be placed Inside

the relevant switch cabinet on a good visible location
Installationshinweis: Die Einstellwerttabelle muss innen
im jeweiligen Schaltschrank gut sichtbar platziert werden
drawing no.;
issued
Erstellt
U ra H E R R s e t p o in t ta b le Zeichnungsnr:
5172 600 00 00 061 007 assembly group
Anlage________
4 9
L ie b h e rr-W e rk N e n z in g G m b H
ind; mod.no.; date name approved ident, no.; location
Ind; Änd. Nr.; Datum Name geprüft
Copyright O
Urtieberrecht O
E in s t e llw e r t t a b e lle
Identnr.; 10504662 Ort____
54
I ~1-------
FUSE LIST
Sicherungsliste
N AM E: RANGE: ADJUST: D E V IC E S :
N am e: Bereich: Einstell.: Geräte:
+ X 1 -F 0 4 10A / control voltage 1 1 0 V A C
S te u e rs p a n n u n g 1 1 0 V A C
+ X 1 -F 0 6 3A / indication unit
Meldeeinrichtung
+ X 1 -F 0 8 13A / control voltage 2 4 V D C
S te u e rsp a n n u n g 2 4 V D C
+ X 1 -F 2 3 3A / control voltage heating + lighting
S te u e rsp a n n u n g Beleu ch tu ng + H e izu n g
+ X 1 -F 2 4 13A / lighting + pow er s ock e t X I
Beleu ch tu ng + S te c k d o s e X 1
+ X 1 -F 2 6 10A / standstill heating
Stillstandsheizung
+ X 1 -F 2 9 16A / blower cabin heating
Lüfter K ab in e n h e izu n g
+ X 1 -F 3 0 16A 1 air condition
Klim aanlage
+ X 1 -F 3 1 6A 1 lighting
Beleu ch tu ng
+ X 1 -F 3 2 16A / floodlight
Scheinw erfer
+ X 1 -F 3 3 16A 1 floodlight
Scheinw erfer
+ X 1 -F 3 5 6A / helicopter w arning light
Helikoptenwarnleuchte
+ X 1 -F 3 6 16A / floodlight
Scheinw erfer
+ X 1 -F 4 0 3A / scre e n w iper / horn
S c h e ib e n w isc h e r / H u p e
+ X 1 -Q 0 2 2 .5 -4 A 2 .5 A trafo control voltage prim.
Prim. S te u e rsp a n n u n g Trafo
installation note the fuse list has to be placed inside the relevant switch cabinet on a good visible location
Installationshinweis: Die Sicherungsliste muss innen im jeweiligen Schaltschrank gut sichtbar platziert werden.
issued
2 7 .1 0 .0 8 IwnstwO LIEBHERR
n a m e p la te fu s e lis t
draMng nö.:
Zeichnunasnr.: 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 61 0 0 7
assembly group
«äS____
50
ind: mod.no.: date name approved Copyrighl O ident, nö.: location
S c h ild S ic h e r u n g s a u f s t e llu n g 1 0 5 0 4 6 6 2 54
Ind: Änd. Nr.: Dalum Name geprüft Urheberrecht © Identnr: Ort_____
c o m p le te d c h e c k lis t to b e file ( ! ffn c r a n e f ile ^
A u s g e fü llte E in s te llu n g s a n w e is u n g v e r b le ib t im K ra n a k t
identification sheet/col. recommended adjustment as built adjustment teststand signature as built adjustment yard signature
Bezeichnung Blatt/Pfad Einstellung Soll Einstellung Ist Prüfstand Unters. Einstellung Ist Übergabe Unters.
=DS+4A-S03 /12.B3 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+4A-S22 /19.B3 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+4A-S23 /19.C3 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+4D-S01-08 /25.B2 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+4E-S01-10 /22.B3 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+4H-S01-04 /20.C3 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+4H-S21 /21.B3 Functionstest
Funktionstest
Funktionstest
Funktionstest
Funktionstest
Funktionstest
Funktionstest
Funktionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+4X-S01-10 /30.C2 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+4X-S28 /30.B7 Functionstest
Funktionstest
commissioning eng. name signature date order no.:
Monteur Name Unterschrift Datum Auftraqsnr:
issued
Erstellt
UDHERR
c h e c k lis t e le c t r ic s a f e t y d e v ic e s
drawng no.:
Zeichnungsnr.; 5 1 7 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 61 0 0 7
assembly group
Anlage
ind; mod.no.; name approved Copyright 9 ident. no.; location
C h e c k lis t e E l. S ic h e r h e it s e in r ic h t u n g e n 1 0 5 0 4 6 6 2
tnd; Änd. Nr.: Name aeprtifi Urheberrecht © Identnr.: Ort
c o m p le te d c h e c k lis t to b e f ile ( f lr i c r a n e file ^
identification sheet/col. recommended adjustment as bullt adjustment teststand signature as built adjustment yard signature
=DS+X1-F24 /39.B4 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=DS+X1-K14 /14.D2 Adjustment
Einstellung
Einstellung
Einstellung
Einstellung
Einstellung
Einstellung
Einstellung
Einstellung
Einstellung
Einstellung
=DS+X1-Q01 /II.Bl lsd=...xlr
=DS+X1-Q01 /11.B1 lo=...xln lr=...xlo
=DS+X1-Q02 /11.B4 2.5A
=GS+4A-S05 /12.B5 Functionstest

Funktionstest
=ZA+4A-S12 /19.B1 Functionstest
Funktionstest
commissioning eng. name signature date order no.;
Monteur Name Unterschrift Datum Auftraqsnr;
assembly group Sheet

Erstelt 2 7 .1 0 .0 8 Iw n s iw O U ra H E R R c h e c k lis t e le c tr ic s a f e ty d e v ic e s Slåsn,.: 5172 600 00 00 061 007 Anlage Blatt
ü e b h e r r -W e r k N e n z in g G m b H
ind; mod.no.; date name approved location
Ind; And. Nr.; Datum Name
Copyright®
Urheberrecht ©
C h e c k lis t e E l. S ic h e r h e it s e in r ic h t u n g e n
ident, nö.;
Identnr.;
10504662 Ort____
I ^ -------
c o m p le te d c h e c k lis t to b e file c n r i c r a n e file ^
identification sheet/col. recommended adjustment as built adjustment teststand signature as built adjustment yard signature
=ZA+4A-S13 /19.B5 Functionstest
Funktionstest
=ZA+4B-E06 /40.E2 700W
=ZA+4B-E06 /40.E2 90“C 120°C
connmissioning eng. name signature date order no.:

IVIonteur Name Unterschrift Datum Auftraqsnr.:
drawingno.; 5172 600 00 00 061 007 assem btygroup Sheet 53

Erstelt 27.10.08 IwnsiwO U E B H D IR
LiebheiT-W checklist electricsafetydevices Zeichnunqstir.; Anlaqe Blatt
ind: mod.no.; date nam
e approved Coeprk
yriNetn©
gh zingGmbH
ChecklisteEl. Sicherheitseinrichtungen ident,nö.: 10504662 location cf 54
Ind; Änd.Nr: Datum Nam
e geprüft Urheberrecht® Identnr: Ort von

Thông số kỹ thuật cẩu Liebherr

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Thông số kỹ thuật cẩu Liebherr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEC. NO.

TEL. NO. S H IP NO. S H IP NAME

APPROVED B. H. BAEK NAME O F D R A W IN G

DATE 2012. 1 2 .10 SCALE D R A W IN G NO.

□ Asennus-, käyttö-, kunnossa-

More languages - see web site

The Manufacturer: (Name and address of the manufacturer)

hereby declares that

The Products: (Product identification)

are in conformity with the corresponding essential requirements of following EC directive:

The motors are in compliance with the following harmonized standard:

ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

3. Installation and com m issioning ................................................................................................................... 7

5. Low voltage m otors in variable speed o p e ra tio n ................................................................................. 1

ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009 EN-3

5.3 Thermal protection of w in d in g s.......................................................................................................... 11

6.1. General inspection ............................................................................................................................... 14

7.1. Spare parts ...........................................................................................................................................18

8.1 Noise le v e ls ...........................................................................................................................................18

E N -4 ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

1 .1 D e c la r a tio n o f C o n fo r m ity Additional information Is required for some machine types

ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009 EN-5

2 .1 R e c e p tio n ch e c k Damaged lifting lugs must not be used. Check that

The motor should always be stored indoors (above 2 .4 l\/la c h in e w e ig h t

315 - 1700 1000 -

motor. 450 - 4500 - -

Motors with the same frame may have a different

EN-6 ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

Insulation resistance, corrected to 25°C, must exceed the

WARNING If the reference resistance value is not attained, the

WARNING Foundations must be even, see figure below, and

The type of bearing is specified on the rating plate. Ruler

Measure insulation resistance before commissioning and

ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009 EN-7

Coupling halves or pulleys must be balanced after 3 .7 M a c h in e s w it h d r a in p lu g s

Additional information on cables and glands suitable for

EN-8 ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

The voltage and connection are stamped on the rating NOTE!

For example, 690 VY, 400 VD indicates Y-connection for 3 .9 T e r m in a ls a n d d ir e c t io n

ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009 EN-9

The motor can only be used in applications it is intended

1. Do not step on the motor.

2. The temperature of the outer casing of the motor

3. Some special motor applications require special

4. Be aware of rotating parts of the motor.

5. Do not open terminal boxes while energized.

EN-10 ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

Additional information may be required by ABB to decide N o m in a l s u p p ly W in d in g in s u la t io n a n d

on the suitability for some machine types used in special v o lt a g e o f th e filt e r s r e q u ir e d

applications or with special design modifications. c o n v e rte r

The “ABB Standard Insulation” applies to all other motors 5 .2 .4 S e le c tio n o f w in d in g

Most of the motors covered by this manual are

Insulated bearings or bearing constructions, common

ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009 EN-11

For application supplied by other converters, the motors

5 .5 C a b lin g , g r o u n d in g and EM C 5.7.2 D im e n s io n in g w ith A B B A C S 800

EN-12 ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009 EN-13

WARNING Bearing types are specified in the respective product

Reliability is a vital issue for bearing lubrication intervals.

been delivered with a plug closed, it is advisable to 200 4 -8 40 000 40 000

EN-14 ABB/Manual for Low Voltage Motors 01-2009

On the lubrication information plate, greasing intervals 6 .2.3 L u b ric a tio n in te rv a ls a n d a m o u n ts

If it is not possible to regrease the bearings while the